New Books & Bestsellers Spring 2021 (GBP) by Kogan Page

NEW BOOKS AND BESTSELLERS AUGUST 2020 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; JULY 2021

INNOVATION AND BEST PRACTICE FOR BUSINESS SUCCESS

About Us Kogan Page is the leading independent global publisher of business books with over 1,000 titles in print. Founded in 1967, our award-winning work offers solutions for professional practice and academic achievement in the following areas: Business & Management

Kogan Page Inspire

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Risk & Compliance

Marketing & Communications

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Digital & Technology

Skills, Careers & Employability

Corporate Solutions Discover our bespoke solutions for businesses, including bulk sales and custom publishing opportunities, at www.koganpage.com/corporate

Ebooks Kogan Page books are available as ebooks from major ebook retailers and our website. We also offer multiple access for students through digital textbook platforms such as Kortext and VitalSource.

Accessibility Kogan Page has made a commitment to accessibility. We create highly accessible ebook files and we make sure they are readily available to users who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled at the same time as the print editions.

Inspection Copies Our books are available to lecturers through our inspection copy service. We will consider requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 10 or more students. You can request an inspection copy by registering for an academic account at www.koganpage.com/inspectioncopies

Stay Informed Subscribe to our newsletters for expert articles, sample chapters and special offers. Sign up today at www.koganpage.com/newsletter

Connect with Us: Accounting, Finance & Banking: @KPAcctFinance Business & Management: @KPBusinessMgmt HR & L&D: @KoganPageHR Kogan Page: @KoganPage Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations: @KPLogistics Marketing & Communications: @KPMktng Rights & Licensing: @KPRights Risk, Compliance & CSR: @KPRiskCSR Skills, Careers & Employability: @KPSkillsCareers You can also find us on:

Contact Customer Services T: +44 (0) 20 7278 0433 | E: kpinfo@koganpage.com

Table of Contents Kogan Page Inspire The Infinite Leader The Leadership Lab Influencers and Revolutionaries Future Shaper How to Future Beyond Good

7 8 9 10 11 12

Digital & Technology The Intelligence Revolution Cyber Wars Blockchain Babel Agile Transformation Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI Reality Check

15 16 17 18 19 20

Business Management Love Your Imposter Make Your Brain Work The Power to Change Accounting and Finance for Managers How to be an Even Better Manager Virtual Leadership Rapid Growth, Done Right Stand Out Neuroscience for Leaders The Leadership Skills Handbook The Trusted Executive You Lead The Nine Types of Leader Resetting Management Getting to Nimble Rule Breaker Still Loading Organizing for the New Normal To Be Honest The Agile Leader Build Your Cultural Agility Radical Business Model Transformation Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution The Business Plan Workbook Boss It She Made It Future Tech Crypto Wars Be A Free Range Human Get a Life! The Simplicity Principle Be Data Literate

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Skills, Careers & Employability The Success Trap The A-Z of Careers and Jobs Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions Bounce Back Career Fear (and how to beat it) Confident Coding Confident Data Skills Confident Digital Content Confident Web Design Confident Cyber Security Good Work Make Your Own Map Practical Teaching Skills for Driving Instructors Success After Service

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

Human Resources, Learning & Development Remote Work Solving the Productivity Puzzle Human Resource Practice Agile HR Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Flexible Working Outstanding People Practice Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures Introduction to HR Technologies Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment Transformational HR Systemic Coaching and Constellations Performance Coaching Excellence in Coaching 50 Top Tools for Coaching Leadership Team Coaching Managing and Leading People through Organizational Change The Heart of Transformation

www.koganpage.com

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

High-Tech High-Touch Recruiting Agile Workforce Planning Digital Talent Neurodiversity at Work Building Top Performing Teams The Energized Workplace Networked, Scaled, and Agile Managing Culture Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation Organization Development Human Experience at Work Employee Experience by Design Artificial Intelligence for Learning The Learning and Development Handbook Excellence in Learning and Development Practice Designing Accessible Learning Content Human Resource Management at Work Data-Driven HR Excellence in People Analytics

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

Marketing & Communications The New Chameleons Brand Storytelling Brand Elevation International Brand Strategy Communicate in a Crisis Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns Litigation PR Influential Internal Communication Truth Be Told PR Technology, Data and Insights Commercialized Customer Experience Selling Transformed Leading the Customer Experience A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing Digital Marketing Strategy The End of Marketing Understanding Digital Marketing E-Commerce Website Optimization Influencer Marketing Strategy B2B Digital Marketing Strategy Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio Customer Insight Strategies Stand Out Marketing Activate Brand Purpose Marketing Strategy

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 139 The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 140 Health and Safety in Logistics 141 E-Logistics 142 Managing the Demand-Driven Supply Chain 143 Retail Innovation Reframed 144 Road Passenger Transport Management 145 The Road to Zero Emissions 146 Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2021 147 Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals 148 A Practical Guide to eAuctions for Procurement 149 Warehouse Management 150 Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 151 Strategic Value Chain Management 152 Supply Chain Risk Management 153 Global Logistics 154 Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 155 A Circular Economy Handbook 156 Maritime Logistics 157

Accounting, Finance & Banking Reinventing Banking and Finance Accounting for Non-Accountants Financial Technology Green and Sustainable Finance The Daily Telegraph Tax Guide 2020 Good Retirement Guide 2021 The Financial Services Guide to Fintech The Cryptocurrency Revolution

160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167

Risk, Compliance & CSR Operational Risk Management in Financial Services Fundamentals of Risk Management Cyber Risk Management The Organizational Resilience Handbook Business Continuity Management IT Governance

170 171 172 173 174 175

New Books by Month August

February

The Intelligence Revolution Career Fear (and how to beat it) Solving the Productivity Puzzle The Energized Workplace Artificial Intelligence for Learning B2B Digital Marketing Strategy The Organizational Resilience Handbook

9781789664348 9781789664621 9781789664744 9780749498665 9781789660814 9781789662542 9781789661842

Good Work Make Your Own Map Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures Human Experience at Work The Learning and Development Handbook The New Chameleons A Practical Guide to eAuctions for Procurement

9781789664706 9781789667004 9781789665819 9781789663457 9781789663402 9781789665154 9781789663259 9780749497019 9781789665604

Beyond Good Getting to Nimble Rule Breaker Build Your Cultural Agility Future Tech Be Data Literate Introduction to HR Technologies Networked, Scaled, and Agile Employee Experience by Design Influencer Marketing Strategy Activate Brand Purpose Retail Innovation Reframed Green and Sustainable Finance

September

March

How to Future Love Your Imposter Stand Out Confident Web Design Confident Cyber Security High-Tech High-Touch Recruiting Health and Safety in Logistics Road Passenger Transport Management The Road to Zero Emissions

October The Infinite Leader The Power to Change Boss It Success After Service The Cryptocurrency Revolution

9781789666496 9781789664959 9781789666410 9781789665932 9781789665680

November Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 9781789665390 Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution 9781789666809 Agile HR 9781789665857 Brand Elevation 9781789664669 Customer Insight Strategies 9781789662504 Strategic Value Chain Management 9780749484422 Reinventing Banking and Finance 9781789664096

December The Success Trap Flexible Working Selling Transformed Stand Out Marketing Financial Technology

9781789665642 9781789665895 9781789665352 9781789664829 9781789665437

January Reality Check You Lead The Nine Types of Leader Resetting Management She Made It Outstanding People Practice Agile Workforce Planning Building Top Performing Teams Excellence in People Analytics International Brand Strategy Litigation PR Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio

9781789665727 9781789668360 9781789667219 9781789667639 9781789663327 9781398600041 9781398600287

www.koganpage.com

9781789666335 9781789666250 9781789666960 9781789667172 9781789666847 9781789667042 9781789666052 9781789666762 9780749498290 9781789666298 9781789667332 9781789666090

9781789667295 9781789667554 9781789667677 9781789666595 9781398600324 9781789668018 9781789665277 9781789667790 9781789667714 9781789667257 9781789668247 9781398600911 9781789664546

April Still Loading Organizing for the New Normal Digital Talent Neurodiversity at Work Managing Culture Influential Internal Communication Truth Be Told PR Technology, Data and Insights Business Continuity Management

9781398600447 9781398600799 9780749490959 9781398600249 9781789661088 9781789666137 9781398600164 9781398600409 9781789668131

May To Be Honest 9781398600669 Remote Work 9781398600362 Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 9781398600201 Commercialized Customer Experience 9781789667875 Leading the Customer Experience 9781789666878 Digital Marketing Strategy 9781789667417 Managing the Demand-Driven Supply Chain 9781398600591

June Excellence in Learning and Development Practice Designing Accessible Learning Content

9781789665239 9781789668056

July Crypto Wars The Heart of Transformation Operational Risk Management in Financial Services

9781398600683 9781398600089 9781789667080

Kogan Page Inspire Books that inspire you to think differently

www.koganpage.com

Also in the series

Tom Goodwin April 2018 9780749482282

Alexandra Levit October 2018 9780749483456

Chris Lewis & Pippa Malmgren October 2018 9780749483432

Sean Pillot de Chenecey October 2018 9780749482817

Chris Duffey March 2019 9780749483838

Daniel Newman & Olivier Blanchard July 2019 9780749484248

Niamh O'Keeffe March 2020 9781789662184

Sean Pillot de Chenecey February 2020 9780749498689

Scott Smith & Madeline Ashby September 2020 9781789664706

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

The Infinite Leader Balancing the Demands of Modern Business Leadership

This book

the spectacular leadership failures we have witnessed in recent history with a lack of « Explains balance between the rational and emotional as well as the spiritual and physical elements of leadership

a whole new model of adaptable leadership that aims to find balance between sometimes « Proposes paradoxical forces and influences part of the Inspire series, which offers insightful analyses of the new, VUCA world of business, « Isfrom digital transformation to the age of artificial intelligence and beyond Is written duo Chris Lewis and Pippa Malmgren, whose last co-authored book, The « LeadershipbyLab,best-selling was a double winner at the 2019 Best Business Book Awards

Description Bestselling and award-winning author duo Chris Lewis and Pippa Malmgren are calling it out. In The Infinite Leader, they argue that the spectacular leadership failures that we have witnessed in recent history, stretching across business, community life and politics, can be explained by a lack of balance. Having spent centuries perfecting processes and systems to maximize productivity and being indicted to the shrine of numbers, KPI’s and financial forecasting, we have to admit, there are very few examples of sustainable and inspirational leadership figures out there. By over-relying on the hard stuff, we have disregarded whole dimensions of values that are desperately needed when trying to engage communities of people towards a common goal. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789666496 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789666502 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789666519 £45 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

The Infinite Leader is a roadmap to introducing balance back into organizations. You can adapt your stance to the infinite possibilities facing you as a leader, and balance the main quadrants of the rational, emotional, spiritual and physical leader, to deliver sustainable leadership with integrity. Business is still about people - people operate across paradoxes and opposing forces, in a world that confounds these influences. Leaders need to continuously juggle and neutralize these to succeed. Be what your people need you to be and learn what they don’t teach you in business schools; remain analytical and numbers-focused when needed, but also bring your heart, person and integrity to leadership.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Chris Lewis is the founder and CEO of LEWIS, one of the largest independent marketing and communications agencies in the world. He is a media trainer who has coached senior politicians, businesspeople and celebrities. He is a published author and journalist featured in The Financial Times, Daily Telegraph and The Guardian. Dr Pippa Malmgren is a trend spotter who advises investors and governments about economic policy. She anticipated the Financial Crisis in 2007, the Chinese slowdown, Brexit and Trump’s presidency. She has featured on the BBC, Bloomberg, The Financial Times and The Economist.

Kogan Page Inspire

Why has our leadership failed? 1 The great uncoupling of trust 2 More, bigger, biggest. Good, better, best. 2 How we fix this 3 A new way of looking at the leadership state 4 How to use the zero scope 5 Techniques for establishing balance 6 The philosophy of zero state thinking 3 A New model of Leadership 7 Zeronomics 8 Zero ego, zero gender 9 Zero Education 10 Zero responsibility 11 The need for imagination and creativity 12 Conclusions

The Leadership Lab Understanding Leadership in the 21st Century

This book

insights from C-level executives in businesses like Microsoft, Pret a Manger, General « Contains Electric, Oracle, the Red Cross and Google regarding the macroeconomic and geopolitical trends that are affecting business and how we can respond to them

« Winner of the Business Book Awards 2019 Business Book of the Year an understanding of how business exists within a wider world of power, economics and « Builds international relations « Allows readers to understand the key elements that are disrupting business « Is part of the Inspire series Description WINNER: Independent Press Award 2020 - Leadership Category WINNER: Business Book Awards 2019 - Business Book of the Year WINNER: NYC Big Book Award 2019 - Business General Category

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018 Paperback: 9780749483432 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749483449 £14.99 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 215x139 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

How can today’s business leaders keep up with seismic geopolitical and economic shifts that include Brexit, inflation and the unseating of traditional political powers, and what do these mean for their own leadership narratives? In The Leadership Lab, bestselling author Chris Lewis and superstar megatrends analyst Dr Pippa Malmgren help you lead your team through this change successfully. Covering everything from how to build a new type of leadership trust when other spheres of public power have been overturned, to robots overtaking companies and worldwide indebtedness affecting business, this book explains not only why the old rules no longer apply, but also how to blaze a trail in this new world order and be the best leader you can be. The Leadership Lab includes exclusive interviews with top executives grappling with the new world order and discusses what key global trends keep them awake at night and how they respond to them. It is a must-read for aspiring leaders and C-level executives seeking to develop a real intuition when it comes to dealing with the global currents disrupting business and how to build an empathetic, credible, stable and strong leadership path.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Spanish, Turkish, Vietnamese

Author Information Chris Lewis is the founder and CEO of LEWIS, one of the largest independent marketing and communications agencies in the world. He is a media trainer who has coached senior politicians, businesspeople and celebrities. He is a published author and journalist featured in The Financial Times, Daily Telegraph and The Guardian. Dr Pippa Malmgren is a trend spotter who advises investors and governments about economic policy. She anticipated the Financial Crisis in 2007, the Chinese slowdown, Brexit and Trump’s presidency. She has featured on the BBC, Bloomberg, The Financial Times and The Economist.

Kogan Page Inspire

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Understanding the effects of overload – Information and inundation 2 Understanding a new type of economics – Internationalism and insularity 3 Understanding a new type of behaviour – Immediacy and impatience 4 Understanding a new philosophy – Intelligence and insurgency 5 Understanding geopolitics and the new infrastructure – Infrastructure and isolation 6 Understanding the data sphere – Innovation and intimidation 7 Understanding gender – Inclusivity and inequality 8 Understanding a new world – Inspiration and inversion 9 The global leaders’ narrative

Influencers and Revolutionaries How Innovative Trailblazers, Trends and Catalysts Are Transforming Business

This book

how to stay ahead of the competition by understanding key business and innovation « Explains trends and movements the importance of adapting to the never normal world and being agile in response to « Shows constant business shifts readers how to transform the way that they do business while remaining true to their core « Teaches values of the Inspire series, which offers insightful analyses of the new, VUCA world of business, from « Part digital transformation to the age of artificial intelligence

Description The environmental crisis, disruptive technologies, unforeseen competitors and unpredictable consumers are deeply challenging issues keeping business leaders awake at night. Influencers & Revolutionaries describes the emerging movements and future niches of growth that will impact international markets and industries; including the homes, workplaces and cities of tomorrow. People are looking for alternatives and demanding a better way of doing business. Their demands mean that ethical, flexible, sustainable, collaborative and radical business strategies are required. Influencers & Revolutionaries charts inspiring innovation models created by visionary business leaders and brand teams. Illuminating the dynamic global trends shaping businesses across industries, Sean Pillot de Chenecey highlights the transformation of product, service and strategic development, as we move to a circular and more ethical economy. Featuring a new innovation manifesto, this book is a guidebook covering important topics including: Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2020 Paperback: 9780749498689 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749498696 £14.99 Hardback: 9780749498702 £45 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 215x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

Author Information Sean Pillot de Chenecey is a marketing expert, who for over 20 years has combined brand consultancy with ethnographic activity and trend research around the world. His clients have included Unilever, Swatch, Heineken, Diageo, General Motors, Beiersdorf, AXA, Vodafone, Comptoir des Cotonniers, Muller, GlaxoSmithKline, Visa, Granarolo and Starwood; and he’s collaborated with numerous advertising, branding, design, media and PR agencies. He is a university lecturer and has written for Admap, Brand Strategy, Contagious, Dazed and Marketing. A public speaker, he’s given speeches for over a decade in Asia, Europe, Africa, the Middle East and North America.

Kogan Page Inspire

- Trend research, forecasting and scenario planning - Classic innovation theory vs current leading-edge thinking - New consumption patterns and fragmented niches of growth - Dynamic cross-category innovation from legacy brands and start-ups - Challenging convention via catalytic leadership and next-generation practises - How agile organizations leverage cultural and social trends to anticipate change - Utilizing business innovation to tackle social, cultural and environmental problems Strategists, marketers and developers need a playbook that informs and explains how they can create the next big thing. This book is for them.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Classic innovation theory and current leading-edge thinking 2 The disruptors disrupted. What next for adland? 3 The future of retail and the future home 4 How the food and drink industries leverage catalytic trends 5 The wellness economy meets the lifestyle industry 6 Smart cities, the IoT and connected living 7 Intelligent and sustainable – a new era of tourism and mobility 8 The transformation of entertainment by technology, experiences and personalization 9 The future of work – goodbye to certainty and stability. Hello to Industry 4.0 10 Fintech and insurtech, and the battle of choice vs privacy 11 Summary – The Influencers and Revolutionaries Innovation Manifesto 12 References and further reading 13 Index

Future Shaper How Leaders Can Take Charge in an Uncertain World

This book

« Illustrates ground-breaking thinking that will empower leaders to take control and shape the future readers checklists, questions and models helping them develop key skills of how to become a « Offers future leader « Contains case examples of iconic future shaper leaders, past and present part of the Inspire series, which offers insightful analyses of the new, VUCA world of business, « Isfrom digital transformation to the age of artificial intelligence and beyond Description We live in a world of continuous uncertainty and on the brink of a massive digital and AI-powered shift. What should leaders do? The answer is not to shy away from inevitable changes and more uncertainty, but to have the courage to face it. Leaders need to take charge by embracing new technologies and ideas and converting these into opportunities for leadership innovation. The best ways for leaders to predict the future is to help create the future. Future Shaper is about giving back a sense of control. It’s about empowering leaders to take charge and shape the future. Niamh O’Keeffe asks leaders to re-calibrate their leadership skills to include imagination and courage, to embrace innovation and drive growth and create a better future.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2020 Paperback: 9781789662184 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789662191 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789662207 £45 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 215x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

Author Information Niamh O’Keeffe, (UK) is a leadership advisor, established author and the founder of First100 and The Prosper Leadership Academy (www.prosperleadershipacademy. com). She has over 25 years career experience in leadership advisory services - including strategy consulting, executive search and leadership coaching. Her insights in this book are based on her experience as a trusted advisor to chief executives and working with senior leaders on key moments in their leadership role lifecycle: how to get promoted, how to have a great first 100 days, how to stay the course and legacy projects. O’Keeffe’s client list spans multiple industries and includes advising leaders of entrepreneurial ventures in London and New York, as well as senior executives at global corporations like Accenture, Microsoft and Oliver Wyman Group.

Kogan Page Inspire

Future Shaper helps readers to: · Embrace new digital technologies, understand AI and equip themselves for those not-yet-invented challenges · Gain insights from today’s successful leaders · Make an impact and feel more in control using an easy-to-understand leadership framework

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Complex)

Table of Contents 1 1

Leadership overwhelm The exhilaration and exhaustion of being a leader today 2 Empower yourself 2 Future shaper leadership intelligence playbook 3 Five key fundamentals of future shaping leadership intelligence 3 Preferable - establish your preferred future outcome 4 Persuade - convince people to follow you 5 Persist - be resilient and stay the course 6 Prove - nurture successful teams and deliver the right results 7 Platform - power up your network and multiply your impact 4 Future shaper leadership intelligence traits 8 F.U.T.U.R.E. shaper leadership traits 9 Future S.H.A.P.E.R. leadership traits 5 SHAPE A better future for everyone 10 Create a positive ripple effect on the world around you 11 References

12 Index

How to Future Leading and Sense-making in an Age of Hyperchange

This book

clear, practical and easy to understand tools that will help you spot trends and patterns, « Provides strategically evaluate different futures and guide your strategy a strategic framework to understand the uncertain nature of the current business world « Depicts that crucially allows you to embrace hyperchange and adapt and plan for it a common language to engage stakeholders and teams with innovation practices and « Delivers strategy foresight part of the Inspire series, which offers insightful analyses of the new, VUCA world of business, « Isfrom digital transformation to the age of artificial intelligence and beyond

Description Approach the future as a conversation, not a declaration. How can you be prepared for what’s next when emerging trends constantly threaten to turn your strategic plan on its head? The world of business is experiencing a state of hyperchange influenced by global movements, disruptive technologies, political uprisings and new consumer expectations. If your world is turned upside down, will you know how to pivot and thrive, or will you be roadkill in the ‘adapt or die’ business race? Futuring is the art of anticipating and testing the trade-offs of different futures by making sense of key trends, signals and emerging patterns. How to Future is the only book that will teach you how to become a strategy wayfinder, allowing you to evaluate, plan and prepare for better futures for you and your business.

New Edition: 1 Title

Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789664706 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664713 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789664720 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

Author Information Scott Smith is a renowned futurist, business writer and adviser who is an expert in strategic foresight and futures design. He has over 25 years of grounded experience in applied foresight and has advised global corporations, governments and NGOs including UNICEF, ASOS, the Dubai Future Foundation and Comcast. He has been featured in The Wall Street Journal, WIRED, Quartz and The Atlantic. He is based in Amsterdam. Madeline Ashby is a consulting futurist, expert and adviser on technology, culture, politics and strategic foresight, based in Toronto. She is a regular contributor to Slate and writes for MIT Technology Review.

Kogan Page Inspire

How to Future is a guidebook to futuring and arms you with tools, strategies and practices that illuminate new strategic pathways. Renowned futurists Scott Smith and Madeline Ashby teach you how to manage the daily flood of information and signals, and discern emergent patterns that have a direct impact on the direction of your business. How to Future isn’t about the “one future” you expect. Instead, this book equips you with valuable tools and concepts, builds a future-focused mindset and enables you to envision, stress-test and prototype adaptable, informed and agile strategic visioning. These tools will empower you, your team and your organization to anticipate whatever futures emerge.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents

Introduction - Why “future,” and why now? 1 Different futuring for different needs 2 Getting started - Scoping 3 Sensing and scanning Finding signals of the future now 4 Sensemaking and mapping Turning data and insights into patterns and themes 5 Scenario development Combining patterns and themes to tell strategic stories 6 Storytelling and prototyping - Creating ways for others to engage with your future stories 7 Assessing effectiveness 8 What to do next? 9 Conclusion 10 Resources and further reading

Beyond Good How Technology is Leading a Purpose-driven Business Revolution

This book

how business for good is delivering massive society and sustainability benefits whilst « Illustrates growing strong business performance and answering to shareholders the example of how fintech, which is a massively hyped and growing industry, is delivering « Uses societal change by designing for inclusive financial services how the forces driving the finance industry can also be used across other industries and « Showcases categories, including health, education, retail and housing exclusive interviews from leading B-Corp executives as well as policy makers like « Contains Patagonia, Apple, Mastercard, M-Pesa, Salesforce, Ellevest, Tata, and TMobile part of the Inspire series, which offers insightful analyses of the new, VUCA world of business, « Isfrom digital transformation to the age of artificial intelligence and beyond

Description When we think of global corporations and business in general, do we feel pride in how we do things? Are we doing enough, given the undeniable reality of global climate change and the inequality faced by millions of people every day? Beyond Good is a call to arms for business leaders to recognise how they can do well by doing good.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667295 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789667301 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789667318 £45 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Kogan Page Inspire

Author Information Theodora Lau is a fintech consultant who works with financial institutions, corporates, entrepreneurs and venture capitalists. She was the LinkedIn Top Voice for Economy and Finance in 2017, and a top FinTech, Digital and AI Onalytica influencer. She lives in Washington D.C. Bradley Leimer writes and speaks about banking and technology, and advises start-ups and major corporates. He is former Head of Innovation and FinTech at Santander US and was named a Top 20 Social Influencer in Fintech by Financial Brand, as well as a Top 100 Fintech Leader by City A.M. He lives in California.

Kogan Page Inspire

Business for good, which is the philosophy that you can pursue profits whilst delivering on sustainable and societal development goals, is already delivering big changes in the business world. In Beyond Good, top tech influencers Theodora Lau and Brad Leimer, showcase how fintech is taking the lead and what we can all learn from it. The winners in these tech start-ups are utilizing a momentum that exists within in a thriving eco-system of current incumbents facing up to revolutionizing start-ups. They unlock possibilities with new technologies and serve the often-forgotten demographics to make financial health and inclusion a reality. With exclusive interviews with experts from the B-Corp world, policy makers and executives, this book also showcases how companies like M-Pesa, MoneyLion, Wholefoods, Microsoft, Flourish Ventures, Paypal and Cargill are doing their bit to make our world better - and you can too.

Table of Contents 1 Foundation for Change 1 The Changing Tides 2 The Foundation of a Truly Inclusive Society 3 The Forces for Disruption 2 An Altered Ecosystem 4 Financial Innovation and the Changing Business Model 5 Serving Forgotten Demographics: A Call for Action - and Inclusion 3 A New Hope Across Industries 6 The Profit Conundrum 7 Lessons for Leaders 8 The Way Forward 9 Moving Hearts and Minds to Action

Digital & Technology

www.koganpage.com

Featured Titles

Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI Alexander Borek & Nadine Borek-Prill November 2020 9781789665390

Reality Check Jeremy Dalton January 2021 9781789666335

The Intelligence Revolution

Blockchain Babel

Bernard Marr August 2020 9781789664348

Igor Pejic March 2019 9780749484163

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

The Intelligence Revolution Transforming Your Business with AI

This book

an actionable guide to setting up an AI strategy that encompasses the main three areas « Delivers where AI has the most impact: products, services and processes how AI and the host of new technologies it unveils is reinventing mainstream business « Illustrates and redefining the standards of operations, service delivery and customer expectations AI-fuelled business success stories by the likes of Amazon, John Deere, Disney, Salesforce, « Includes Spotify, Autodesk, Nest, Kohler and Rolls Royce by bestselling author, global influencer, keynote speaker and digital guru Bernard Marr « Iswhowritten has been named as one of the top 5 LinkedIn voices to follow in 2019

Description Artificial Intelligence (AI) is here to stay. No longer confined to the world of science fiction, AI has infiltrated the mainstream and is the new electricity for business. Bestselling author, Bernard Marr, shows you how to harness and integrate it with your business strategy. We all know about driverless cars, automated production lines and chatbots but how do you ensure your business keeps up and where do you start? Bestselling author and strategy guru, Bernard Marr, argues that AI absolutely applies to your business and explains how to design an AI strategy that will guarantee its success. The Intelligence Revolution explores the opportunities and challenges that come with this monumental new taskforce that is defining the new standards of business.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789664348 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664355 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789664379 £45 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Digital & Technology

Author Information Bernard Marr is a digital transformation, AI and big data guru and a bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has worked with and advised many of the world’s best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business models and strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of AI and big data for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse.

Digital & Technology

Guiding us through intelligent products, services and work processes, The Intelligence Revolution illustrates how new technologies are impacting customer experience, product and service design and work efficiency. Bernard Marr delights us with fascinating case studies of businesses excelling at maximizing the potential of AI like Netflix, Autodesk, Disney, Rolls Royce and Amazon. Don’t be left behind. Instead, discover how to turbocharge your business.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1

Introduction and setting the scene 1 The transformative impact of the intelligence revolution 2 How we got to the intelligence revolution 2 Artificial Intelligence in business 3 Artificial Intelligence in business 4 Using AI to make more intelligent products 5 Using AI to provide more intelligent services 6 Using AI to improve your business operations and processes 3 Becoming an AI business 7 Finding the AI opportunities in your business 8 People and culture 9 The need for ethics, trust and transparency 10 AI needs data (lots of data) 11 The need for a technology overhaul 12 Leadership challenges 13 A look ahead 14 Appendix

Cyber Wars Hacks that Shocked the Business World

This book

a gripping story-telling approach so that the reader can learn about the technology, complex « Takes consequences and real life facts in an accessible and entertaining way in-depth accounts of hacks on Sony Pictures, TK Maxx, TalkTalk, John Podesta, and Internet « Covers of Things devices as well as what the hacks of the future will look like the reader understand how cyber attacks happen, where the weak spots can be and how to « Helps stay vigilant and protect themselves and their organizations in this new world of digital threat an analysis of the sophistication, impact, avoidability and key lessons of each hack to help « Features the reader better understand the nature of the threat facing organizations today and what they can do to mitigate it Covers different hacking techniques - including DDOS, phishing, malware, mirai - as well as different degrees of sophistication and avoidability Is written by renowned technology journalist Charles Arthur

« «

Description

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2018 Paperback: 9780749482008 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749481995 £14.99 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Digital & Technology

Cyber Wars gives you the dramatic inside stories of some of the world’s biggest cyber attacks. These are the game changing hacks that make organizations around the world tremble and leaders stop and consider just how safe they really are. Charles Arthur provides a gripping account of why each hack happened, what techniques were used, what the consequences were and how they could have been prevented. Cyber attacks are some of the most frightening threats currently facing business leaders and this book provides a deep insight into understanding how they work, how hackers think as well as giving invaluable advice on staying vigilant and avoiding the security mistakes and oversights that can lead to downfall. No organization is safe but by understanding the context within which we now live and what the hacks of the future might look like, you can minimize the threat. In Cyber Wars, you will learn how hackers in a TK Maxx parking lot managed to steal 94m credit card details costing the organization $1bn; how a 17 year old leaked the data of 157,000 TalkTalk customers causing a reputational disaster; how Mirai can infect companies’ Internet of Things devices and let hackers control them; how a sophisticated malware attack on Sony caused corporate embarrassment and company-wide shut down; and how a phishing attack on Clinton Campaign Chairman John Podesta’s email affected the outcome of the 2016 US election.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Arabic, Chinese (Simplified), Korean, Russian, Spanish

Author Information Charles Arthur is a freelance journalist, and author of Digital Wars: Apple, Google, Microsoft and the Battle for the Internet, published by Kogan Page. From 2005-2014 he was technology editor at The Guardian newspaper, where he worked on coverage of scores of stories including Wikileaks, Anonymous, and LulzSec. Previously he was science and technology editor at The Independent, and before that worked at New Scientist, Business Magazine and Computer Weekly.

Digital & Technology

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Sony – Systems Wiped, Internal Documents Leaked and Network Completely Shut Down by “The Guardians of Peace” 2 TalkTalk – 157,000 Customer Details Stolen by a Hacker 3 John Podesta – Gmail Account Hacked and Emails Sent to Wikileaks 4 Mirai – The DDOS Hack that Revealed the Vulnerability of Internet of Things Devices 5 HBGary – The Security Company Brought Down by Anonymous 6 TK Maxx – 94m Credit Card Details Stolen 7 Ransomware – Using Cryptography as a Weapon to Hold Your Data Hostage 8 Conclusion

Blockchain Babel The Crypto Craze and the Challenge to Business

This book

management theory with blockchain analysis and competition dynamics to dispel the « Combines seven most pervasive myths that plague the understanding of blockchain « Explains an important technological disruption for business leaders and entrepreneurs concrete strategic recommendations for banks, fintechs, cloud giants, data behemoths and « Provides companies keen to stay at the cutting-edge of tech developments by McKinsey and The Financial Times as one of the top three best business book proposal « Shortlisted as part of the Bracken Bower prize

Description WINNER: Independent Press Award 2020 - Technology Category Blockchain is the technology behind bitcoin and other crypto-currencies. According to Santander, it could save financial institutions $15-20bn a year from 2022 onward. Most experts see an unprecedented potential, but many banks, payment processors and credit card companies fret that bitcoin entrepreneurs could cast a pall over their core business. Whatever the position of blockchain, many voices are shouting from different angles, creating a cacophony of confusion including techevangelists, anarcho-libertarians and industry experts. But while everybody in IT and banking seems to have an opinion on the blockchain, there is little systematic research, no strategic analysis. Blockchain Babel is the ultimate guide to the most disruptive technology to have entered the finance industry in recent years.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2019 Paperback: 9780749484163 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749484170 £14.99 Hardback: 9780749497989 £45 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 215x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Digital & Technology

Author Information Igor Pejic is the Head of Marketing at BNP Paribas PF AT, part of Europe’s largest banking group. A former business journalist, the author regularly comments on payments, transactions and the blockchain in the media. He was voted by McKinsey and The Financial Times as one of three finalists in the Bracken Bower Prize with his work on blockchain in 2016, which has resulted in this book.

Digital & Technology

Blockchain Babel looks at blockchain alongside innovation diffusion, competitive dynamics and management strategy. Shortlisted as one of the three best business book proposals by McKinsey and the Financial Times for the Bracken Bower Prize in 2016, this is a must-read for business leaders and aspiring leaders wanting to grasp blockchain and put it into context and understand the practical implications it may have.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Spanish

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Blockchain, bitcoin and distributed ledgers – Disentangling the hype 2 A libertarian fantasy in the most regulated of industries 3 The dreaded Kodak moment that will never happen – Why banking is different 4 Data behemoths are coming 5 Hunting for the new competitive advantage 6 Business-model evolution – The arrival of the IT paradigm 7 An unparalleled promise… for some

Agile Transformation Structures, Processes and Mindsets for the Digital Age

This book

how to replace outdated organizational structures and processes to achieve business « Explains success in a digitally-empowered world « Shows how to create and engage high performing teams to build momentum for change practical guidance on how to tackle the employee mindset challenges that can hinder agile « Includes transformation guidance on how to embed agile approaches in all areas of an organization including HR, « Provides Sales, Operations, Finance and Procurement « Features case studies from organizations including Airbnb, Amazon, Netflix and Vodafone

Description LONGLISTED: CMI Management Book of the Year 2020 - Technology and Patterns at Work Transformed Category Traditional organizational structures and cultures are no longer fit for purpose in a digitally empowered world. The number of new and disruptive technologies is increasing, the speed of change shows no sign of slowing down and business leaders and organization development practitioners need to act urgently to enable their companies to succeed in the digital age.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Paperback: 9780749497477 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749497484 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789660272 £60 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital & Technology

Agile Transformation is the much-needed guide to achieving this success. Packed full of practical advice, this book covers everything: why new operating models are needed, how to apply agile principles at scale, leveraging digital-native processes and why change managers need to think big but start small. Agile Transformation also looks at how to build and engage high-performing teams for change, how to tackle the employee mindset that can hinder agile adoption and why developing an agile business is not a reason to fail to plan. There is also guidance on how to develop fast and focused high-velocity decision making, build momentum for change, and ensure that leadership behaviours and organizational culture catalyze true organizational agility. Featuring case studies from organizations including Amazon, Netflix and Vodafone, this book is crucial reading for businesses wanting to effectively compete in the new world of work.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Polish

Author Information Neil Perkin is the founder of Only Dead Fish, a consultancy that specializes in applying strategic understanding of emerging technologies to help companies optimize their effectiveness in the digitally empowered business environment. An expert in organizational agility, emerging media and digital strategy, he is a frequent conference speaker, curates the quarterly series of Firestarters thought leadership events for Google UK, and has been named by BIMA (British Interactive Media Association) as one of the most influential people in the UK digital industry.

Digital & Technology

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A new operating system for a new operating environment The agile business A new agile operating system for business Changing change management Think big Start small Scale fast Reinventing the organization

Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI A Practical Guide to Delivering Data Science and Machine Learning Products

This book

how to build the organizational capability to deliver Data and AI products and drive « Explains immediate business results as new digital technologies significantly disrupt business best practices, tools and templates for managing the organizational and technological « Provides change process to become an AI-driven enterprise a variety of international case studies across several industries such as insurance, fashion, « Includes consumer goods, finance, technology and automotive « Outlines how to develop a product strategy, build teams and design the platform and architecture key principles for sharing knowledge, educating staff on data and AI, and effectively « Provides engaging top executives

Description Leading digital businesses such as Netflix, Amazon and Uber use data science and machine learning at scale in all of their core business processes, but many organizations struggle to expand their projects beyond a small pilot scope. This book enables all organizations to realize the promised value of these projects. This book explains the step-by-step processes around creating an effective data and AI product portfolio strategy, establishing delivery processes, and maturing the digital architecture and platform in a hybrid cloud environment. Key consideration is given to the challenges of obtaining buy-in from senior stakeholders, breaking organizational silos through knowledge sharing and using data and AI education as a powerful method for driving change.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789665390 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665406 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665413 £90 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital & Technology

Author Information Dr Alexander Borek is Global Head of Data & Analytics at Volkswagen Financial Services, where he runs the global data analytics and AI organization across 45 markets. Previously, he led the global Data and AI transformation at Volkswagen Group and worked as data and analytics consultant at Gartner and IBM, where he had advised global Fortune 500 executives across industries. Dr Nadine Borek-Prill is Senior Associate Digital & AI, Project Manager and Machine Learning Software Developer at PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC). She is a co-founder and distinguished member of TriRhena, a university business consulting group. They are both based in Germany.

Digital & Technology

Each chapter includes tools and templates, common pitfalls and global case studies covering industries such as insurance, fashion, consumer goods, finance, technology and automotive. With coverage of security, data protection and compliance, Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI enables the organizational transformation required to get ahead in the age of artificial intelligence and digital disruption.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction to delivering data and AI products Developing the data and AI product strategy and goals Setting up the data and AI product delivery organization Identifying and defining data and AI products Delivering high quality data and AI products Designing the data and AI platform and architecture Driving transformative change with data and AI products The future of data and AI products in your organization

Reality Check How Immersive Technologies Can Transform Your Business

This book

explains how immersive technologies like AR and VR are currently being used in business, « Clearly from delivering cost-efficient training solutions, to customizable customer experience and information and data delivery

these innovative new technologies with exciting case studies detailing how the UK « Showcases Royal Justice Courts use VR to walk juries through crime scenes or how American Airlines uses VR to deliver a global and consistent training programme to new employees, as well as uses from businesses like BUPA, Thyssenkrupp, Google and McLaren Directly answers the main misconceptions about immersive technologies that most businesses raise, like them being too expensive, not scalable or only being a nice-to-have in your business arsenal Introduces readers to the challenges and practicalities of implementing these technologies including organisational or leadership buy-in, cultural barriers and content creation demands

« «

Description Discover the next big competitive advantage in business and learn how augmented and virtual reality can put your business ahead.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666335 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789666342 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789666366 £60 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Digital & Technology

Author Information Jeremy Dalton leads PwC’s VR/AR team, helping clients across all sectors understand, quantify and implement the benefits of virtual reality and augmented reality technology. As part of his mission to educate, connect and inspire, he is also a member of the World Economic Forum VR/AR Global Future Council and sits on the advisory board of ImmerseUK, a government-sponsored cross-sector network for businesses, research and educational organizations in the immersive technology industry.

Digital & Technology

Augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR) are part of a new wave of immersive technologies that offer huge opportunities for businesses, across industries and regardless of their size. Most people think of AR or VR as a new development in video gaming like Pokémon GO, or an expensive marketing campaign by the Nikes of the world. The truth is, businesses of any size can put these new technologies to immediate use in areas that include training and development, customer experience and design, as well as data and information management. Reality Check dispels the common misconceptions of AR and VR, such as them being too expensive or not easily scalable, and details how business leaders can integrate them into their business to deliver more efficient, cost-sensitive and exciting business solutions. The up and coming voice of AR and VR for businesses, Jeremy Dalton, uses exclusive case studies from organizations like Lloyds Banking Group, Honeywell and IKEA to showcase the practical uses of immersive technologies. He argues businesses will see the most immediate benefits in four areas: Training, design, information and data and telepresence. Reality Check makes cutting-edge technology accessible and grounds them into the everyday workings of normal businesses. It is your one-stop non-technical guide to incredibly exciting new technologies that will deliver results.

Table of Contents 1 Background and context 2 Drivers of AR/VR benefits 3 Benefits of implementation 4 AR/VR use case framework 5 Misconceptions 6 Challenges to implementation 7 Common pitfalls and challenging areas 8 Current developments and future outlooks

Business & Management Innovation and Best Practice in Business & Management Skills Business Improvement Business Planning Business Research Business Stories Creating Success Entrepreneurship Innovation International Business Leadership Management Analytics Professional Services Project Management Strategic Management Work/Life Balance

www.koganpage.com

Featured Titles

Love Your Imposter

You Lead

Rita Clifton September 2020 9781789667004

Minter Dial January 2021 9781789666250

She Made It

Resetting Management

Angelica Malin January 2021 9781789666847

Stéphane Girod & Martin Králik Janaury 2021 9781789667172

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Love Your Imposter Be Your Best Self, Flaws and All

This book

readers on ignoring the annoying inner voice that says they can’t succeed and explains how « Advises to exploit your imposter for personal success and growth or professional achievement by brand guru, Rita Clifton CBE, former Vice Chair of Saatchi & Saatchi and former Chair of « Written global brand agency, Interbrand why ‘brand thinking’ is a key skill for anyone, in any walk of life, and how to apply it « Explains successfully head on the commonly held myth that you should ‘fake it until you make it’, and explains « Tackles why authenticity and being yourself really does win out makes the case for business being more human and humane so that it will have a positive « Skilfully impact on people, the economy and society

Description Studies show that a massive 70% of people feel like an imposter at some point in their professional life. Brand guru and former Chair of Interbrand, Rita Clifton, shares how she learnt to work with her imposter self rather than hide from it in order to succeed in her career. Imposter syndrome can cause a constant fear of being found out that you aren’t ‘good enough’ or called out for being a ‘fraud’. It impacts people in different ways and can be debilitating and negatively affect relationships, personal life and careers. So what can you do about it? New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789667004 £12.99 Ebook: 9781789667011 £12.99 Hardback: 9781789667035 £40 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 198x129 Band: Trade Promo Product Category: General Subject: Work/Life Balance

Author Information Rita Clifton CBE, is the former Vice Chair and Strategy Director at Saatchi & Saatchi, was London CEO and then Chair at the global brand consultancy, Interbrand, for 15 years, and is based in the UK. In 2013 she co-founded the business and brand consultancy, Brand Cap, with offices in New York, Hong Kong and London. She is a regular commentator across all media, including CNN and BBC. She is a Board Trustee of The WWF and a member of the UK Government’s Sustainable Development Commission and Visiting Fellow at Saïd Business School, University of Oxford.

Love Your Imposter shows you how to take on your imposter self and use it as a driver to come out stronger. Using practical down-to-earth advice based on her experiences, Rita Clifton, tackles the myth that you need to ‘fake it until you make it’, highlights why authenticity can be your biggest weapon and skilfully makes the case for business being more humane.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

Business Management

Prologue - In my imposter dreams… Introduction - Why this book, why now, and why I’m writing it Chapter 1 - Clueless: Early days and dawning realisations Chapter 2 - Groundwork: Getting things together and learning new skills Chapter 3 - Hairy moments and happier outcomes Chapter 4 - Magic numbers and difficult statistics: The hard importance of numbers Chapter 5 - Money talks: Understanding financial statements and the language of finance Chapter 6 - Why you don’t have to fake it to make it: The downsides of faking it, and the upsides of being yourself Chapter 7 - Voices off: Why learning to be a good communicator is fundamental to success in life – and how just about anyone can do it Chapter 8 - Extending skills and expanding your life: Finding ‘a thing’ to stand out, and adding strings to your bow

10 Chapter 9 - Women rule OK: How to ‘do leading’ in a way that suits you 11 Chapter 10 - Nice guys don’t finish last. Niceness always wins in the end. The importance (and effectiveness) of being nice in work and play 12 Chapter 11 - You and the future of business. The future of business needs you. All of you, as a decent, flawed human being 13 Epilogue – Back to real life…

Make Your Brain Work How to Maximize Your Efficiency, Productivity and Effectiveness

This book

accelerated learning techniques, in a way that’s easy to grasp and follow immediately, to « Provides increase productivity in today’s time-pressured world on insights from the latest scientific research, presented in an engaging easy-to-follow style, « Based incorporating stories of characters everyone can relate to practical tips and action points in 15 critical areas that present challenges at work, from time « Gives management to meetings to this edition: Brand new content on developing resilience and creativity, and managing « New your work-life balance, as well as the most up to date research on neuroscience, and new examples of companies who are doing things well and pitfalls to avoid

Description Do you know how your brain functions? Do you sometimes feel like you’re fighting your own brain and habits in order to be productive at work? What if there was a way to work with your brain to become more efficient, effective and productive... and transform the way you operate? Make Your Brain Work is here to help. Author Amy Brann is fascinated by the application of brain science to business, and you don’t have to be an expert to understand - she explains the principles and latest insights in practical and easy-to-understand language, enabling you to understand the way you work, and form the helpful habits that will revolutionize your output.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/01/2020 Paperback: 9781789660494 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789660548 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789660500 £45 Previous edition: 9780749467579 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 215x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Author, consultant and global speaker Amy Brann is the founder of Synaptic Potential, through which she works with companies including Warner Brothers, EY, Twinings, the NHS and Mondelez International to help them better understand their teams, clients and organisations as a whole. She is the author of Make Your Brain Work and Neuroscience for Coaches, published by Kogan Page.

Business Management

With clear, in-context examples; hands-on tips; and focused case studies on how companies are doing things well and the pitfalls to avoid, this entertaining book will help you reduce the stress and overwhelm of poor time management, and help get you to that next professional level. Including brand-new content on developing resilience and creativity, and managing your work-life balance, now it’s even easier to Make Your Brain Work!

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Arabic 2nd Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents Introduction 1 You 1 Can a marshmallow predict your success? 2 Is your hippopotamus under attack? 3 Learning how to influence what feels out of your control 4 The challenge of being everything to everyone 5 Is a busy brain a clever brain? 6 Getting results easily and with less effort 2 Your colleagues and clients 7 Working and living in balance 8 Upgrading your life one step at a time 9 The minefield of motivating people 10 Resilience 11 Creativity 12 Appearing competent to others 3 Your company 13 Leading with your brain switched on 14 Work life balance 15 Managing people, managing brains

The Power to Change How to Harness Change to Make it Work for You

This book

why even the most substantial organizational change is still personal change and needs to « Explains be approached as such a range of business-focused tools, checklists and models to help readers explore how they « Provides react to different types of change, offering reengineering solutions with the issue that even tough change is a good thing and provides methods for dismantling « Deals the barriers which prevent us from benefitting from change

Description How we work, the way we live, even how long we live are changing at such a breathtaking pace that only those who can embrace everything that’s going on and reinvent themselves will survive and thrive. Yet change - even good change - is tough. Most of us feel utterly powerless when confronted by it, but we’re not. Learn to harness challenging situations and see the new opportunities with The Power to Change.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789664959 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664980 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789664966 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Campbell Macpherson is an international business advisor, keynote speaker, writer and award-winning author. He is adjunct faculty member of the Henley Business School. He helps CEOs and leadership teams align to a clear strategy, build enabling cultures and achieve the leadership of successful and sustainable change. He is the author of The Change Catalyst which won the inaugural Business Book of the Year award in March 2018.

Business Management

The Power to Change does more than simply enable you just to cope with change - it gives you the tools and approaches to embrace and celebrate change. Written by award-winning author, Campbell Macpherson, this book provides a genuinely unique approach to celebrating change that will resonate with readers, no matter what sort of change they have to confront. The Power to Change gives readers the permission to feel emotional and have doubts and fears about change. It provides a range of techniques to put change into perspective, and allows readers to embrace and prosper from the challenges it presents.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents Introduction 1 OUR RAPIDLY CHANGING WORLD 1 The technology revolution 2 Live long and prosper 3 Boyan Slat and the Millennials 4 The way we work has changed forever 2 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF CHANGE 5 The power of the mind 6 All change is personal 7 All change is emotional 3 HOW WE REACT TO CHANGE 8 The Change Matrix 9 The Change Curves 10 Return to The Matrix 4 OVERCOMING THE PERSONAL BARRIERS TO CHANGE 11 Denial 12 Our emotions 13 Our thoughts and beliefs 14 Fear of failure 15 Fear of the unknown 16 Fear of blame 17 Doubting the vision 18 The cold comfort of victimhood 19 Lack of assistance 5 BE YOUR OWN CHANGE CATALYST

20 Find your own emotional triggers 21 Choose your attitude 22 Helping others 23 Your personal SWOT & Strategic Plan 24 Be your own change catalyst

Accounting and Finance for Managers A Business Decision Making Approach

This book

designed for business and management students who need to understand accounting « Specifically and finance information in order to make better-informed business decisions clear language accessible to students who have not studied finance previously and explains all « Uses key concepts in a logical manner analytical skills through exercises, comprehension questions, and the interpretation of « Develops real financial statements and worked examples from well-known businesses, such as Tesco, Ryanair and Whitbread PLC New to this edition: provides updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring more modern real-world examples in extracts and in expert view sections. Online resources: bonus chapters containing guidance and teaching tips, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter

« «

Description Accounting and Finance for Managers rebukes the myth that in order to excel in accounting and finance you need to be great at mathematics. Split into two broad sections which focus on financial accounting and management accounts, this textbook uses clear, accessible language that will appeal to students from a variety of academic backgrounds.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789667516 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789667523 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789667530 £120 Previous edition: 9780749481148 Pages: 488 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Matt Bamber is an Assistant Professor of Accounting at York University, Canada. He originally trained as a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW; FCA), gaining practical experience in audit and corporate finance. In 2004, he made the transition from practice to higher education at the University of Bristol before joining Schulich School of Business in 2018. Simon Parry is the Finance Director of an international travel company and a Fellow of ICAEW and FCA. Over the last 20 years he has taught professional accounting courses for ACCA, CIMA, ICAEW, CIPD, together with academic courses for Business, Accounting and MBA students and is currently a visiting lecturer at Newcastle University.

Business Management

Taking a uniquely practical approach that focuses on the financial aspects of business decisions, the textbook covers all the core topics of accounting and finance, including basic bookkeeping, financial analysis, business planning, cash-flow analysis and investment decisions. Now in its third edition, Accounting and Finance for Managers contains updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring up-to-date real-world examples of real options, value chain analysis and competitive advantage analysis. This textbook features ‘traditional’ accounting practices in detail, but also covers topics with a strategic focus to ensure students learn to think in broader strategic terms. Written for an international audience using International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) terminology with supporting resources including additional exercise questions, curated further reading and lecture slides for each chapter.

Rights Sold 2nd Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 Introduction to accounting 2 Accounting concepts and systems 3 Financial analysis: Part I 4 Financial analysis: Part II 5 Business planning 6 Budgets and performance management 7 Cash flow and working capital management 8 Pricing decisions 9 Investment decisions 10 Financing decisions 11 Operational decisions Chapter - Appendix A: An introduction to double-entry bookkeeping Chapter - Appendix B: International Accounting/ Financial Reporting Standards Chapter - Appendix C: Example earnings announcements Chapter - Appendix D: Discount tables Chapter - Appendix E: Annuity factors Chapter - Appendix F: Useful web links

How to be an Even Better Manager A Complete A-Z of Proven Techniques and Essential Skills

This book

« Has sold over 170,000 copies worldwide and been translated into 17 languages the most important management skills that you need to manage people better, manage « Covers processes more efficiently and manage your own development to this edition: fully updated to be modern, practical and concise, with brand new case « New studies and examples by the UK’s bestselling human resource management (HRM) author, whose books have « Issoldwritten over a million copies and been translated into 21 languages Description Don’t just be a good manager... be an even better one. For current and aspiring managers alike, this bestselling handbook from expert author Michael Armstrong provides a whistle-stop tour of the skills and techniques you need to succeed. With a focus on practical application, you will be guided through four crucial areas of management: -Managing people -Management activities and processes -Management personal skills -Business and financial skills

Edition: 11 Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789668322 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789668339 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789668346 £45 Previous edition: 9780749480271 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

Business Management

How to be an Even Better Manager has sold over 170,000 copies worldwide and been translated into 17 languages. Fully revised and updated, this 11th edition covers all the skills an excellent manager needs, and now includes brand new case studies to ensure you will be equipped for the modern world of management. From resolving conflict and boosting your confidence to engaging your team and improving their performance, with this trusted and popular guide you won’t just be good - you’ll be an even better manager.

Rights Sold 10th Edition: Arabic, Chinese (Complex), Chinese (Simplified), Polish, Russian

Table of Contents 1 How to be a better manager 1 Managing people 2 How to motivate and engage people 3 How to be a better leader 4 How to manage performance 5 How to handle difficult situations with people 6 How to develop people 2 Management skills 7 How to control 8 How to coordinate 9 How to delegate 10 How to make things happen 11 How to manage your boss 12 How to manage change 13 How to manage conflict 14 How to manage a crisis 15 How to manage projects 16 How to manage time 17 How to persuade 18 How to negotiate 19 How to run a meeting 20 How to organise 21 How to plan and prioritise 22 How to deal with office politics 3 Personal skills 23 How to get on 24 How to solve problems and make decisions 25 How to innovate 26 How to conduct a selection interview

27 How to be interviewed for a job 28 How to listen 29 How to make effective presentations 30 How to write reports 31 How to be strategic 32 How to think clearly 33 How to recover from setbacks 34 How things go wrong and how to put them right 4 Business and financial management 35 How to be business-like 36 How to make a business case 37 How to budget 38 How to cut costs

Virtual Leadership Practical Strategies for Getting the Best Out of Virtual Work and Virtual Teams

This book

« Uses a range of case studies and examples to highlight what really works and what doesn’t tools and checklists to cut down on preparation time for meetings and enhance their « Includes effectiveness readers to develop a facilitative leadership approach through reflective questions and « Guides exercises proven tools, guidance and strategies to keep virtual team members engaged and delivering « Gives results Description The future of work is virtual, with dispersed teams, telecommuting, remote working and virtual meetings becoming the norm across sectors and industries around the world. However leading virtual teams requires a new set of skills and a facilitative leadership approach, Virtual Leadership is here to help. At its best, virtual working can be productive and creative, tapping into the best people wherever they are and bringing skills and experience together efficiently and at low cost. But it can also lead to isolated and disengaged workers, ineffective communication, and uncoordinated and even counterproductive activity.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2016 Paperback: 9780749475963 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749475970 £19.99 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 233x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Dr Penny Pullan is a thought leader in the field of virtual leadership, specializing in leading risky change projects involving virtual teams. She is a director of Making Projects Work, whose clients include multinational companies across many sectors, from drug companies to manufacturers, from IT multinationals to banks. She has run the Virtual Working Summit since 2010 with thousands of participants from around the world. She is the author of Business Analysis and Leadership (2013) also published by Kogan Page.

Virtual Leadership provides practical strategies, tools and solutions for the key issues involved in managing at a distance. How can I provide leadership, motivation and vision through virtual channels? How do I make virtual meetings effective, engaging and productive, and ensure actions are followed through? How do I create engaged and cohesive teams across distance, cultures and languages? How do I stop virtual team members silently checking out, distracted by local challenges and offline issues? With diverse case studies and examples, this is the essential guide to making a difference as a leader of virtual work.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Korean

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Business Management

The ups and downs of virtual working Virtual leadership: mindset and approach Virtual working with others Technology for virtual work Leading virtual meetings - the core of virtual working Leading virtual work outside of meetings Working across cultures, time-zones, languages and generations. Potential pitfalls and how to overcome them Putting your leadership into practice

Rapid Growth, Done Right Lead, Influence and Innovate for Success

This book

why organizations can’t leave innovation to chance and details the best way to build an « Explains innovative company how leaders can track and accelerate a company’s success and how to reward teams and « Advises individuals how to be an influential leader and speak to people in different departments, from « Shows technology to creatives, so that everyone understands an organization’s mission case studies and interviews with C Suite executives from businesses including TIVO, « Features Blackberry, XBox, Gartner, Salesforce, GoDaddy, Slack, Walt Disney, Paramount, Amazon TV, Mattel Toys and TOMS

Description Companies that rapidly grow have one thing in common: their leaders create symbiotic relationships between technical, creative and business minds. Innovation and leadership consultant, Val Wright, provides the tools needed to nurture and harness these connections, the right way. An inspirational CEO who influences and innovates successfully will become the pivotal power in any business by orchestrating an organization that helps everyone dream big while staying grounded and rapidly putting ideas into action.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2020 Paperback: 9781789664058 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664065 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789664089 £45 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 210x145 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Val Wright is a US based innovation and leadership consultant working with clients including Starbucks, LinkedIn, Microsoft, the Financial Times and the LA Lakers. She is a regular contributor to CNBC Inc, Fox Business News, Business Insider, Fast Company, MSN, Reuters, the LA Times.

Using examples from a number of leading corporations to provide advice to existing and aspiring CEOs, and featuring interviews with C-suite executives at some of the world’s most innovative businesses, Rapid Growth, Done Right is an essential guide to creating products and services that customers will love while delivering consistent growth.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Business Management

Why you cannot leave innovation to chance How to evaluate your creative, technical, and business power How to speak so everyone understands you How to build an innovative company How to communicate with anyone How to speed up decisions How to increase the quantity and quality of ideas How not to act like an idiot when working with a genius How to track and accelerate your success How to implement fast

Stand Out How to Build Your Leadership Presence

This book

strategies for developing the five components of leadership presence: credibility, « Provides confidence, composure, connection and charisma how to align other people’s impression with your true authentic self to create your « Explains leadership presence « Author of LinkedIn Learning course,Body Language for Leaders”” with over 2 million views”

Description Leadership presence doesn’t come with a title or promotion - good leaders develop presence over time. Leadership presence is how you show up and contribute to meetings, and whether or not you can project confidence and poise under pressure - do you have already have a presence? Leadership presence is that elusive “we know it when we see it” quality. You may have a leadership title or tremendous leadership potential, but that alone does not give you presence. Being perceived as a leader when interacting with customers, peers or executives is the essence of leadership presence. Your leadership presence is evaluated by others based on how you show up and contribute in meetings, how well you project confidence and keep poise under pressure and whether you can engage others in ways that are authentic, empathetic and motivational. Stand Out walks you through achieving this presence so you get that next promotion and give your career that extra boost.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789665819 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789665826 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789665833 £45 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Carol Kinsey Goman, Ph.D. is an international keynote speaker and authority on leadership presence and how body language can help (or hurt) a leader’s effectiveness, and is based in Berkeley, CA. With clients in over 300 organizations in 27 countries, Dr. Goman helps managers, executives and entrepreneurs build their impact and influence skills. She is a leadership contributor for Forbes and author of LinkedIn Learning’s “Body Language for Leaders” (with over 2 million views). She is cited in Industry Week, Investors’ Business Daily, CNN’s Business Unusual, PBS Marketplace, the Washington Post’s On Leadership column, MarketWatch radio and NBC Nightly News.

Business Management

Stand Out explains that the goal of leadership presence is to align other people’s impression of you with your best authentic self. Body language expert and executive coach Carol Kinsey Goman teaches the five essential skills needed: composure, connection, confidence, credibility and charisma. She also explains how leadership presence is different for women, how nonverbal communication builds or destroys presence and why self-promotion is essential. This book shows aspiring and experienced leaders alike how to more positively influence the impression they make on others.

Table of Contents 1

The essence of leadership presence 2 Credibility 3 Confidence 4 Composure 5 Connection 6 Charisma 7 Body Language for Leadership Presence 8 Increasing your visibility through self-promotion 9 Leadership presence for women 10 Leadership presence in different cultures

Neuroscience for Leaders Practical Insights to Successfully Lead People and Organizations

This book

a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations using the latest « Provides neuroscience findings « Offers leaders practical guidance in an easy to understand framework to this edition: new examples, activities and applicable leadership suggestions plus updates « New with the latest scientific developments in neuroscience relating to leadership « Relates theory to practice with real examples and a variety of individual and company examples « Presents primary research and academic research to help improve your leadership performance

Description To be an effective leader, we need to make use of our most valued asset - our brain. As our understanding of neuroscience increases, we learn how scientific insights can be applied to develop and enhance leadership. Neuroscience for Leaders captures the most up-to-date and important findings in neuroscience and links these to the business world. This guide offers a simple framework to put these principles into practice to make better decisions, take the right actions and find faster solutions. Now in its second edition, the book presents a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations. The authors’ ‘Brain Adaptive Leadership’ approach offers a step-by-step guide to enhancing the way leaders think, understanding and nurturing emotions, shaping automated brain responses and developing dynamic relationships. Examples, activities and practical suggestions are all designed to be clear and engaging. Neuroscience for Leaders is the essential guide for leaders who are ready to gain the business advantage scientifically. Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789662146 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789662153 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789662160 £60 Previous edition: 9780749475512 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Nikolaos Dimitriadis is a communications professional, educator and consultant. He is the Regional Director of the University of Sheffield International Faculty, City College, for the Western Balkans. He delivers innovative post-grad modules, corporate training, executive coaching and consulting in brain-based change, leadership and neuro-communications approaches. As an award-winning consultant, he has worked with international brands such as IKEA, IBM, Nestle, Johnson&Johnson and Coca-Cola. Dr Alexandros Psychogios is a researcher and consultant in leadership and complexity, organizational behaviour and change and brain-based leadership. He is Professor of Leadership & International HRM in Birmingham City Business School at Birmingham City University, a Research Visitor in South Eastern European Research Centre (SEERC) and an Associate Researcher in GNOSIS Research Group of the Management School at the University of Liverpool.

Business Management

1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Japanese 2nd Edition: Chinese (Complex), Portuguese

1 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 7 3 8 9 4 10 11 12 13

Introduction – The leadership enigma and the human brain Pillar 1 thinking brain Powerful brain, powerful leader Clear mind, strong direction Higher performance, more followers Summary of pillar 1 Pillar 2 emotional brain More emotion, better decisions Right emotion, right action Summary of pillar 2 Pillar 3 brain automations Gut reaction, faster solution Summary of pillar 3 Pillar 4 relational brain More connected, more successful Brain communication, better persuasion Summary of pillar 4 Concluding remarks – The future, the brain and the BAL approach

The Leadership Skills Handbook 100 Essential Skills You Need to be a Leader

This book

practical advice on over 101 leadership skills plus tips, exercises and examples, arranged in « Features an easy dip-in-and-out style you to create your own personalized formula for success, based on a combination of what « Allows works best for both the individual reader’s career and their company to this edition: exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the current « New volatile and ambiguous business world by award-winning and best-selling author, Jo Owen, who has sold hundreds of thousands « Isof written copies of his books on leadership and management worldwide

Description WINNER: CMI Management Book of the Year 2013 - New Manager Category (previous edition) The Leadership Skills Handbook from best-selling author Jo Owen reveals the essential skills you need to be an effective leader. It shows you what works in practice, not in theory, in crucial areas such as people skills, career skills, mindset skills, organization skills, personal values and behaviours. Each skill is presented in a concise, easy to follow format, with an accompanying framework to help you deploy it in your own life. The skills are about the real challenges real leaders must master, and as you observe and record real-life examples of skills in action, you will be developing your own unique formula for success in the context that matters to you.

Edition: 5 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789666687 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789666700 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789666694 £45 Previous edition: 9780749480332 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-awardwinning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK’s largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, Myths of Leadership and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages. Jo Owen is the first person to win the Chartered Institute of Management Gold Award four times for four of his books.

Business Management

Based on research from over a thousand leaders throughout the world at all levels in the public, private and voluntary sectors, The Leadership Skills Handbook identifies the practical skills to make you even more successful, and offers guidance on all key topics. This updated new edition includes exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the 21st century and 11 whole new skills. These include the need to influence rather than control, how you get people to commit to your vision rather than comply and how career is no longer a noun but a verb for new generations of workers.

Rights Sold 3rd Edition: Chinese (Simplified) 4th Edition: Arabic, Italian, Russian

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Mindset skills Career skills People skills Moments of truth skills Daily skills Organizational skills Political skills Financial skills The art of strategy Leadership in the 21st century

The Trusted Executive Nine Leadership Habits that Inspire Results, Relationships and Reputation

This book

« Helps leaders develop the key attributes of trust, ability, integrity and benevolence « Presents tools, models and case studies based on 15 years of coaching CEOs and their teams interviews from organizations such as Unilever, Financial Times, JLL, Jupiter Life Insurance, « Includes CBRE and BSI to this edition: fully updated throughout including a new chapter on how to implement trust « New best practice into organizations Description SHORTLISTED: CMI Management Book of the Year 2017 - Commuter’s Read Category (previous edition) The Trusted Executive helps leaders deliver outstanding results, create inspiring relationships and provide a positive contribution through the power of trustworthy leadership. In the shifting world of business, affected by trends involving robotics, AI, data privacy, the #metoo movement, climate crisis, employment rights and income inequality, trust and truthfulness have become the agenda. But how can business leaders and executives build trust in an untrusting world? The Trusted Executive, gives leaders the tools to build trust by focusing on ability, integrity and benevolence. Providing a range of tools, exercises, examples and case studies, the fully updated edition will help readers:

Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789666458 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789666465 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789666472 £60 Previous edition: 9780749474225 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Dr John Blakey is the founder of The Trusted Executive Foundation, which helps CEOs across all sectors around the globe deliver the triple bottom-line of outstanding results, inspiring relationships and a high integrity reputation using leadership development models. He has been named as a top 100 global thought leaders in trust by Trust Across America. His work has been featured in Forbes, BBC news, BBC ‘Daily Politics’, HuffPost and The Sunday Times.

- Understand the primary role of trust as a leadership skill - Build trust around themselves as a leader, and develop role modelling behaviours - Lead transformation change within their own organization - Develop strategies to deal with unwanted violations of trust within their business

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 3 7

Business Management

Trust lost and trust regained A broken model: the blue pill vs the red pill The three pillars that inspire trust The nine habits that inspire results, relationships and reputation Pillar 1: habits of ability Pillar 2: habits of integrity Pillar 3: habits of benevolence Cracks in the pillars: what to do when things go wrong The wider context Organizational foundations: living in a red pill world

You Lead How Being Yourself Makes You a Better Leader

This book

an inspiring plan for business leaders to develop their unique and authentic leadership « Devises style, connecting them and their values with their people and customers alike the benefits of being yourself in business and leadership, from developing communities of « Proves faithful supporters, to enabling real values to flourish and drive business readers tools to implement this new type of leadership, recognizing the challenges of « Offers governance and implementation, especially in established businesses varied and interesting case studies of innovative leaders who have merged the personal « Includes and professional and who are also proponents of authenticity in leadership

Description Your biggest asset in leadership is you. How can you expect people to trust and believe in you, if you aren’t truthful and don’t embrace your whole self at work? There is a need for a new kind of leadership; one that bleeds personality and rings true to employees and customers alike who crave authenticity. You Lead argues that business leaders deliver superior results, communities of engagement both inside and outside of the company and true values-driven success when they are themselves and come across as genuine.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666250 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789666267 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789666274 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Minter Dial is an award-winning published author, strategist and brand expert. The former Head of Redken, part of L’Oréal, he is an in-demand storyteller and delivers keynotes and seminars to audiences the world over. He has spoken at events that include SXSW, Adobe Summit, CogX and Netexpo. His advisory work has allowed him to work with brands that include LVMH, Remy Cointreau, Samsung, Credit Agricole, Google and Publicis.

Bestselling author, Minter Dial, shows readers how embracing your whole self at work encourages people to also be themselves, seek true fulfilment at work and merge the personal and professional to become true followers of what you stand for. You Lead is a call to arms to leaders to stop pretending to be who they are not, and play on their uniqueness and strengths, to allow people to do the same and develop a culture of authenticity and purpose. Learn how you can: - Be yourself, lead by example and merge the professional and personal - Stand for something and allow people to develop true purpose at work - Allow a community to flourish through the right kind of governance model - Radiate your purpose through employees and customers alike for long-term performance

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6

3 7 8 9

Business Management

Setting the stage - The need for a new type of leadership It’s a rocky world Putting the right governance in place Life is work, too Merging the personal with the professional C.H.E.C.K. model of leadership Connecting with people within your organization Extending employee-centricity to customer-centricity – connecting with people outside of your organization The challenges and realities of implementation The inside-out business model Brand N.E.W.S. Conclusion – Navigating your future

The Nine Types of Leader How the Leaders of Tomorrow Can Learn from The Leaders of Today

This book

readers deep inside winning and successful organizations and explains the different ways in « Takes which different leaders operate that there are only nine leadership types including the fixers and sellers, campaigners and « Explains lovers and founders and diplomats case studies and conversations with some of the world’s most successful leaders from « Includes organizations as diverse as Barclays, Tesco, Uber, General Electric, Barnes & Noble/Waterstones, Walgreens Boots Alliance, Nestle and Thomson Reuters

Description Where chief executives and company presidents lead, thousands follow. These elites make excruciatingly difficult calls on strategies which will affect jobs, drive corporate growth and investment and deliver shareholder returns. But their impact is far greater than merely numbers on a balance sheet. Their personalities dramatically set the tone of their organization. Do these people have anything in common? Do they share any similar behaviours and philosophies? The Nine Types of Leader introduce some obvious and some not so obvious types of leader. From the alphas, the campaigners and the lovers, through to the fixers, the founders and the scions, via the sellers, the diplomats and moderns, this book introduces them through stories, anecdotes and insight garnered from hundreds of encounters with world-class leaders. Featuring interviews with industry titans including Jean-Francois Decaux of JC Decaux, Michael Rapino of Live Nation, Ana Botin of Santander, James Daunt of Barnes & Noble and Waterstones, Dame Moya Greene of the Royal Mail and Isabelle Kocher of Engie, it explores how the leaders of tomorrow will improve their game by borrowing from the very best of the nine types of leader that exists today. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666960 £12.99 Ebook: 9781789666977 £12.99 Hardback: 9781789666984 £40 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 198x129 Band: Trade Promo Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

James Ashton was city editor and executive editor at the London Evening Standard and Independent and before that city editor at The Sunday Times and chief city correspondent at the Daily Mail. During this period he covered some of the biggest economic and corporate stories of recent times. Today he regularly writes columns and interviews for several national newspapers including the daily and Sunday Telegraph and The Times on business, leadership, technology and investment. His podcast, ‘Leading with James Ashton’, features bosses from the worlds of business, charity, the arts and sport, swapping stories about how they learnt to lead.

1st Edition: Portuguese

1 1 2 3 4 5

7 8

Business Management

Introduction - how the boss class is made THE NINE TYPES The Alphas - why the traditional leader of the corporate pack is under threat The Campaigners - how to pursue purpose at the same time as delivering profit The Lovers - why true passion from the top leads to improved performance The Fixers - bringing ruthless focus to rebuild a company on solid foundations The Founders - the best entrepreneurs become great leaders the rest know when to stand aside The Scions - how to make inheriting a ready-made leadership opportunity a blessing not a curse The Sellers - how marketers sold themselves to become leaders The Diplomats - striving to make leadership effective when you must rule by consensus

9 The Moderns - what this young, future-focused crop of leaders is already learning from their predecessors 10 Epilogue: when leaders leave - assessing the legacy that business leaders leave behind

Resetting Management Thrive with Agility in the Age of Uncertainty

This book

the ambiguity around on-trend buzzwords and explains how leaders can deliver « Dispels transformation at a strategic and organizational level case studies from companies including General Electric, Lego, Accor Hotels, ING, LVMH « Includes and Deutsche Telecom « Explains why agile is not just a method but that it requires a new leadership mindset diagnostic tools to measure organizational complexity, stability and agility and practical « Provides models to help any business become an agile company « Shows that embracing change is the key to overcoming the fear of business uncertainty

Description Being able to transform any business is essential for organizations in today’s turbulent world. How do you get behind on-trend buzzwords so that you can make your company fit for the future? Resetting Management helps leaders understand why being agile matters. It will release a new level of energy, innovation and entrepreneurship enabling organizations to respond to disruption while still delivering business strategies with rigour and efficiency. Using diagnostic tools and practical models, it describes how to master the essential components and principles of agile and respond to uncertain and fast changing environments. Featuring case studies from some of the world’s leading companies and illustrates how they have successfully implemented change - including Lego, General Electric, LMVH and ING, Stéphane Girod and Martin Králik provide leaders with the skills to master change processes and rapidly take control their own organizations. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789667172 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667189 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667196 £60 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Leadership

Author Information Stéphane Girod is Professor of Strategy and Organizational Innovation at the Financial Times number one ranked business school, IMD in Lausanne, Switzerland. His opinion pieces have been carried by Forbes, China Daily, The Economist, BBC News, Tribune des Geneve and the Times. Before joining IMD he was Manager of the Accenture Institute for High Performance, based in London. Martin Králik is an IMD external associate, based at the University of Malaya, Kuala Lumpur. Before IMD, he worked with Insead and the International Data Corporation.

Business Management

Resetting Management recognizes that every business is different, and each company has its own specific challenges. It explains how to own transformation in a way that matches reality exactly to the needs of a specific business, irrespective of the size or industry sector.

Table of Contents 1

PART I. STOP OPTIMIZING FOR CERTAINTY: EMBRACE AGILITY 1 Why agility 2 What is agility (a roadmap for the book) 2 PART II. AGILITY OR HOW TO OPTIMIZE FOR UNCERTAINTY 3 Strategic agility in the digital age 4 Organizational agility: early stages 5 Organizational agility: agile methods in pockets 6 Organizational agility: the pioneers of new organizational forms 7 Leading with agility in uncertain times 3 PART III. HOW TO TRANSFORM FOR GREATER AGILITY 8 Introducing agile processes: key success factors 9 Successful large-scale transformation 10 How to Become a more agile leader 11 Conclusion

Getting to Nimble How to Transform Your Company into a Digital Leader

This book

original case studies and interviews with the CIOs of FedEx, The Washington Post, Domino’s « Features Pizza, CarMax, Capital One, Walmart and the country of Estonia the five critical areas for change in legacy companies: people, process, technology, « Identifies internal partnerships and external ecosystems « Provides concrete guidance for maintaining a culture of continuous improvement

Description With increased pressure from digital natives, now is the time for established companies to address outdated and antiquated practices in order to respond quickly to the ever-increasing speed of market changes. The pace of change in business today is such that it is becoming easier to go from a legendarily highperforming company to liquidation in a short period of time. Getting to Nimble shares the stories of organizations that were able to successfully transform their people practices, processes, technology, partnerships and ecosystem for the digital era. The book also covers once dominant companies like Circuit City and Kodak that neglected to change and were impaired or died as a result. Highlighting a framework to follow along with best practices that others can emulate, Getting to Nimble includes case studies from major organizations such as Capital One, FedEx, CarMax, The Washington Post, Domino’s Pizza, Walmart and the country of Estonia. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667554 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667561 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667578 £60 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Peter A. High advises a wide array of Fortune 500 business and tech executives on how to compete in the digital era, and is based in Chevy Chase, MD. He is the president of Metis Strategy, moderates a weekly podcast, Technovation with Peter High, and writes the “Technovation” column on Forbes.com. He has written for The Wall Street Journal, CIO Magazine, CIO Digest, and Information Week, and keynotes at corporate conferences and universities in the US, Canada, Mexico, the United Kingdom, the Republic of Ireland, the Czech Republic, Spain, China, India, Australia, New Zealand and Saudi Arabia.

Business Management

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Only the Nimble Survive 2 Attracting and Retaining People with Grit, Ambition and Curiosity 3 Adapting Processes to Scale 4 Future-Proofing Technology 5 Curating an Ecosystem for Insights 6 Strategic Nimbleness as the Path to Innovation 7 Conclusion

Rule Breaker Rebellious Leadership for the Future of Work

This book

why traditional leadership models based on hierarchical organisational structures no « Explains longer works for new generations of workers that crave meaning, purpose and value a new wave of leadership within the wider context of a return to sustainability, collaboration « Places and community exclusive case studies from exciting businesses like Moonbug Entertainment, Canva, Kylie « Contains Cosmetics, M.92, Luckin Coffee and Beats detailing how their leadership is doing things differently

Description Revolutionize your approach to leadership and join the ranks of a new wave of powerful business leaders in touch with their times. The world of business has changed. Driven by cataclysmic technological advances, big corporates don’t always rule and organizational lifespans are decreased. The winners of today might be dethroned by a surprise new entrant tomorrow. These are times of high-growth and low overheads businesses - what kind of leadership will the winners of tomorrow need? Rule Breaker is a manifesto for a new wave of leadership. One that operates in flatter workplaces where command and control doesn’t work, and where people are entrusted with powerful purpose that grows businesses and communities.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667677 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789667684 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789667691 £45 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Jackie Fast is an award-winning entrepreneur and business leader. The founder and former Managing Director of Slingshot, one of the most successful global sponsorship companies, she has worked with some of the world’s biggest brands that include the Rolling Stones, Formula1, Virgin, Allianz and Shell. She is an in-demand business and entrepreneurship public speaker, and has featured in Forbes, Metro, Business Leader Magazine, Money Observer and the Telegraph.

Business Management

Award-winning entrepreneur, Jackie Fast, details how we have got here and why a whole new generation of workers is moving away from traditional models of work. Rule Breaker shows how you can tap into a purposeful and engaged community of talent, harnessing true diversity and collaboration to unveil business practice that is steeped in trust, longevity and reinvention. To remain a highly successful leader in a future of radical change, you need to do more than fly the flag at the top of the podium supported by those beneath you. You must join the frontline and pave the way. Throw away the rule book, encourage rebelliousness, ask questions and lead by example.

Table of Contents 1 A Radical Shift in Business Foreword 1 Capitalising on the changing business landscape 2 Business Unusual: how did we get here? 3 The Move fast and break things era is over 4 Redefining the Workforce and the C-Suite 2 A New Model for Leadership 5 Earning the Right to Lead in a Flat Structure 6 Don’t Get Complacent: Reinvention and Upskilling 7 Collaboration is Everything 8 Leadership truths and challenges 9 Conclusion

Still Loading Why Diversity and Inclusion Aren’t Happening and What You Can Do About It

This book

explains what diversity and inclusion are, why they cannot exist without one another and « Clearly what we can all do to make the world a fairer, more equitable place readers through understanding privilege as well as unchecked and unconscious biases « Guides which are the first hurdle to diversity and inclusion how we can all make a difference with allyship, which allows anyone to step up, call out bias « Details and unfairness and demand more by the diversity and inclusion champion for tech and rising star, Sheree Atcheson, who is « Isthewritten Head of Diversity and Inclusion at award-winning start-up Monzo insights from companies like Deloitte, Mastercard, Pinterest, Atlassian and Monzo who are « Includes putting in place real inclusion strategies that empower their people to make a difference

Description Look around you. Is your workplace as diverse and accepting as it should be? From accusations of racism in high political office, award-winning actors admitting the sets they work on aren’t inclusive, to everyday occurrences of sexism, agism, racism and more, we are far from where we need to be.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781398600447 £14.99 Ebook: 9781398600539 £14.99 Hardback: 9781398600546 £40 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Sheree Atcheson is Head of Diversity and Inclusion at award-winning startup Monzo. She works across regions and industries providing leadership training to business executives to develop fully formed focused diversity and inclusion strategies. An advocate for women in tech, she is the Women Who Code Global Ambassador, speaks at many global conferences and leadership sessions and is regularly profiled for her work. She has featured or written for publications like Forbes, Fast Company, the Evening Standard, HuffPost, Marie Claire, Wired, the Guardian and the Sunday Telegraph.

Business Management

Still Loading is the diversity and inclusion book you need to read. Moving beyond HR speak, this book clearly explains what diversity and inclusion are and what it means in the everyday experience of millions of people, both at work and in life. Sheree Atcheson, Head of Diversity and Inclusion at Monzo, draws on her experience as a young woman of colour in an overly white male tech environment; she lives and breathes the issues she writes about. In Still Loading¸ she calls out the lack of awareness around privilege, unchecked and unconscious biases and details what intersectionality does to feelings of discrimination and disadvantage. Arguing that the best strategy for us all to adopt is allyship, where we all take ownership of the issues and stand up to bias or discrimination, this book will give us all tools and strategies to action every day, making us accountable to delivering change around us.

Table of Contents 1 Why Are We Here? 2 What Are Diversity and Inclusion? 3 How is everyday society built? 4 Privilege 5 Intersectionality 6 Unchecked and Unconscious biases 7 Allyship 8 Challenging Traditional Leadership Behaviours 9 A Successful Inclusion Strategy

Organizing for the New Normal Prepare Your Company for the Journey of Continuous Disruption

This book

« Outlines the leadership competencies critical for success in the “new normal” « Reveals the mistaken beliefs that are held by CEOs that result in poor responses to disruption examples from global companies such as Microsoft, Walmart, Adobe, Netflix, Axel Springer, « Includes Autotrader, BP, Medtronic, SKY TV, KBC Bank, Arla, Oatly, Diageo, Nestle, Babylon, LVMH, EasyJet, The Guardian and Informa

Description We live in a world of continuous disruption. Before we have a chance to respond to one disruption, another hits. Before we finish one transformation journey, we need to embark on another. How do you prepare the organization for this new normal of continuous disruption? This is the challenge that every organization is now facing, no matter how successful their digital transformation of the past decade has been. Organizing for the New Normal explores how to prepare the organization for this unique challenge. How do you develop a strategy for what is coming next while you are busily driving your current transformation? And how do you convince emotionally exhausted employees to join you on the journey? The book does not provide a ready-made recipe for success, but rather explores how to put together the ingredients that will improve the odds of success. Organizing for the New Normal outlines the leadership competencies critical for success in the “new normal”, such as: How to create a “permanent” sense of urgency and an organization-wide unease with the status quo; New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781398600799 £19.99 Ebook: 9781398600812 £19.99 Hardback: 9781398600805 £160 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Leadership

How to convince people to exploit disruption as an opportunity when all they see around them are the negative consequences of disruption;

Author Information

Table of Contents

Constantinos C. Markides is recognized as one of the world’s foremost experts on strategy and innovation, based in London, UK. He is Professor of Strategy and Entrepreneurship and holds the Robert P Bauman Chair in Strategic Leadership at London Business School. An internationally acclaimed teacher and conference speaker, he is the author of seven books and has published articles in top journals such as the Strategic Management Journal, Harvard Business Review and MIT Sloan Management Review. He is currently the Program Director of his school’s executive education course, entitled: “Exploiting Disruption in a Digital World.”

Business Management

How to institutionalize into the DNA of the organization the day to day behaviors that would allow us to identify and respond to change early-and how to achieve this in a decentralized way. How to develop a strategic response that is innovative and aims to attack the disruption rather than defend against it.

Introduction 1 Attitude Towards Disruption is Key 2 Creating Urgency for Change 3 Deciding What to Do 4 How to Develop an Innovative Strategy 5 Experimenting with New Business Models 6 Winning Commitment for the New Business Model 7 The Importance of the Organizational Environment 8 How to Develop a Supportive Organizational Environment 9 Making the Transition to the New Business Model 10 Putting It All Together

To Be Honest Lead with the Power of Truth, Justice and Purpose

This book

« Based on a 15-year research study across 210 organizations and 3,200 interviews the four organizational factors that lead employees to dishonest behavior: strategic « Outlines identity, accountability, governance and cross-functional relationships « Provides assessments, tools, assignments and action steps in each chapter examples from Wells Fargo, Fannie Mae, Sony, Radio Shack, The American Red Cross, « Includes Patagonia and Nextiva Description Under what conditions will people tell the truth, behave fairly, and act with purpose at work? And when will they lie, cheat, and be selfish? Based on 15 years of research, To Be Honest explains how four factors (Strategic Identity, Accountability, Governance and Cross-Functional Relationships) affect honesty, justice and purpose within a company. When these factors are absent or ineffective, the organizational conditions compel employees to choose dishonesty and self-interest. By understanding the impact of these factors, leaders can make different choices and fix the places in the organization that are broken.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Hardback: 9781398600669 £19.99 Ebook: 9781398600676 £19.99 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Ron Carucci has a 30-year track record helping CEOs and executives tackle challenges of strategy, organization and leadership in 25 countries at more than 100 companies. He is co-founder and managing partner at Navalent and is based in Seattle, WA. He serves on the advisory board of Ethical Systems at New York University, previously served as associate professor of organizational behavior at Fordham University Graduate School and adjunct at the Center for Creative Leadership. He is a sought after speaker, a regular contributor to Harvard Business Review and Forbes, and author/co-author of 8 books.

Business Management

To Be Honest shares the stories of leaders who have acted with purpose, honesty and justice despite working within cultures that didn’t promote these values. In-depth interviews with CEOs and senior executives from exemplar companies such as Patagonia, Cabot Creamery, Microsoft and others reveal what it takes to build purpose-driven companies of honesty and justice. Interviews with thought leaders like Jonathan Haidt, Amy Edmondson, Dan Ariely and James Detert offer rich insights on how leaders can become more honest and purposeful. You’ll learn how Hubert Joly took Best Buy from a company on the brink of bankruptcy to one that is profitable, thriving, and purposeful. Filled with real-life examples, To Be Honest offers actionable steps, practical tools and approaches that any leader or manager can use to create a culture of purpose, honesty and justice.

Table of Contents Foreword 1 Introduction 1 Honesty in Strategic Identity--A Shared Purpose Worth Serving 2 Be Who You Say You Are 3 Connect “My Purpose” with “Our Purpose” 2 Justice in Accountability-Knowing How Contributions Matter 4 Embrace Meritocracy 5 Equip People to Succeed and Fail 3 Transparency in Governance--Decisions I Can Trust and Be Trusted With 6 Decision Making Must Be Clear 7 Turn Meetings into a Spirited Fight 4 Unity Between Groups-Connecting to Our Bigger Story 8 Connect People to a Larger, Shared Story 9 Turn Your Adversaries into Allies 10 Epilogue: We Were Born to be Honest, Just and Purposeful

The Agile Leader How to Create an Agile Business in the Digital Age

This book

the ground-breaking agile thinking methodology and unpicks how leaders adapt and « Illustrates react to a fast-changing business world diverse and international case studies that include the British Fashion Council, Standard « Contains Chartered and Three with crucial agile capabilities that have a direct positive effect on organizational learning, « Deals innovation, resilience, speed to market and ultimately the bottom line to this edition: with new and updated case studies, this edition introduces how agile can « New shine and comes into its own in the context of constant digital change by highlighting eight leadership steps guaranteed to make your team nimble and adaptable Offers readers personal checklists, diagnostic questions and exercises to apply the key take-aways to their individual business and circumstance

Description Ever feel like you and your team are stretched across multiple demands or that the goal posts change constantly? Never before have businesses felt so acutely this constant need to adapt, pivot and change tack. This book will teach you how you can not only survive in the context of digital transformation, but also thrive and grow, by adopting a powerful agile leadership model.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781398600713 £14.99 Ebook: 9781398600737 Hardback: 9781398600720 £160 Previous edition: 9780749482732 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

This new and revised edition of The Agile Leaderlays out clearly in eight steps how agile leaders empower their team to make decision quickly, evaluate correctly where the biggest opportunities are and mould their strategies around market dynamics and ever-changing needs. If there’s one leadership skill that successful businesses have in spades, it’s the ability to enable teams to adapt and grow within complex eco-systems of clients, partners and suppliers. By focusing on teamwork and collaboration, as well as promoting shared decision making and ruthless prioritising, leaders can transform the way they work as well as how their teams function to make them more malleable to changing business needs. Simon Hayward is an agile leadership expert. In this new edition of this successful book, he distils years of leadership and agile research into an actionable 8 step plan, brought to life with examples of pioneering agile digital businesses like the British Fashion Council, Standard Chartered and Three. Learn how to become agile and make digital transformation and delivery part of your business as usual.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Hungarian, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese

Author Information Dr Simon Hayward is Founder and CEO of Cirrus, a leading provider of leadership development and change programmes for large organizations. He has a wealth of strategic leadership experience gained over 30 years in consulting, with clients that include BT, HSBC, Marks and Spencer, Standard Chartered Bank and Three. Dr Simon Hayward has been featured in the Financial Times, Management Today, Forbes, the Sunday Times, the Guardian, Fast Company, BBC Radio 4 and Sky News. He is an Honorary Professor at Manchester Business School.

Business Management

Table of Contents 1 Agile Leadership 1 What is Agile Leadership? 2 Being an Agile Leader 3 Agile Ways of Working 4 Building an Agile Business 2 8 Steps 5 Feeling safe 6 Customer vision 7 Learning Agility 8 Teamwork 9 Devolved Decision Making 10 Ruthless Prioritisation 11 Team Coaching 12 Disruptive Thinking 3 Next Steps 13 Creating an Agile Enterprise

Build Your Cultural Agility The Nine Competencies You Need to be a Successful Global Professional

This book

the nine competencies of culturally agile professionals, such as curiosity, tolerance of « Identifies ambiguity and humility « Provides self-awareness exercises and guidance for developing your strengths in each competency each competency through individual and organizational case examples from the author’s « Illustrates work with Peace Corps, Johnson & Johnson, 3M, Pepsico, among others

Description The investment in global collaboration technology now exceeds US$45 billion. Professionals who work across cultures face some of the most cognitively, psychologically and emotionally difficult challenges, regardless of whether they work virtually or in person. And they often face these challenges without the help of a corporate guide. Build Your Cultural Agility is that guide. This book offers strategies to help you develop into a successful global professional, one who can comfortably and effectively work in and with people from different cultures. This book helps you leverage your natural strengths while providing suggestions for developing cultural agility competencies.

New

Build Your Cultural Agility focuses on nine specific competencies that comprise cultural agility: three self-management competencies (tolerance of ambiguity, curiosity and resilience), three relationshipmanagement competencies (humility, relationship-building and perspective-taking) and three taskmanagement competencies (cultural minimization, cultural adaptation and cultural integration). Within each chapter, the author provides a case example of that competency in action, explains why the competency is critical for success, offers a self-awareness exercise to help you determine your level of proficiency and concludes with suggestions for self-development.

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789666595 £22.99 Ebook: 9781789666601 £22.99 Hardback: 9781789666618 £70 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: International Business

Author Information Paula Caligiuri is a D’Amore-McKim School of Business Distinguished Professor of International Business at Northeastern University, and lives in Boston, MA. She has been named as one of the most prolific authors in international business for her work in cross-cultural management, global leadership development and cultural agility. She is President of TASCA Global, a consulting firm that works with organizations on assessing and developing culturally agile professionals. She is a frequent expert guest on CNN and CNN International, and author of a LinkedIn Learning course, “Managing Globally.”

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11

Business Management

Cultural Agility for Intercultural Effectiveness Tolerance of Ambiguity for Comfort in a Novel Environment Curiosity to Expand Your Understanding of Cultural Differences Resilience to Cope When Cultural Differences Produce Unpredictability Humility to Learn from Others Who are Culturally Different from You Relationship-Building to Strengthen Your Support System Anywhere Perspective-Taking To Empathize and Understand Those Who are Culturally Different Cultural Adaptation to Respond as Expected in a Culturally Diverse Situation Cultural Minimization to Uphold a Standard in a Culturally Diverse Situation Cultural Integration to Create New Group Norms in a Culturally Diverse Situation Using Your Cultural Agility for Career Success

Radical Business Model Transformation How Leading Organizations Have Successfully Adapted to Disruption

This book

business model transformation as a leadership challenge providing actionable tools and « Addresses guidance for companies « Provides insights into organizations that have made radical shifts including SAP, Netflix and Daimler to this edition: updated case studies with a global focus, new literature to keep up-to-date « New with the academic discourse and new chapters on areas such as Digital Transformation resources: a business transformation board template for creating a shareable « Online transformation map, outlining the steps from start position(s) to target position(s)

Description Markets have been transformed by an ever-increasing amount of disruptive technologies and disruptor companies. Once successful business models designed to function in a different time now struggle as the mainstream changes. Radical Business Model Transformation provides the guide for leaders of organizations looking to turn downward trends into upward momentum and gain the competitive edge on the competition. Now in its second edition, this book offers practical advice on how to understand the fit of an existing business model and reconstruct it with a forward-thinking approach. New illustrative case studies with a global emphasis include organizations which have boldly transformed, including SAP, Netflix and Daimler, as examples for change. Business transformation is presented as a leadership challenge and methods to realize and implement opportunities for innovation company-wide are discussed in detail. Radical Business Model Transformation is essential reading for business leaders, transformation experts and MBA students interested in ensuring that their business model is future-proof and can withstand the new proliferation of innovations set to transform the business landscape. Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789661965 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789661972 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789661996 £90 Previous edition: 9780749480455 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Strategic Management

Author Information Dr Carsten Linz is an entrepreneurial leader and business transformation expert with 20 years’ experience, based in Germany. He has successfully started and developed several new businesses and is currently Business Development Officer at SAP SE. Prof Dr Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Strategic Management and Director of the Institute of Management at the University of St. Gallen, Switzerland. His main research interest is corporate strategy. Prof Dr Alexander Zimmermann is an Assistant Professor of Organization and Strategic Management and the Project Manager for the Center for Organizational Excellence (CORE) at the University of St. Gallen, Switzerland.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 3 7 8 9 4 10

Business Management

Why business models need to radically shift Taking consequences from digitization and servitization Assessing your current business model Moving from small tweaks to radical shifts How to lead a radical shift of your business model Shifting the level of inclusiveness Shifting the level of customization Sequencing multiple radical shifts Learning from successful transformational organizations Case studies of companies shifting radically the level of inclusiveness Case studies of companies shifting radically the level of customization Case studies of companies that sequence multiple radical shifts How to move forward Mastering the transformational leadership challenge

11 Navigating with the business model transformation manual

Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution Capabilities to Achieve Superior Performance

This book

what businesses need to do to thrive in the increasingly uncertain context of the fourth « Explains industrial revolution, and how this can be achieved the importance of establishing long term strategy, despite the turbulence and « Illustrates unpredictability of the markets, and provides tools and techniques to make these decisions the dynamic capabilities firms require to achieve competitively superior performance, with « Outlines examples of good practice and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness a self-assessment questionnaire to assess the dynamic capacity of your organization, which « Includes can be an indicator of future performance on robust research which tracked organizations over five years as well as the author’s « Draws experience as an international business consultant

Description The business world is currently experiencing fundamental disruption, in part driven by the technology enabled Fourth Industrial Revolution. Corporate value is created and lost in breathtakingly short periods, and the rise of ‘unicorns’ against the demise of once-venerated organizations has shown that how firms compete has changed. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution presents a framework for managing and winning in the new accelerated world of business, focusing on the key capabilities organizations now need to achieve competitively superior performance. Building on the ‘dynamic capabilities’ approach already familiar to strategists and based around his own research, Stephen Wyatt shows how executives can assess the dynamic capacity of their organization - a leading indicator of future performance in comparison to their industry peers.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789666809 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789666816 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789666823 £60 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Strategic Management

Author Information Stephen Wyatt is Professor of Strategy and Leadership at the University of Bath. For over 25 years he has been a business consultant focused on developing leaders and enabling organizations to thrive in highly dynamic environments. He is also Affiliate Faculty at Singapore Management University and Industrial Associate at the University of Cambridge, and serves on the boards of the Global Innovation Management Institute and the Management Consulting Institute.

Business Management

Written in an accessible style with best practice examples from companies and quotes from executives to support each insight, this book includes a self-assessment questionnaire to measure the dynamic capacity of your organization and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution offers timely insights on driving innovation and emphasizes the importance of long-term strategy, change management and new models of dynamic leadership.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Dynamic advantage – Managing Business 4.0 2 Dynamic capacity Mechanisms and capabilities 2 Meta-capability to sense and make sense 3 Meta-capability to seize and replicate 4 Meta-capability to reposition and reconfigure 3 Organizational drivers 5 A winning and motivating long-term strategy 6 The imperative to compete dynamically 7 Prowess at change management 4 Leader and team capabilities to manage Business 4.0 8 Dynamic leaders 9 Ambidextrous mindset 10 Dynamic teams – team of teams 5 Summary 11 Summary and parting thoughts

The Business Plan Workbook A Step-By-Step Guide to Creating and Developing a Successful Business

This book

readers to research and complete a winning business plan by highlighting 24 separate « Enables areas of development with corresponding assignments based on teaching methodology which was developed at one of the UK’s best business schools, « IsCranfield School of Management Contains close to 70 case studies of business planning that are behind a myriad of business « ventures that include Richer Sounds, Eat 17, The Northern Dough Company, Catalan and Secret Escapes New to this edition: Has been streamlined to ensure readers spend time where it matters and also includes updated information resources, new case studies and updated financial projection assignments Includes slide deck for lecturers available online as well as downloadable templates

« «

Description Lay down the foundations of a successful business venture through a thoroughly researched and competitive business plan. Based on tried and tested business methodology used at the leading business school, Cranfield School of Management, this 10th edition of The Business Plan Workbook guides you through all the necessary steps to constructing a winning business plan. This is a practical run-through of 24 key areas of development of strategic planning. It will allow you to think of these areas in isolation through the use of assignments that ensure you have stress-tested your business proposition. This guide covers how to

Edition: 10 Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789667370 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667387 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667394 £60 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Business Planning

Author Information Colin Barrow has lectured in business schools in the UK, the USA, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe. A former visiting fellow at Cranfield School of Management, he is the author of the 30 Day MBA series, Financial Management for the Small Business and Starting a Business from Home (all published by Kogan Page). Paul Barrow is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and also a consultant advising SMEs on growth strategies. Robert Brown is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and directed the Graduate Enterprise Programme there, where he led a course on entrepreneurship.

Business Management

- Come up with a winning business idea - Complete market and competitive research - Set up a winning marketing strategy - Forecast watertight financials and projections - Define realistic operations and staffing - Deliver an unforgettable pitch to potential backers and investors This new and fully updated edition includes 67 business case studies that show you how successful entrepreneurs have dealt with strategic planning in the past. The content has been streamlined to focus on the most critical parts of business planning, ensuring you spend time where it matters and stay competitive. With new information resources and financial planning consideration, this is an invaluable guide for entrepreneurs, business executives and students.

Table of Contents 1 1

Strategy and Purpose Coming up with a winning idea for your business plan 2 Strategy – the big picture 3 You and your team 2 Market Research 4 Researching customers 5 Researching competitors 6 A plan for market research 3 Competitive marketing strategy 7 Products and/or services 8 Pricing 9 Advertising and promotion 10 Place and distribution 11 People, process and physical environment 12 Competing online 4 Operations and staffing 13 The selling methods plan 14 Making, outsourcing and supplies 15 Legal and regulatory factors 5 Reviewing financial requirements and options 16 The sales forecast 17 Cash-flow projections 18 The profit and loss account 19 The balance sheets 20 Break-even analysis 21 Estimating financing requirements 6 Business control

22 Financial controls 23 Sales and marketing controls 7 Writing up and presenting your business plan 24 Writing up and presenting your business plan

Boss It Control Your Time, Your Income and Your Life

This book

inspires and provides you with the tools you need to start and run your own business « Motivates, and be your own boss real-life case studies and practical tools and templates to help you take control and apply « Features what you learn to your own life written by successful serial entrepreneur Carl Reader, from his wealth of business experience, in « Isclear and plain language to cut through the business jargon

Description Do you dream of ditching the day job, doing your own thing and being your own boss? Are you ready to Boss It? In this invigorating and highly practical book, serial entrepreneur Carl Reader provides exactly the fire and guidance you need to get started. Designed to cut through the business jargon, this handy guide will take you through everything you need to establish and run your own business - from the mindset it takes to turn a dream into a plan, to the need-to-know practical stuff for running and growing a business. Featuring case studies, templates and exercises to help you put what you read into action, and turn that dream into a reality, this motivational book will enable you to be your own boss, to take control of your income, your time and your life... and Boss It. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789666410 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789666427 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789666434 £45 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurs

Author Information Carl Reader is a serial entrepreneur, speaker and podcaster and the chairman of business advisory firm d&t. During his long and varied career, he has bought and sold, founded and co-founded and invested in and sought investment for businesses - and advised thousands more. Recognized as one of City AM’s Top 100 Entrepreneurs in 2016, he is a director of the British Franchise Association, and an Ambassador for the Association of Independent Professionals and Self Employed.

Business Management

Table of Contents Introduction 1 The mindset of a business owner 1 Why should you be your own boss? 2 The difference between success and failure 3 How to create a business idea 2 From vision to plan 4 From dreaming to planning 5 Raising funds 6 How to make the important first step 3 Starting your business 7 Building your systems and processes 8 Finding your customers 9 Moving towards the bigger picture 4 Growing your business 10 Scaling 101 – the growth model 11 Scaling 101 – the funding model 12 Scaling 101 – the staffing model 13 Scaling 101 – the leadership model 14 Conclusion – some final advice

She Made It The Toolkit for Female Founders in the Digital Age

This book

a no-nonsense guide to making it in business and as a female founder, from advice on how to « Isseek investment and grow your team, to finding your voice and leadership style Includes a rich collection of exclusive case studies from world-renowned pioneering « businesswomen like Ella Mills, Emily Weiss and Jessica Frey who will talk readers through some of the main challenges that they have faced as women Covers all the basics of how to launch a business, but also pushes readers to consider deeper issues related to being in business such as how to lead, how to fully exploit the possibilities of digital channels and how to build a community around your business Describes the challenges and obstacles that women often face and offers a toolkit to overcome them, placing special emphasis on the opportunities available with digital and influencer channels

« «

Description Want to be the next Ella Mills or Emily Weiss? Award-winning rising start entrepreneur, Angelica Malin shows you how. For a new generation of fiercely independent and ambitious career women, going at it alone and even thinking you could launch your own successful business remains a pipe dream. The business world, and the start-up scene in particular, remain ruthless, unwelcoming and scary. She Made It is the secret weapon you need. With honesty, practicality and a helping of epic and successful women in business, this book offers you a voice of reason and encouragement that will allow you to square up to the big players in Silicon Valley or any of the tech entrepreneur scenes of the world. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666847 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789666854 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789666861 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurs

Author Information Angelica Malin is an award-winning young entrepreneur, founder of About Time Magazine and the About Time Academy. She is a regular commentator on business and entrepreneurship in the national press and broadcast and the UK’s rising voice for championing women founders and entrepreneurs. Most recently, she has appeared on TalkRadio Business Breakfast, LBC Business Hour, and been featured in the Independent, Huffpost and Real Business.

Business Management

She Made It is your go-to guide to launching your own business, as well as to finding your feet and voice as a woman in business. It details the practicalities of being an entrepreneur and your own boss, guiding you through the day to day running of a start-up with lessons in hiring a team, raising investment and backing yourself and your ideas. It also addresses the challenges of being a female founder and businesswoman, with sections on stress management, finding your voice and style and building a personal brand. Angelica Malin has been there. An award-winning rising star entrepreneur, she tells the story of how she has overcome some of the barriers to success and tapped into a wealth of knowledge from fellow women founders. You can absolutely break out of the 9 to 5 - get your inspiration from She Made It and change your life.

Table of Contents 1 1

All About You The primary product of a business is, and always will be, you 2 Building a business you love Now, the fun bit 3 The entrepreneurial mindset 4 Defining what success means to you 5 Passions and skill set 6 Work environments and productivity 7 Finding your inner boss 8 Managing stress 2 All About Your Company 9 Raising investment 10 Growing a team 11 Problem-solving businesses 12 Standing out from the crowd 3 How to supercharge your business - a toolkit 13 Building a personal brand 14 Social media 15 Website + blogging 16 PR 17 Building community and events

Future Tech How to Capture Value from Disruptive Industry Trends

This book

« Debunks widely-held belief that technologies alone cause industry disruption a new, cutting-edge framework--the Four Forces--to explain how and why industry « Introduces disruption occurs business executives, policymakers and entrepreneurs understand new technologies as they « Helps emerge and anticipate what’s next « Outlines what individual employees can do to prepare themselves for the future of work Description Amazon’s Fire phone. Google Glass. Facebook Home. Quikster. New technologies alone don’t always cause industry changes. Future Tech explains how the four forces of technology, policy, business models and social dynamics work together to create industry disruption and how this understanding can help to predict what is coming next. Technology is generally viewed as the single force that disrupts markets. However, history is rife with stories of technologies that have failed to meet such hyped expectations. In Future Tech, the author reveals that true change only results from the combination the forces of science and technology, policy and regulation, new business models (i.e. sharing economy) and social dynamics (whether or not people adopt it). Whether these four forces align explains why some technologies, such as AI, blockchain, robotics, synthetic biology and 3D printing, stick and why others fail. With an understanding of these four forces, business executives and policymakers can explain what technology is likely to stick and even anticipate what is coming next.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781398600324 £19.99 Ebook: 9781398600331 £19.99 Hardback: 9781398600348 £160 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Innovation

By 2030, the global labor force will be led by an elite set of knowledge workers enabled by robotic AI. To help individuals thrive in this workplace, Future Tech advises readers to develop their human capabilities of creativity and adaptation, develop deep expertise in one domain while being wellversed in dozens more, and develop a personalized approach to acquiring and processing information and deliberating decisions.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Trond Arne Undheim is a futurist, speaker, entrepreneur and former Director of MIT Startup Exchange, based in Wellesley, MA. He is the CEO of Yegii, a search engine for industry professionals. He holds a PhD on the future of work and artificial intelligence and cognition. He has accelerated four unicorns and helped launch over 50 start-ups. A former Sloan Senior Lecturer, WPP and Oracle executive and EU National Expert, he writes for Fortune and Cognoscenti, and has been featured in print media and television.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Business Management

Introduction--What Drives Change The Four Forces of Disruption-technology, policy, business models and social dynamics Science and Technology Enable Innovation Policy and Regulation Moderate Market Conditions Business Models Upend Markets Social Dynamics Drive Adoption The Five Technologies that Matter and Why How to Respond--Become an expert in one domain and well-versed in dozens How to Respond--Personalize your insight ecosystem How to Respond--Merge with technology to achieve a cognitive leap Conclusion--Turn change into opportunity

Crypto Wars Faked Deaths, Missing Millions and Industry Disruption

This book

the biggest scams and frauds that have shocked the world of cryptocurrency, from the « Unveils disappearing Crypto Queen with OneCoin, to Prodeum, the initial coin offering crash and Quadriga where the founder seems to have faked his own death to escape prosecution

these exit scams, ponzi schemes and hacks to wider institutional problems like the lack of « Ties regulation, the speed of technological advancements and wider market manipulation schemes exclusive interviews and commentaries from many of the key people who have been « Contains actively investigating the biggest crypto-scams, from the Metropolitan police, to insolvency practitioners, researchers, BBC journalists, and tech geeks

beyond the sensationalist and concludes on the real potential for change and good that « Goes cryptocurrencies bring; from challenging the greedy practices of the banking and remittance industries, to reaching over 2.5 billion unbanked users, allowing for greater transparency and ethical behaviours

Description Crypto is big news. You may be an existing user yourself or have friends that laud its promise of getting rich fast. But do you really know what you’re doing?

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/07/2021 Paperback: 9781398600683 £12.99 Ebook: 9781398600706 £12.99 Hardback: 9781398600690 £40 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 198x129 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Business Stories

Author Information Erica Stanford is a serial entrepreneur in the Cryptocurrency space. She launched Cryptocurrency Simplified in 2017, a leading educational platform that provides information on cryptocurrency, blockchain, tokenisation and future tech in simple, easy to understand language. Following that, she also launched and now runs the UK’s biggest and most recommended crypto networking and events organisation, Crypto Curry Club. An in-demand crypto expert, speaker and commentator, she is the guest associate lecturer in cryptocurrency for Warwick Business School and has been featured in The Express, Finance News, Coin Rivet, and on the BBC.

Business Management

If thousands of people can lose billions of dollars in OneCoin which was masterminded by the now famous Missing Crypto Queen and has been called ‘one of the biggest scams in history’ by The Times, what makes you think your money is safe? Crypto Wars reveals some of the most shocking scams, hacks and scandals that have fleeced people of their hard-earned cash. In this book, you get exclusive access to the back story of the biggest ponzi schemes, bizarre hoaxes and brutal exit strategies from the charlatans of crypto. Join crypto expert and educator, Erica Stanford, and learn how market-wide manipulation schemes, unregulated and unchecked processes and a new collection of technologies that are often misunderstood, have been exploited to create the wild west of crypto, run by some less than reputable characters. From OneCoin, to Plus Token, Trumpcoin and Centra Tech, Crypto Wars uncovers the scandals, unpicks the system behind them and allows you to better understand a new technology that has the potential to revolutionise banking and our world for the better. Arm yourself with knowledge to come out on top in the crypto wars.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Biggest Individual Scams and Hacks 1 One Coin – The Missing Crypto Queen 2 The Faked Death – Requests to Exhume a Body 3 Mt Gox – Hacks, Leaking Billions and an Unauthorised Trading Bot 4 The Double Ponzi and the Elusive Unbeatable Trading Bot 5 Sorry We Have Run – The $3billion Exit Scam 2 The Wild West – the Lawless Crypto Markets That Led to the Crypto Bubble 6 The Wild West, Joke and Scam Projects That Still Raised Millions, Money Doublers and Corrupt Exchanges 7 Crypto Exit Scams 8 If It Looks Like a Duck, Walks Like a Duck, Swims Like a Duck and Quacks Like a Duck, Then It’s a Ponzi 9 Crypto Mining Scams – Creating Nothing Out of Thin Air, Hacks and Cryptojacking 3 Institutional Market Manipulation

10 The Largest Bubble in Human History 11 Market Manipulation – Pumpand-dump Schemes 12 Crypto – Giving the Power Back to the People

Be A Free Range Human Escape the 9-5, Create a Life You Love and Still Pay the Bills

This book

energize and empower you to break out of the career cage and create a free range life that « Will works for you - without fitting into someone else’s formula step-by-step tools that you can tailor to your own needs to allow you to go from ‘idea’ to « Gives ‘getting well and reliably paid’ to this edition: updated content on dealing with internet advice overwhelm; new and up to « New date case studies; a completely revised method for how to apply the steps to different personality types Features even more inspiring stories of people who have successfully gone free range - including some who have already used this book to change their lives - as well as the practical steps to help you do the same

Description Trapped in a job or business that’s “just not you”? Always dreaming of your next vacation or living for the weekend? Marianne Cantwell’s straight-talking bestseller will help you break out of that career cage and Be A Free Range Human. It’s about much more than just quitting your job and becoming your own boss. It’s about life on your terms, working when, where and how you want - so you don’t have to fit yourself into someone else’s box to make a great income. This second edition won’t just inspire you, it will give you unconventional and practical steps to:

Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2019 Paperback: 9780749497095 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749497101 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789660166 £45 Previous edition: 9780749466107 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 216x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Work/Life Balance

Author Information Marianne Cantwell is an expert on creating a free range career and a successful work-life that fits who you really are (and the life you want). The founder of Free Range Humans, and a leading TEDx speaker, thousands have done her courses on finding your ‘thing’ (and making it work for you). Her thinking has featured everywhere from Business Week and CBS MoneyWatch, to The Guardian, Daily Mail and Entrepreneur magazine. A corporate escapee herself, she now lives and works in several countries (often between London and sunny California), and carries her business in a little laptop.

Business Management

- Discover what you really want to do with your life (even if no answer has ever fully fit) - Get started in 90 days, with what you have - Create a free range career, tailor-made for you and the life you want (be it travelling the world or hanging out in your favourite café) - Stand out from the crowd and get paid well to be you Be A Free Range Human was one of the first and most popular guides to creating a custom career (without an office or a boss). Updated with new advice on how to make free range work for your personality (you don’t need to be a constantly-networking extrovert. have an MBA, or get funding), this smart, energizing guide will help you cut through the noise, see your options in a new way, and get the freedom and fulfilment you crave.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Arabic 2nd Edition: Portuguese, Spanish, Turkish

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Get ready for the ride 1 What your school career adviser never told you 2 Why this matters now 2 Creating your free range life: How to decide what you really want 3 Why doing what you love is not negotiable 4 Dream big – then get off your butt and do it 5 Defrosting – your secret weapon in figuring out what you want 6 How to create your perfect ‘career’ when you want to do everything 7 Spot your superpowers 8 Taking free range action 3 Think like a free range human 9 Why you don’t need an original idea 10 Think beyond your job title 11 What a free range business looks like 12 How to free range-ify your idea 13 How to start with what you have 14 How to know if your idea will work

15 Meet the people who don’t want you to escape the career cage 16 What to do with those Reasons Why Not 17 Wait, but what if I’m not a shiny-haired, always-confident entrepreneur? 4 Build your free range escape hatch 18 Making a living without an office 19 Why you don’t need a business plan 20 Why you don’t need to appeal to everyone 21 How to decide who gets to give you money 22 How to brand like a rock star 23 How to stand out from the crowd 24 The three Free Range Styles 25 The Free Range Faststart 26 Instant status 27 How to communicate in an unsucky way 28 Why you don’t have to be an all-rounder 29 How to sell without selling your soul 30 Get comfortable with setting your salary

31 Overcoming information overwhelm 32 What to do when you get stuck 33 Living and working anywhere 34 How to quit your job: 10 steps to freedom 35 Epilogue 36 Index

Get a Life! Creating a Successful Work-Life Balance

This book

you take control, whether work is taking over your life, or your life is interfering in your « Helps professional success thorough and comprehensive, addressing a wide range of work-life aspects including mental « Ishealth and wellbeing; workload management and delegation; relationships at home and at work; mindset and mindfulness; job satisfaction; approach to working hours; networking; and professional and personal development Features case studies from diverse people and situations and practical action plans and exercises to help you manage your own work-life balance successfully, and apply the advice to your own circumstances and outlook

Description Is work taking over your life? Is your life interfering with your success at work? Work-life balance is ever-evolving and can be hard to find and maintain, especially as your career develops and circumstances change. Get A Life! is a highly practical handbook to help you do just that. Written by experienced coach, counsellor and wellbeing consultant Rick Hughes, this book covers everything from assessing your own needs, delegation and workload management and the myths of perfectionism, to managing and investing in relationships at work and at home, considering professional and personal development, and creativity and self-worth. With a wealth of advice, case studies and useful action plans founded in over 25 years of real-world experience, Get A Life! will help you find the balance that works for you, now. Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2020 Paperback: 9781789662009 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789662016 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789662023 £45 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 215x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Work/Life Balance

Author Information Rick Hughes (MBACP, MPhil, DipC, DipM) is Head of Service for the University of Aberdeen Counselling Service and former Lead Advisor: Workplace for the British Association for Counselling and Psychotherapy. He has been a Wellbeing Consultant, Workplace Counsellor, Coach, Employee Support trouble-shooter and writer for over 25 years, providing support, counsel or guidance for thousands of individuals.

Business Management

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese, Spanish, Vietnamese

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Personal development 2 People 3 Professional issues 4 Productivity and performance 5 Psychological and physical wellbeing 6 Practical factors 7 Pulling it all together 8 Appendix 9 Index

The Simplicity Principle Six Steps Towards Clarity in a Complex World

This book

why ‘simplicity bias’ affects the way the human brain works and why being straightforward « Explains is better than being complicated how any task or problem can be handled more effectively by following six easy to « Shows understand principles « Endorsement from Arianna Huffington, founder of Thrive Global case studies of people who have achieved simplicity including Michelin starred chef, « Includes Massimo Bottura, award-winning immunologist Faith Osier, Indian-British activist Satish Kumar and climate change campaigner Greta Thunberg

Description Modern life is complicated, much more so than it used to be. Acclaimed author and social entrepreneur, Julia Hobsbawm, shows you a simpler way. The Simplicity Principle challenges the assumption that all things that are complex have to stay that way. It helps keep things as lean, simple and focused as possible. Smartphone users experience concentration interruptions every 12 minutes of the day, there are over 250 billion emails sent every 24 hours and by 2021 the internet will have created more than 3.3 zettabytes of data. Yet complexity doesn’t have to dominate, complicate or clutter our lives. Based on a hexagonal model, this book shows you that it’s easy to streamline and simplify both your professional and personal lives with lessons based on the natural world.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2020 Hardback: 9781789663556 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789663532 £14.99 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 198x129 Band: Trade Promo Product Category: General Subject: Work/Life Balance

Author Information Julia Hobsbawm is an entrepreneur and writer who address the problems and solutions of humans in the machine age. She was described by James Harding, former editor of The Times and of BBC News and founder of Tortoise Media, as ‘one of the most important public intellectuals in the UK’. She is Honorary Visiting Professor of Workplace Social Health at London’s Cass Business School.

Business Management

For anyone who feels that life can be too much, The Simplicity Principle will help you break free of the endless choices and complexities that we face in the world today. It’s time to gain control of your focus and productivity, and most importantly, KEEP IT SIMPLE.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Korean, Portuguese, Turkish

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Hexagon thinking’s six principles 1 KISS – Keep it simple 2 The individual snowflake 3 Playing for time 4 Networks – Build your hive 5 Knowledge 6 Saturn Saturdays – Rest 2 Hexagon doing 7 Checklist chapter – From thinking to doing 8 Time zones 9 Be the bee – Individuality 10 The network effect 11 Knowledge dashboards 12 On the sixth day – Rest

Be Data Literate Analyze Effectively, Make Better Decisions and Succeed with Data

This book

the reader how to improve their data literacy: the ability to analyze, find insight in, and « Shows communicate with data confidently how to use data to become a better decision maker by developing curiosity, creativity and « Explains critical thinking the different skills required for the four levels of analytics (descriptive, diagnostic, « Examines predictive, prescriptive) and for different aspects of the data literacy world, from data visualisation to data science and data architecture Includes tips, tricks and exercises to work through and examples from industries successfully implementing data literacy skills from a leading expert and trainer

Description In the fast moving world of the fourth industrial revolution not everyone needs to be a data scientist but everyone should be data literate, with the ability to read, analyze and communicate with data. It is not enough for a business to have the best technology if those using it don’t understand the right questions to ask or how to use the information generated to make decisions. Data Literacy is the essential guide to developing the curiosity, creativity and critical thinking necessary to make anyone data literate, without retraining as a data scientist or statistician.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789668018 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789668025 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789668032 £60 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: Professional Subject: Business Improvement

Author Information Jordan Morrow is Global Head of Data Literacy for Qlik and has built one of the world’s first data literacy programs. He is Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project, a global community which aims to spark discussion and develop the tools needed for a data literate society. He has spoken at the United Nations about building their own data strategy and skills and was included in the 2019 DataIQ 100 power list of influential data and analytics practitioners. He is based in Utah, USA.

With exercises to show development and real-world examples from industries implementing data literacy skills, this book explains how to confidently read and speak the ‘language of data’ in the modern business environment and everyday life. Data Literacy is a practical guide to understanding the four levels of analytics, how to analyze data and the key steps to making smarter, data-informed decisions. Written by a founding pioneer and worldwide leading expert on data literacy, this book empowers professionals with the skills they need to succeed in the digital world.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Business Management

The world of data The four levels of analytics Defining data literacy The data literacy umbrella Reading and speaking the language of data Data literacy and the power to analyze Combining data literacy and the four levels of analytics The steps of data literacy learning The three Cs of data literacy Data-informed decision making Begin your data journey

Skills, Careers & Employability Innovation and Best Practice in Career Development Job Seekers Specific Careers Students

www.koganpage.com

Featured Titles

Make Your Own Map

The Success Trap

Kathryn Bishop February 2021 9781789668360

Amina Aitsi-Selmi December 2020 9781789665642

Good Work

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

Shannon Houde February 2021 9781789665727

Martin John Yate December 2020 9781789666915

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

The Success Trap Why Good People Stay in Jobs They Don’t Like and How to Break Free

This book

and explains the research behind why people feel trapped in jobs they don’t necessarily « Explores enjoy - even if they’re high performers the harmful workplace myths and touches on topics that contribute to toxic work cultures « Busts including imposter syndrome, burnout and golden handcuffs and enables you to reconnect with what you care about, and offers practical help and « Encourages advice to help you feel more empowered in your career examples and research from companies such as Google with ‘Project Aristotle’; The Global « Features Happiness Council with ‘Workplace Wellbeing’; and the Whitehall studies on stress factors in the workplace Includes practical tools, tips and exercises such as guided self-reflections to help you apply what you learn to your own life and career

Description Do you feel trapped in a toxic work culture? Or stuck in a job you’re great at... but that you don’t actually like? Why do good people stay in bad jobs for so long? The Success Trap answers all these questions - and shows you what to do about it. An estimated 80% of individuals in the western workforce want to change job - if you’re one of them, then this book will enable you to understand why, help you reconnect with what’s really important to you, and provide practical tips and tools to empower you to take control of your own career.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789665642 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789665659 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789665666 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Dr Amina Aitsi-Selmi M.D. Ph.D. is the Founder and Managing Director of Next Generation Coaching & Consulting Ltd. She works with individuals and companies who want to understand how best to work and lead in the 21st century, including clients from organizations such as the NHS, the BBC, the World Health Organisation, The Boston Consulting Group and the Royal Air Force. With over 20 years’ experience, she’s dedicated her career to helping people create healthy lives and environments; first as a physician, then as a health policy expert and now as a specialist consultant and coach.

Written by specialist coach and consultant Dr Amina Aitsi-Selmi, this book builds on her years of experience as a physician, in healthcare policy, and coaching and consulting with hundreds of individuals and organizations. Combining her personal expertise with scientific research - including Google’s Project Aristotle and the Global Happiness Council’s Workplace Wellbeing report - it provides insights and useful takeaways you can use in your own work life. Don’t stay stuck in a job you hate - let this book help you escape The Success Trap.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 3 7 8 9 10

Skills, Careers & Employability

Introduction – How to use this book The Success Trap – Why people stay in jobs they don’t like The challenge of work in the 21st century Something’s missing – Sensing freedom from the cage Imposter syndrome and harmful work culture myths Breaking free from your success trap Goal-driven versus the creative flow Slow down to speed up Healing with compassionate ruthlessness – Release, unlearn, reconnect Thriving outside the trap Turning uncertainty into opportunity From the employee-expert to entrepreneurial-leader mindset Work cultures that liberate Conclusion – A call to action

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs

This book

updated content for 2020, including new careers in the digital space such as Analyst and « Fully Influencer jobseekers with crucial and concise information: what qualifications are required, what « Provides does the job entail, what are the starting salaries and what are the opportunities in the industry as an easy-to-read and non-intimidating guide that is perfect for young people « Functions considering their career options « Covers over 300 different career paths available today careers advisers a one-stop reference guide to a huge range of career options, allowing them « Gives to easily direct students to the choices that best suit their ambitions and capabilities

Description From accountant to zoologist, this new edition of The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is your one-stop shop for insightful guidance on more than 300 different career areas in the UK. This book is a quick and informative way to find out about what jobs and careers are out there, from traditional roles to new opportunities in the digital world. For those looking for their first job after school or university, or for anyone considering a change of career, this book provides reliable and up-to-date advice on a wide range of professions to help you choose the right path for you.

Edition: 26 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789664584 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789664591 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789664614 £60 Previous edition: 9780749482305 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Skills, Careers & Employability

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs covers the practical issues you need to understand, such as the extent of job opportunities in each industry, what personal skills are needed, what experience is required, entry qualifications, training, as well as typical earnings and starting salaries. In an ever more competitive and changing job market, information will help maximize your chances of success. This book is designed to help identify what personal strengths fit to what kinds of work, what skills you should highlight on a CV and what you need to know about each job. This handy and informative reference guide is also a valuable resource for careers advisers working in schools, colleges and universities who need to keep track of new developments - such as new roles and routes of entry, professional associations and exams - to offer the very best guidance to today’s job hunters.

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions Your Comprehensive Job Search Guide with over 200 Practice Interview Questions

This book

an end-to-end guide to securing a job: searching, applying, preparing, interviewing and « Gives negotiating « Has sold over 5 million copies across previous editions « Includes over 200 interview questions with expert tips for tackling them guidance on the trickiest issues facing jobseekers, such as salary negotiations and « Provides searching for jobs during tough economic times « New to this edition: brand new content on making a career change

Description Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is the essential companion for all jobseekers. With over 5 million copies sold, this bestseller takes you through the whole process: from composing your CV and preparing for interviews, to interview techniques, answering tough questions and even negotiating your new salary. Crammed full of the difficult questions that interviewers might throw at you, Martin John Yate gives you expert tips and suggested answers to tackle the tricky ones including: Why should I give you the job? What is your biggest weakness? What are your salary expectations? How long would you stay with the company? What is your greatest strength? Why do you want to work here? Now in its 11th edition, Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is your indispensable guide to blowing away the competition and landing your dream job.

Edition: 11 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789666915 £12.99 Ebook: 9781789666939 £12.99 Hardback: 9781789666922 £40 Previous edition: 9780749481421 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies and is widely respected as the expert on all career matters. He is also the author of Ultimate CV and Ultimate Cover Letters, both published by Kogan Page.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Table of Contents 20 Multiple interviews, multiple Introduction offers 1 The well-stocked briefcase 1 The realities of job hunting 2 The productive CV 3 Networking and the successful job search 4 Network-integrated job search tactics 2 Getting to square one 5 Making contact 6 The telephone interview 7 Dressing for interview success 8 Body language 9 The curtain goes up on the job interview 3 Great answers to tough interview questions 10 The five secrets of securing a job offer 11 Why interviewers do the things they do 12 How to knock ‘em dead 13 Questions of manageability and team spirit 14 The stress interview and illegal questions 15 Welcome to the real world 16 The graceful exit 4 Finishing touches 17 Out of sight, out of mind? 18 Snatching victory from the jaws of defeat 19 Negotiating the offer

Bounce Back How to Fail Fast and be Resilient at Work

This book

you bounce back better and faster, whether you’re new to the world of work or taking steps « Helps into leadership you to take control of your personal and professional development, by showing you how « Empowers to improve your resilience at work and become more innovative, creative and successful practical advice, individual and group exercises, practice tips and a useful resilience self« Features assessment tool to make it really easy to apply the advice to your own life and work

Description Success. Innovation. Creativity. Growth. We all want these things at work - but the one thing they all have in common is that they involve failure. A fear of failure, or the inability to bounce back and learn from failures, is one of the biggest things that can hold us back in our professional development - so how do we learn how to fail well and develop our resilience? Wherever we work, and whatever role we deliver, we all have the power to change our thinking and our response to failure - Bounce Back is here to help. Written by Business Psychologist Dr Susan Kahn, this book will show you how to embrace failure. Failing fast, failing well, and learning how to be agile and resilient at work is a vital part of being a successful and innovative leader, approaching opportunities with excitement and creativity, and driving forward your personal and professional growth.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Paperback: 9780749497361 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749497354 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789660289 £45 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 217x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Dr Susan Kahn is a business psychologist, coach, consultant and mediator. As a coach, she works together with individuals and their organizations to help clients develop and enhance their authentic leadership style. As a mediator, she is skilled in improving working relationships and developing common understanding between parties in toxic relationships. In addition, she is a lecturer at Birkbeck, University of London, teaching coaching and organizational psychology, and is a faculty member at the School of Life, working with businesses to develop their emotional intelligence.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Packed with practical exercises, inspirational case studies and a useful resilience self-assessment guide, Bounce Back will show you how to invest in your resilience in a deliberate way, and empower you to face risk head-on. From learning how to respond well to critical feedback, to understanding cultural attitudes to failure around the world, this book will help you be a stronger, more resilient you.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese, Spanish, Vietnamese

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Fail fast 2 Brain and body 3 Below the surface 4 Change, disruption and loss 5 Leadership 6 Conflict 7 Purpose 8 Closing thoughts

Career Fear (and how to beat it) Get the Perspective, Mindset and Skills You Need to Futureproof your Work Life

This book

a topic that feels overwhelming and abstract, and breaks it down into clear, practical steps « Takes that will reassure and help you take control of your career you through the process of understanding the career landscape of the past, present and « Guides future, and your unique place in it inspiring case studies, clear and practical examples, and tools such as decision-making « Features techniques to help you apply the theory to your own career path

Description What’s going on with the world of work? Will my job exist in five years’ time? What’s ‘disruption’ all about, and what does it mean for me? Jobs don’t look like they used to. In this age of innovation, staying in control of your work life can feel overwhelmingly challenging. So what does it take to have - and be in control of - a successful and fulfilling career? Career Fear (and how to beat it) will help you answer this question for yourself. In this practical and reassuring book, you’ll explore the perspective, mindset and uniquely human skills you need for a resilient and thriving career - without the fear. From understanding how the world of work is changing, to self-reflection and developing your critical thinking; author Somi Arian guides you through everything you need to be ready for an exciting and varied journey through life and work. Packed with clear, useful examples and inspiring case studies, Career Fear (and how to beat it) helps you beat that career fear and prepare to succeed - no matter where your career takes you.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789664621 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664638 Hardback: 9781789664652 £45 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Somi Arian is a tech philosopher, international speaker, entrepreneur, awardwinning filmmaker and LinkedIn Top Voice among UK influencers. Her work focuses on the impact of technology on society at large, the future of work and digital marketing. She has given talks to industry leaders from organizations as diverse as the BBC, The Economist, Marie Claire, The Guardian, Amazon, HSBC, Virgin Atlantic and American Express. Her 2018 documentary The Millennial Disruption has been nominated for a dozen international film festival awards, winning the Worldfest Houston Silver Remi - Best Documentary Short Film (2019) and Idyllwild International Festival - Best Directory Documentary (2019).

Skills, Careers & Employability

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Perspective 1 A history of work 2 Today’s career landscape 3 The future of work – AI and humanity 4 The future of work – time, transition, and machines 2 Mindset 5 Knowing yourself 6 Your place in the world 3 ‘Human’ skills 7 Emotional intelligence 8 Critical thinking 9 Mindfulness

Confident Coding How to Write Code and Futureproof Your Career

This book

« Contains practical guidance on how to enhance your career through coding skills you how to use HTML, CSS, JavaScript and Python; debug and problem-solve; create your « Teaches own websites and apps for Android and iOS « Was the Bronze Runner Up at the Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition) to this edition: new & improved step-by-step examples; a real-life visitor registration app you « New can create; Mac- and Windows-friendly « Features online coding exercises and activities, for you to practice and hone your new skills of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need « Isto part enhance your career Description BRONZE RUNNER UP: Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition) Whether you’re an entrepreneur, a recent graduate or a professional - you can supercharge your career by learning how to code. Coding is one of the most in-demand skills in the job market, so grasping the basics can advance your creative potential and make you stand out from the crowd, and Confident Coding is here to help.

Edition: 2 Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789663082 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789663099 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789663105 £45 Previous edition: 9780749479633 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Rob Percival is a web developer, author and entrepreneur who has taught over 500,000 students how to code through his online courses on Udemy. His courses have been translated into over five different languages and have taught people all around the world to become proficient and confident webdevelopers. Darren Woods is Managing Director of Synapture, a Cambridge-based Web/ Software Development Agency. Alongside his development work, he teaches a Pre-Diploma Computer Science course.

Skills, Careers & Employability

This new and improved second edition of the award-winning book gives you a step-by-step learning guide to HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Python, building iPhone and Android apps and debugging. For entrepreneurs, being able to create your own website or app can grant you valuable freedom and revolutionize your business. For aspiring developers, this book will give you the building blocks to embark on your career path. For working professionals, coding skills can add a valuable edge to your CV. Whatever your professional profile, if you want to master the fundamentals of coding and kick start your career, Confident Coding is the book for you. About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Korean

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why coding 1 Why coding is important and what it can do for you 2 What coding is 2 Languages 3 HTML 4 CSS 5 JavaScript 6 Python 3 In practice 7 Website development 8 Building an android app 9 Building an iPhone/iPad app 10 Debugging 4 Futureproofing your career with coding 11 Using coding to enhance your career prospects 12 Coding and entrepreneurship – creating your own business or product 13 Pursuing coding further – becoming a developer 14 Conclusion

Confident Data Skills How to Work with Data and Futureproof Your Career

This book

the most important techniques of working with data, including: visualization, modelling, « Covers preparation, presentation and communication several inspiring case studies that show you how data skills are applied in real companies « Contains from around the world, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue, AlphaGo and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co. Gives insightful guidance on how your new skills can boost your employability, enhance your career and make a difference to your chosen industry New to this edition: New and up to date case studies; content on neural networks and deep learning; content on the latest developments and opportunities in AI and deep learning Demystifies the seemingly difficult world of data and makes complicated techniques easy to understand through clear language and step-by-step instructions Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

« « « «

Description Data has dramatically changed how our world works. Understanding and using data is now one of the most transferable and desirable skills out there - whether you’re an entrepreneur wanting to boost your business, a job-seeker looking for that employable edge, or hoping to make the most of your current career. Learning how to work with data may seem intimidating or difficult - but don’t worry, Confident Data Skills is here to help.

Edition: 2 Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789664386 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789664393 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789664416 £45 Previous edition: 9780749481544 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

This updated second edition takes you through the basics of data: from data mining and preparing and analyzing your data, to visualizing and communicating your insights, and now with exciting new content on neural networks and deep learning. Featuring in-depth international case studies from companies like Netflix, LinkedIn and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co., as well as easy-to understand language and inspiring advice and guidance, Confident Data Skills help you use your new-found data skills to give your career that cutting-edge boost. About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path..

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Russian

Author Information Kirill Eremenko is a data science entrepreneur, instructor and consultant. As Founder and CEO of SuperDataScience, he leverages data to drive business strategy, revamp customer experience, and revolutionize business processes. Eremenko runs close to 50 online courses, taken by over 1,000,000 students worldwide.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Table of Contents Introduction 1 “What is it?” key principles 1 Defining data 2 How data fulfils our needs 3 The data science mindset 2 “When and where can I get it?” data gathering and analysis 4 Identify the problem 5 Data preparation 6 Data analysis (part I) 7 Data analysis (part II) 3 “How can I present it?” communicating data 8 Data visualization 9 Data presentation 10 Your career in data science

Confident Digital Content How to Create and Manage Amazing Social Media and Web Content for a Futureproof Career

This book

the basics of video creation, graphic design, photography, digital journalism and writing « Explains skills specialized to the digital world enhance all career paths, with advice on boosting creativity, career prospects, entrepreneurship « Can and leadership in the digital world and exercises to help you put your knowledge into practice to this edition: Covers the latest trends including fake news and social listening analysis; « New updated and improved case studies; and a new chapter on digital content campaign planning interviews with experts from Mumsnet, CNN International, HuffPost UK, Bunster’s Hot « Features Sauce and Crocstar Media of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need « Isto part enhance your career

Description Are you considering a career in social media? Are you an entrepreneur or freelancer looking to boost your online content marketing? Maybe you’re looking for your next career pivot, or you’re simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge? Wherever you are in your career, Confident Digital Content can help. Covering the essentials of online content, this book takes you through everything you need to know - from how to write effectively for online platforms, to video, audio, graphic design and photography. Featuring inspiring case studies from individuals at companies including CNN International, Mumsnet, Bunster’s Hot Sauce and HuffPost UK, this practical beginner’s guide includes guidance on content marketing strategy, metrics and community management. Edition: 2 Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789663365 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789663372 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789663389 £45 Previous edition: 9780749480943 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Adam Waters has been working in digital for fifteen years. He currently runs BFBS Creative, a content agency based in London. He’s a juror for the Royal Television Society Digital Journalism awards and regularly serves as a digital advisor to charities and government. He’s on the InsideOut Leaderboard, is passionate about creating opportunity for people through digital skills, and regularly runs mentoring programmes for young people.

Skills, Careers & Employability

This updated second edition also features advice on the latest trends, including fake news, the importance of stories, and social listening analysis, and a new chapter on campaign planning for digital. Though trends, fads and hashtags change, the principles of great online content remain the same - let Confident Digital Content give you the grounding you need to ace your social channels and supercharge your career. About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Korean

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why digital content skills are essential for your career 2 How to write for digital 3 Making great video 4 Graphic design, photography and audio 5 Digital community building 6 Evaluation 7 Social media 8 People 9 Campaign planning 10 Conclusion

Confident Web Design How to Design and Create Websites and Futureproof Your Career

This book

the essential skills and concepts you need, including coding languages, tools, creating, « Covers enhancing and publishing the website a step-by-step guide which enables you to build your own basic website by the end of the « Provides book, in easy-to-understand language practical online exercises, to allow you to test out your new skills and consolidate your « Features learning of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need « Isto part enhance your career

Description Do you need a website to support your freelance business or entrepreneurial venture? Or are you considering a career in web design? Maybe you’re looking for your next career pivot, or you’re simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge? Wherever you are in your career, Confident Web Design can help. The ultimate beginner’s guide to designing, building and publishing basic websites, this book features exclusive online exercises to help you practice your new skills in context. Covering the basics of HTML, CSS and JavaScript, as well as giving you a thorough grounding in the real-life application of these principles, this book provides helpful examples, explanations of technical terms, and clear, easy-to-understand language - meaning your first website is only a few chapters away.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789663457 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789663464 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789663471 £45 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Kenny Wood has over 12 years of experience in web design, and is the founder of IndigoMelody. He has created websites and apps for organizations including SkillPill, Globelynx, the University of Warwick, Crenshaw Associates, Lennon Wright, Gadfly Media and the British Forces Broadcasting Service. A regular blogger, he created IndigoMelody’s ‘How we Made It’ web design blog.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Taking you on a practical journey to publish a basic website from scratch, the book’s structure is designed to break down each skill into manageable chunks, aided by helpful examples, technical term glossaries, tables and images to support you as you learn. Wherever you are in your career, let Confident Web Design give you that cutting edge with vital programming and design skills. About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 How the web works and the tools and languages of web design 1 HTML 2 HTML part 1 3 HTML part 2 2 CSS 4 CSS part 1 5 CSS part 2 6 CSS part 3 3 JavaScript 7 JavaScript part 1 8 JavaScript part 2 9 JavaScript part 3 10 JavaScript part 4 4 Putting everything into practice 11 Creating the website 12 Getting your website online 13 Conclusion

Confident Cyber Security How to Get Started in Cyber Security and Futureproof Your Career

This book

« Covers the basic principles of cyber security, a vital and in-demand skill area real-world case studies to help you apply your knowledge, from companies and people « Features such such as Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, plus examples from a range of industries including entertainment, social media influencers and property Includes practical exercises to help you hone your skills, as well as dedicated advice on how cyber security can enhance your career, wherever you are in your work life Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

« «

Description Are you a freelancer or entrepreneur needing to keep your business secure? Hoping to kick-start or pivot your career with a highly desirable skill? Or simply looking to enhance your CV? Cyber security skills are in huge demand - recent estimates suggest there will be as many as 3.5 million unfilled industry roles by 2021, meaning there are vast career opportunities to be taken. Confident Cyber Security is here to help. Written by expert author and speaker, Dr Jessica Barker, this jargon-busting guide will give you a clear overview of the world of cyber security. Exploring everything from the human side to the technical and physical implications, this book takes you through the basics: how to keep secrets safe, how to stop people being manipulated and how to protect people, businesses and countries from those who wish to do harm.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789663402 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789663419 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789663426 £45 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Dr Jessica Barker has been named one of the top 20 most influential women in cyber security in the UK and in 2017, was awarded one of the UK’s Tech Women 50. Co-Founder and co-CEO of Cygenta, she is a popular keynote speaker internationally, as well as a frequent contributor to print and broadcast media. She appears on the BBC, Sky News, Channel 4 News, Channel 5 News, Radio 4’s Today programme, Radio 2’s Jeremy Vine show and more, and has been published in the Sunday Times, Grazia and The Guardian, as well as industry press.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Featuring real-world case studies from organizations and people such as Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale as well as entertainment, property, social media influencers and other industries, this book is packed with clear explanations, sound advice and practical exercises to help you understand and apply the principles of cyber security. With a dedicated section on what it could mean for you, let Confident Cyber Security give you that cutting-edge career boost you seek. About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why cyber security? 1 What cyber security is 2 Why it is important 2 The technical side of cyber security 3 Technical vulnerabilities 3 The human side of cyber security 4 Why people are so important in cyber security 5 Social engineering 6 Attacks that utilise social engineering 4 The physical side of cyber security 7 Why physical space matters in cyber security 8 Attacks on the individual 9 Attacks on organisations 10 Nation state cyber security – Geopolitics 5 The future of cyber security and what it means for your career 11 Cyber security in different industries 12 Cyber security at the board level 13 The variety of cyber security careers 14 Pursuing a cyber security career

Good Work How to Build a Career that Makes a Difference in the World

This book

you through a clear step-by-step structure to help you get - and succeed in - a job that will « Guides have a positive impact on the world packed with practical tools, useful worksheets and helpful tips, to help you apply the advice to « Isyour own life and career path; from working out your own values and strengths, to figuring out how they fit in with what the world needs Features case studies from leaders in the sector, including a Director of Corporate Responsibility and a Chief Sustainability Officer

Description Do you want what you do for a living to have a positive impact on the world? Do you want have a successful career and make a difference? In short... do you want to do Good Work? Let this book show you how. Packed with useful tools and exercises, this step-by-step guide will help you figure out your passion and purpose, and how to effectively harness it to make real and positive change - on the world, and on your career. Whether you want to battle climate change, promote diversity and inclusion, work in sustainability - or if you’re not sure, but just want to leave things a little better at the end of every work day - let this book support you in turning that passion into action. Written by corporate responsibility consultant and certified coach Shannon Houde, this book is part career guide and part job search help - and all purpose-driven. From understanding what the ‘purpose economy’ is and how you fit into it, to what jobs to go for and how to land them, Good Work is the helping hand you need to make a career out of changing the world. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789665727 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789665734 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789665741 £45 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Shannon Houde is the Founder and Managing Director of Walk of Life Coaching, an international career advisory consultancy focused on sustainable business, environmental, impact investing, international development and corporate responsibility. A speaker, consultant and certified coach, she works with clients around the world, across brands ranging from Google and Deutsche Bank to Virgin Airlines and the UN Foundation. Originally from Maryland, US, she has lived and worked in Washington DC, Chile, San Francisco, Phoenix, Sicily, Geneva and London, to name a few, and is now based in Cambridge, UK.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Hungarian

Table of Contents 1 1 2 2 3 4

5 3 6

7 8

Skills, Careers & Employability

Introduction – making a difference The market landscape Lay of the land – what is an impact career anyway? The change makers – who do I want to be when I grow up? Aim your compass Narrowing the net – how do I figure out where I fit into the sustainability market? The two-way street of valuesbased organizations – how do I match my values & traits to theirs? Change your course – How do I gain experience in the impact space and fill my gaps? Map your story Be in their shoes – how do I know what the hiring manager really wants when I don’t know the lingo? Prove your skills – how do my skills translate for a missiondriven role? Wow them on paper – what are the best bits of my story that make me unique for the circular economy? Write a love letter using KISS – tell a compelling, missiondriven story

4 Step into the market 10 Tell me so I’ll listen – how do I convert my unique story into a thought leader’s bio? 11 Sustainability jobs are all about partnering – how can I show I’m someone worth collaborating with on LinkedIn? 12 Recruiters are not your friends – where do I find the best impact roles? 13 Networking Sherpa – how can I walk the talk of collaboration and make new friends for a win-win? 14 Now in person at the interview – how do I show them in person that I’m the one they want for the job? 15 Conclusion

Make Your Own Map Career Success Strategy for Women

This book

tried-and-tested strategic planning tools and practical exercises, borrowed from successful « Provides business practice, to apply to individual career paths written specifically for women, to account for and answer the particular challenges and « Isdifficulties that many women face in the workplace and with career planning Is based on material from the Oxford University’s first leadership programme for women, the « Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School

Description There’s no such thing as a pre-set path to career success. Following the footsteps of others can only get you so far - and for women, there are often additional obstacles. But what if you could design your own path to your career goals? What if you could Make Your Own Map? Based on material from the popular Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, Make Your Own Map will help you develop a resilient and aspirational strategy for your career - whatever your starting point. Effective methods of strategic planning have been tried and tested in the corporate business world, and this book shows you how to repurpose those methods for yourself, even if you’re not in the corporate world. Packed with strategic tools and practical exercises, this book will help you:

New Edition: 1 Title

Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789668360 £14.99 Ebook: 9781789668377 £14.99 Hardback: 9781789668384 £45 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

Author Information Kathryn Bishop is an Associate Fellow at the Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, where she has taught strategy development to organizations and individuals for over 20 years. The Programme Director for Women Transforming Leadership - Oxford University’s first leadership programme for women - she is also the first Chair of the new Welsh Revenue Authority.

-Assess and define your career goals -Make a plan -Implement your plan to find the work that fits your needs, your skills, and your direction. With your best career as the goal, this book will help you forge your own path and Make Your Own Map.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 8 9 10

Skills, Careers & Employability

Introduction – What’s this book for and how do you use it? Examining the past and present to plan for the future How did you get here? – Your journey map What’s working well right now? – Your personal dashboard Envisaging your future – Four different approaches What work matters most to you? – The ikigai model What purpose do you serve? – The story of you How might you organise your working life? – Your life architecture What’s worth developing? – The strengths model Making strategy real How do you plan for change realistically? How do you turn your new strategy into action? – Planning and experimenting Where do you start? – Implementation tactics Final words – Getting underway

Practical Teaching Skills for Driving Instructors Developing Your Client-Centred Learning and Coaching Skills

This book

the most recent changes to the ADI examinations, as well as the ADI Standards Check and « Covers UK driving test changes, making it the most up-to-date resource on the market « Complements the bestselling partner title, The Driving Instructor’s Handbook content on structuring lessons, communication skills, making lessons enjoyable, problem « Includes solving, and decision making to help both trainee and qualified ADIs get the best out of their learners

client-centred learning and practical coaching skills so readers can improve their ability « Emphasizes to teach as a lifetime skill to this edition: New chapter, including examples, to explain and contextualize the National « New Standards; incorporated feedback on the changes to the driving test manoeuvres with more and better examples

Description Essential reading for the ADI exams, Practical Teaching Skills for Driving Instructors is an indispensable guide for all new and established driving instructors. Fully revised and updated for this 11th edition, it also provides all the necessary advice for the conscientious instructor keen to communicate effectively with their learners.

Edition: 11 Date: 03/12/2019 Paperback: 9780749498580 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749498597 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789660609 £60 Previous edition: 9780749480318 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x158 Band: General Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Specific Vocations

Author Information John Miller is a consultant. Involved in the driving training industry for over 35 years, he ran his own driving school for car and lorry drivers, together with an instructor training facility. He is also author of The Driving Instructor’s Handbook, which is listed by the DVSA as recommended reading material for the ADI exams. Susan McCormack is Managing Director of Tri-Coaching Partnership, which focuses on training and developing Approved Driving Instructors (ADIs). A regular contributor to industry media, she has created several training courses, including the Pearsonaccredited BTEC Level 4 in Coaching for Driver Development.

Skills, Careers & Employability

Containing essential guidance on teaching, communication and coaching skills, Practical Teaching Skills for Driving Instructors is ideal for both existing and trainee driving instructors. It investigates how and why people learn, and the different teaching and learning processes that are involved. With sections on structuring lessons and problem solving, it covers the whole teaching process, from early stage lessons to the final practical test. The companion title to the popular best-seller, The Driving Instructor’s Handbook, this is your practical guide to developing and improving your ability to teach driving as a lifetime skill.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Learning to drive 2 Communication skills 3 Client-centred learning and coaching 4 Lesson structure and content 5 Structured driver training 6 National driving training standards explained 7 The ADI standards check

Success After Service How to Take Control of Your Job Search and Career After Military Duty

This book

a detailed checklist of career-related tasks, such as drafting a résumé, finding a mentor and « Includes accessing internships, to complete prior to transition insights and information from corporate hiring managers and recruiters regarding the skills « Offers gaps and culture differences veterans should address when applying practical resources for the US Department of Labor’s Transition Goal Plan Success (GPS) « Provides Program by an accredited expert in the civilian space on personal branding and military transition, « Written whose extensive experience in helping service members build civilian careers comes in motivational yet practical tips

Description Figuring out your next move after transitioning out of the military should start before your last day. Prepare yourself emotionally and professionally to put those hard-earned skills in context of the civilian world. The transition from military to civilian life is more than just a title change; it is a whole new life experience with the sense of excitement and possibility that accompany a transition. Whether you’re preparing to retire or separate, Success After Service is written to help all veterans succeed in the civilian workplace.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789665932 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789665949 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789665956 £60 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Specific Vocations

Author Information Lida Citroën specializes in personal branding and reputation management online and in-person for a target audience, and is based in Englewood, CO. She volunteers to help transitioning military service members build their civilian careers by teaching personal branding and online reputation management in the TAP program at the United States Air Force Academy. She also consults with private Fortune 100 companies who are looking to hire and increase the number of veteran employees. She is the author of two veteranfocused books: Your Next Mission (2014) and Engaging with Veteran Talent (2017).

Skills, Careers & Employability

Success After Service provides the tools, resources and strategies to help you adapt to the civilian workplace and evaluate post-military career options. Whether you become an entrepreneur, move into the corporate world or pursue higher education, you will learn how to develop a portfolio of career assets, including your resume, elevator pitch, online profiles, interview acumen and professional network, empowering you to begin your new career with confidence and clarity. Success After Service is the perfect guide for transitioning military and veterans who seek a coherent set of strategies, resources and steps for building a meaningful, deliberate and rewarding post-military career.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Fundamentals of career readiness 2 What to do before you separate or retire 3 Evaluating the path forward - Employment, education or entrepreneurship 4 Building your personal brand 5 Career ready tools to gather Resume and cover letter 6 Getting yourself out there Crafting your narrative and networking in person 7 Getting yourself out there Networking online 8 Finding mentors, apprenticeships and internships 9 Researching, Applying and Interviewing for a Job 10 Choosing and Beginning Your Career, Education or Business Venture 11 Growing Your Career in the First Three Years 12 Growing Your Career and Knowing When to Move On

Human Resources, Learning & Development Innovation and Best Practice in Change Management CIPD Coaching Employee Engagement Employment Law & Relations Human Resource Management HR Analytics Learning & Development Organizational Development Performance Management Reward Management Talent Management & Recruitment

www.koganpage.com

Featured Titles

Human Resource Practice Fiona Whiting October 2020 9781789665765

Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Michael Armstrong December 2020 9781789661729

The Energized Workplace

Flexible Working

Perry Timms August 2020 9780749498665

Gemma Dale December 2020 9781789665895

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Remote Work Design Processes, Practices and Strategies to Engage a Remote Workforce and Boost Business Performance

This book

« Shows how to establish KPIs and measure performance for remote employees how to adapt processes to engage all employees including recording meetings and creating « Explains virtual ‘water cooler’ environments insights from leading experts such as Marshall Goldsmith, David Marquet, Courtney Seiter, « Includes Eric Severson and Bjorn Eland the benefits of a remote workforce including the lack of wasted time across time zones « Outlines and why a remote workforce can allow faster expansion and execution Description How can I develop a team if they’re not in the same place? How can I build a company culture that works for employees in an office, working at home and in co-work spaces? How can I maintain organizational oversight if I can’t see my employees? Remote Work answers all these questions and more and provides guidance on how to build a successful remote working strategy that engages employees, allows them to perform to their full potential and improves business performance. Even before the COVID-19 pandemic, demand from employees to work remotely was high with a 2019 report stating that 34% people would even take a pay cut if they could work remotely part of the time. HR professionals and business leaders need to address this demand to attract and retain the talent the business needs. Remote Work is written by two industry experts who have successfully transitioned their workforces to remote and includes essential guidance on how to implement policies, processes and strategies for remote working and realise the benefits of this.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781398600362 £22.99 Ebook: 9781398600379 £22.99 Hardback: 9781398600386 £70 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Chris Dyer is the Founder and CEO of PeopleG2, a background check and intelligence firm. Based in California, he is the host of TalentTalk on OC Talk Radio and iHeartRadio, an in-demand speaker on company culture, remote workforces, and employee engagement, and a frequent contributor to Forbes, Inc, HR.com and the Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM). Kim Shepherd is the Founder of Decision Toolbox, a recruitment solutions provider, which has been entirely virtual since 2002. Based in California she is a recognised thought leader by organizations including the Human Capital Institute and a frequent keynote speaker.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

From advice on technological solutions to adapting processes and driving engagement, this book also outlines the business benefits of a remote workforce including improved productivity and output and how it allows faster expansion and execution. Remote Work is also supported by insights from global thought leaders such as Marshall Goldsmith and David Marquet as well as leading HR professionals including the Director of People at Buffer, CHRO at Niemen Marcus and Senior Director of HR Excellence at Taco Bell.

Table of Contents 1 What is Remote Work? 2 Adapting Policies and Processes 3 Building a Remote Working Strategy 4 Remote Work and Company Culture 5 Remote Work and Performance 6 Remote Work and Employee Motivation 7 Remote Work and Meetings 8 Measurement of Remote Work 9 Remote Work and Operational Oversight 10 Benefits of Remote Working 11 Optimizing a Remote Workforce for Business Advantage

Solving the Productivity Puzzle How to Engage, Motivate and Develop Employees to Improve Individual and Business Performance

This book

guidance on how to effectively motivate and engage a multi-generational workforce with « Provides competing priorities how to embed learning in the business to ensure staff have the skills needed to meet « Explains personal role and organizational goals case studies from global organizations such as Accenture, Aetna, Apple, Google, IBM and « Includes SAP how to develop an effective workforce planning strategy to ensure the right people are in the « Shows right roles in an organization to ensure business success how to use people data and new technological developments to track and measure « Shows workplace productivity and support employee development

Description An engaged and productive workforce is essential for organizational growth and business success. However, record levels of disengaged staff, a lack of motivation and employees feeling that they lack the necessary skills and support to excel at their jobs is putting this in jeopardy. HR practitioners are ideally placed to address these issues and boost productivity at every stage of the employee lifecycle to improve individual performance and drive business results.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789664744 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789664751 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789664768 £60 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Tim Ringo Chartered FCIPD, is a senior executive, board advisor, author and popular conference speaker, based in London. Most recently he was Vice President, SAP SuccessFactors where he focused on helping organizations drive performance through effective human resources strategy and technology. Prior to this, he was an Executive Partner in Talent & Organisation Services at Accenture and then Vice President and Global Leader of IBM’s Human Capital Management consulting practice.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Solving the Productivity Puzzle is a practical guide for all people management professionals to address the challenge of stagnating people productivity. It covers how to embed learning and development activities to ensure that employees feel equipped with the skills they need to meet their goals, motivate a workforce made up of six generations with competing priorities, develop an effective workforce planning strategy to make sure the right people are in the right place at the right time, with the right motivation in the organization to build a company culture that allows people to thrive. Solving the Productivity Puzzle also includes expert guidance on how implement change to opportunity in the workforce, track and measure productivity and how to leverage new technologies to support employees. Including case studies from global organizations including Accenture, Aetna, Apple, Google, IBM, and SAP. This is essential reading for HR professionals needing to supercharge productivity in their organization for both employee and business success.

Table of Contents 1 The Productivity Crisis 2 What’s causing poor productivity and how HR can help? 3 Motivation and the emerging workforce 4 Engaging your talent 5 Giving people the skills they need to succeed 6 Getting the right people in the right place 7 Building a structure for peak performance 8 Creating a culture that helps employees thrive 9 Tracking and measuring productivity 10 Using data for insights and innovation 11 Concluding actions for sustainable productivity growth

Human Resource Practice

This book

a thorough grounding in all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, « Provides performance management, reward management and L&D a dedicated chapter on personal effectiveness to provide students with the skills they « Includes need to progress in a career in HR such as influence, resilience, empathy and handling difficult conversations Covers wider business topics including change management, organisational context and communication technology to ensure that students have a broad understanding of the business environment Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress as well as explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply. New to this edition: Fully aligned to the new CIPD Level 3 qualification including additional information on job design, people analytics and employee mental health Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

« «

Description Edition: 8 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789665765 £47.99 Ebook: 9781789665789 £47.99 Hardback: 9781789665796 £150 Previous edition: 9781843984061 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 246x189 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Fiona Whiting is a freelance HR and organisational development consultant with over 20 years’ experience as an HR practitioner. She has held a number of executive board-level positions and has worked predominantly with the NHS, local authorities and academic institutions as well as in a variety of private sector organisations. Fiona Whiting is also the co-founder and director of The People Effect List.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Human Resource Practice is a practical and accessible guide for students and anyone looking to gain a thorough understanding of HR, and is the definitive text for the CIPD’s Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice. It covers all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, performance management, reward and learning and development (L&D) as well as providing students with the broader coverage of the business environment that they need to succeed including topics such as change management, organisational context and the legal background to employment. This fully updated 8th edition of Human Resource Practice now includes new discussion of job design, people analytics and employee mental and is fully aligned to the new CIPD foundation syllabus. Reflective practice questions, case studies and explore further boxes throughout encourage students to think critically about the content and understand how it applies in practice in the workplace. Most importantly, this book contains a dedicated chapter on personal effectiveness to ensure that students develop all the skills they need for a successful career in HR such as presentation and communication skills, empathy, resilience and guidance on how to handle difficult conversations. Online resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction and Overview 2 The Organisational Context 3 The Legal Background to Employment 4 Job Analysis 5 Recruitment and Selection 6 Performance Management 7 Reward 8 Employee Relations 9 Learning and Development 10 Information and Communication Technology in HR 11 Change in Organisations 12 Personal Effectiveness

Agile HR Deliver Value in a Changing World of Work

This book

how an agile approach to HR can save time, reduce costs, improve innovation and drive « Shows performance how to deal with resistance, constraints and backlogs when implementing agile people « Explains processes case studies from global organizations including Sky Betting & Gaming and MUJI, as well « Includes interviews with Jeff Sutherland and Josh Bersin. guidance on how HR professionals can prioritise activities effectively and confidently « Provides assess which to continue, which to develop, which to evolve and which to abandon to achieve continuous business improvement Allows readers to make more evidence-based decisions by effectively using data, prototyping and user-testing.

Description In the new world of work, agility is a business imperative. From small tech start-ups or large traditional companies, organizations need to be fast, flexible and digitally empowered to succeed. However, too many companies are stuck with siloed, compliance-driven HR processes that work in opposition to the business rather than supporting it. This results in the view that HR is slow and out of touch. However, Agile HR shows that this doesn’t need to be the case. It is a practical guide written specifically for people professionals on how the HR function can develop agile processes and practices that save time, boost performance and support overall business goals. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789665857 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665871 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665864 £90 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Natal Dank is the Chief HR Agilist at Southern Blue Consulting where she works with HR teams and leaders to help them to embrace an agile mindset and redesign processes for business success. She is also the co-founder of Agile HR Community. Riina Hellstrom is an Agile Enterprise Coach and the Founder and CEO of People Geeks Ltd. She is an internationally recognised thought leader in Agile HR, the co-founder of the Agile HR Community and the Founder of the Agile HR Finland Network.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Covering every aspect of the HR function from people processes, ways of working and HR services to organization design, operating models and HR teams, Agile HR is an essential guide for all HR practitioners wanting to make their HR practices agile and drive business performance but don’t know where to start. As well as guidance on how to deal with resistance, manage a backlog and deal with constraints, there is also invaluable guidance on how HR can prioritize effectively and assess which activities to pursue, which to develop, which to rework and which to abandon in order to achieve continuous business improvement. Supported by case studies from organizations who have seen the benefits of an agile approach to HR including Sky Betting & Gaming and MUJI, this is critical reading for all HR professionals in organizations of any size needing to adopt fast, flexible and evolving agile approaches to effectively compete in the new world of work.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 An introduction to the Agile Mindset 2 Why Agile? 3 The Agile Mindset 4 Design thinking for Agile Teams 5 Agile ways of working 6 Scrum & Kanban 2 Agile for HR Toolkit 7 Introduction 8 Agile for HR Toolkit: Value and Prioritisation 9 Agile for HR Toolkit: Cocreation 10 Agile for HR Toolkit: Agile Teams & Operational Models in HR 11 Agile for HR Toolkit: Thinking Like a Scientist 12 Agile for HR Toolkit: Continuous Improvement 3 HR for Agile 13 Introduction 14 Co-creating the Agile Vision 15 Agile Organisational Design 16 HR’s role in Agile Transformation 17 Agile HR Products and Services 4 Conclusion 18 Conclusion

Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Improve Business Performance Through Strategic People Management

This book

how to align HR strategies, policies and practices with wider organizational goals and « Shows objectives to improve business performance key learning summaries, source reviews and real-life examples from organizations « Features including UNICEF and General Motors (GM) to this edition: chapters on evidence-based strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies « New and HR analytics, additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking Online resources: lecture slides and handbooks for lecturers and students which include selfassessment questions, case study exercises and a glossary and literature review

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management is a complete guide to integrating HR strategies with wider organizational goals and objectives approaches to achieve sustained competitive advantage. Supported by key learning summaries, source reviews and practical real-life examples from organizations including UNICEF and General Motors (GM), it provides coverage of HRM strategies in key areas of the function such as employee engagement, talent management and learning and development, as well as strategic HRM approaches in an international context.

Edition: 7 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789661729 £34.99 Ebook: 9781789661736 £34.99 Hardback: 9781789661743 £110 Previous edition: 9780749476823 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward and was previously a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This fully revised seventh edition of Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management contains new chapters on evidence-based strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies and HR analytics, as well as additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking. It remains an indispensable resource for both professionals and those studying HR qualifications, including undergraduate and masters degrees and the CIPD’s advanced level qualifications. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students which include self-assessment questions, case study exercises, and a glossary and literature review.

Rights Sold 6th Edition: Georgian, Turkish

Table of Contents Introduction 1 The framework of strategic HRM 1 Human resource management 2 Strategic management 3 Strategic human resource management 4 The strategic role of HR 5 Evidence-based strategic HRM 2 HRM strategy in general 6 The nature of HR strategy 7 Developing HR strategy 8 Delivering HR strategy 3 HRM strategies related to organizational capability and organizational and individual performance 9 Organization development strategy 10 Human capital management strategy 11 Knowledge management strategy 12 Corporate social responsibility strategy 13 Organizational performance strategy 14 Individual performance management strategy 4 HRM strategies dealing with specific aspects of HRM 15 Employee engagement strategy

16 17 18 19 20 21 5 22 23 6 24 25

Employee wellbeing strategy Resourcing strategy Talent management strategy Learning and development strategy Reward strategy Employee relations strategy The technological scene HR analytics The impact of E-HRM on strategic HRM The international scene Strategic international HRM International HRM strategies

Flexible Working How to Implement Flexibility in the Workplace to Improve Employee and Business Performance

This book

« Provides guidance on how to design and implement an effective flexible working policy different forms of flexible working including job sharing, compressed or altered hours and « Covers remote working how a proactive flexible working strategy creates more inclusive organizations and allows « Shows businesses to become more environmentally responsible how flexible working practices improve talent acquisition, development and retention, « Explains reduce workplace stress and increase employee engagement « Includes case studies from organizations including Zurich Insurance Description Flexible working is now a key concern for many employees. It spans genders, ages and family circumstances, with 37% of millennials declining a job offer if working flexibly isn’t an option and 78% of employees over 50 wanting more flexible hours. Flexible Working is a practical guide for HR practitioners showing how to develop an effective flexible working strategy to meet the needs of employees and the needs of the business. This book explains how to develop effective flexibility policies and processes as well as how to communicate and train line managers on these practices. It also includes advice on how to overcome barriers to flexible working, dispels common myths and offers guidance on the different forms of flexible working available to organizations.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789665895 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665901 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665918 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Gemma Dale is a Senior HR professional, conference speaker, writer and coach with over 20 years’ experience. She is currently the Policy and Engagement Manager at the University of Manchester and co-founder of The Work Consultancy where she helps business develop their people policies. She us a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD (Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development) and author of the award-winning HR blog, People Stuff.

Flexible Working shows that working practices outside the standard 9-5, five-days-a-week in the office can benefit a company. It drives employee engagement and performance, reduces costs and workplace stress and improves talent acquisition from a more diverse talent pool. It also explains how a proactive flexible working strategy can have sustainability benefits and reduce a company’s carbon footprint. Including case studies from organizations such as Zurich Insurance, and supported by rigorous analysis of flexible working data, this is essential reading for all HR professionals.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Human Resources, Learning & Development

What is flexible working and why does it matter? Forms of flexible working Research on flexible working what the data tells us The benefits of flexible working Flexible working and inclusion Flexible working and wellbeing Flexible working and sustainability Flexible working and talent The business case for flexible working Barriers to flexible working and how to overcome them Challenging the flexible working myths Case Studies - Companies who are seeing the benefits of flexible working Communication, promotion and training Policy and processes

Outstanding People Practice How HR can Transform Business Performance

This book

guidance on how to critically assess current HR activities and identify where changes and « Provides innovations can be made to drive greater performance case studies from organizations such as Hootsuite, Spotify, Survey Monkey, Siemens, « Includes Ticketmaster, Glassdoor and Mattel. « Shows how to use people analytics to build an evidence-based HR strategy how to build an inclusive organization and create a culture of belonging to become a place « Explains where people want to work

Description Outstanding People Practice is the book that every HR professional needs to enable all aspects of the people function to perform to their full potential and drive business performance. Instead of focusing on how small improvements to existing activities can create marginal gains, this book shows HR practitioners how to critically assess their current processes and activities and identify what areas they need to think differently about in order to have a dramatic impact on business results. It covers how to navigate the crowded world of HR technology, why people analytics should be the foundation of HR strategy, how to build an inclusive organization and a culture of belonging as well why employer branding matters for HR and how to get it right.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789667042 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667059 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667066 £60 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Lars Schmidt is the Founder of Amplify, an HR executive search and consulting firm that helps companies build progressive people teams and navigate the future of work. He is an advisor at People Tech Partners and is the Founder and Host of the 21st Century HR podcast. He is also the co-founder of HR Open Source, a global initiative to accelerate innovation and education in HR. He was named a Top 100 Influencer by HR Examiner and included in The Huffington Post’s Top 100 Most Social HR Experts on Twitter. He is based in Virginia, USA.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Outstanding People Practice also covers how HR can rethink recruitment, talent management, performance and reward to save time, reduce costs and achieve greater business gains. Written by a leading innovator in the HR industry and supported by case studies from organizations including Hootsuite, Spotify, npr, Ticketmaster, Siemens and Mattel, this is essential reading for all HR professionals wanting to create an exceptional people management function and make sure that they’re not underestimated by the business.

Table of Contents 1 The need for change 2 How to identify what needs to change 3 The skills you need as a modern HR professional 4 People analytics 5 Recruitment 6 Talent attraction and retention 7 Performance 8 Reward 9 Culture 10 Inclusion 11 Agility 12 Employer brand

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures How to Develop Companies where Employees Thrive

This book

how to create a structure that leverages peoples’ strengths allowing them to grow and « Shows develop assessments to define your organization’s core values and build a company culture around « Includes them « Explainshow to implement a strategic workforce plan that leverages the changing talent landscape how to deconstruct existing company cultures that are having negative business effects and « Shows rebuild them for success how to identify what competencies will be needed and how to hire for current and future « Shows success

Description Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures is a practical guide for HR and OD professionals which explains how to proactively design, build and foster a culture that creates employee and business success. For a company to outperform the competition and achieve sustainable business growth, it needs a high performing, engaged and committed workforce with the skills the business needs both now and in the future. Attracting, motivating and retaining top talent can’t be done simply by attaching individual benefits to specific job roles. To be effective, companies need to build an exceptional company culture where people want to work and that allows them to develop and perform to their full potential.

New Edition: 1 Title

Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789667219 £22.99 Ebook: 9781789667226 £22.99 Hardback: 9781789667233 £70 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Jamie Jacobs is the co-founder of High Performanceology. For over 20 years she has built high-performing organizations and teams across the technology, financial services and hospitality industries as a HR and culture executive. She is President of the National Human Resources Association and a Professor at University of Southern California. Hema Crockett is an award-winning HR professional and the co-founder of High Performanceology. Prior to this she led the Total Rewards programme for LPL Financial and an HR Executive for Renovate America. She has also worked with Biotechnology companies and the US State Department.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures provides guidance on all elements of building a top performing culture including how to identify and define core company values and embed them throughout policies, processes and behaviours as well as how to create an organizational structure that leverages employees’ strengths for optimum performance. It also covers how to assess what roles the business needs, how to recruit for future success and make the most of non-traditional hires as well as covering employee engagement, motivation, reward, diversity and Learning and Development (L&D). With practical examples, tips and advice throughout , this is crucial reading for anyone needing to build a culture that attracts the very best talent and achieve sustainable business growth.

Table of Contents 1

What is Organizational Culture? 2 Why Top Performing Cultures don’t happen by Accident 3 Organizational Structure 4 Identifying and Defining Core Values 5 Skills for Now and the Future 6 Attracting and Retaining the Talent You Need 7 Engagement and Motivation 8 Reward 9 Diversity and Inclusion

Introduction to HR Technologies Understand How to Use Technology to Improve Performance and Processes

This book

clear, accessible and jargon-free language to explain the technologies available to HR « Uses professionals how technology can improve performance in each of the core areas of HR activity « Explains including recruitment, reward and L&D a brand-agnostic approach to show how to assess the available technologies and identify « Uses which are worth investing in discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) « Includes and explores what impact these will have on HR examples of how technology can improve efficiency by streamlining and speeding up « Provides processes to save both time and money

Description Technology can have huge benefits for the HR function. Whether it’s saving time by streamlining processes, boosting engagement by enabling analysis of people data or improving employee development by allowing staff to access the content they need on different platforms, wherever and whenever they need it; the opportunities are vast. However, with more apps, software and platforms than ever before, the volume and variety of available technologies can be overwhelming. This makes it extremely difficult for HR professionals to know where to start when assessing what technologies are out there and which are worth investing in. Introduction to HR Technologies addresses these issues in clear, accessible and jargon-free language and is an indispensable guide for HR professionals needing to get to grips technologies and understand how to use them to add tangible business value. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789665277 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665284 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665291 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Stacey Harris is Vice President of Research and Analytics at Sierra-Cedar in North Carolina. Prior to this, she was the VP of Research and Advisory Services at the Brandon Hall Group and the Director of Strategic HR at Bersin and Associates. Since 2017, Stacey Harris has been the Director of Education for the International Association for Human Resource Information Management.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Covering all the core areas of HR including recruitment, performance management, learning and development (L&D) and reward, Introduction to HR Technologies allows practitioners to identify areas where technologies can be used to drive performance and what to look for when assessing technological solutions. There is also discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) and what they mean for HR. This book is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to use technology confidently to increase performance, improve processes and add value to both employees and the business as a whole.

Table of Contents 1 What are HR technologies? 2 Different types of HR technologies 3 How can technology help? 4 What to look for 5 Recruitment 6 Learning and Development (L&D) 7 Performance management 8 Reward management 9 AI, machine learning and the Internet of Things

Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment

This book

coverage of all the latest developments impacting work and employment including « Provides flexibility, sustainability, agility and ethics reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and « Includes explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply both the theory and practice of the topic so that students can hit the ground running in their « Covers future careers in the HR industry « Online resources: Lecturer slides, multiple choice questions and activity feedback

Description Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment is the definitive textbook for the CIPD Advanced Level 7 module of the same name. It covers the theory and practice of the developments affecting the world of work and the HR industry including technology and globalisation through to labour changes, policy and regulation. Most importantly, this brand new textbook covers the key elements that students on HR masters courses need to implement and manage in their future careers including flexible working, agility, sustainability, wellbeing, diversity and ethics in the people profession.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781398600201 £44.99 Ebook: 9781398600218 £44.99 Hardback: 9781398600225 £140 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 246x189 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS. Graham Perkins is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management / Director of Education. University of Exeter Business School. Prior to a career in academic he held a number of HR and Learning and Development roles in both publica and private sector firms.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Including case studies to help students see how the theory applies in practice, reflective practice activities to help them think critically about the content as well as ‘explore further’ boxes to encourage wider reading. Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment is ideal reading for all postgraduate students on both CIPD and non-CIPD accredited courses. Online supporting resources include an lecture slides, multiple choice questions and activity feedback.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Globalisation 3 Technology – past 4 Technology – present 5 Economy 6 Labour markets 7 Population 8 Society 9 Public policy 10 Regulation 11 Change 12 Agility & resilience 13 Flexibility 14 Innovation and creativity 15 Productivity and competition 16 Ethics and values 17 Sustainability 18 Equality, diversity and inclusion 19 Wellbeing 20 Working internationally

Transformational HR How Human Resources Can Create Value and Impact Business Strategy

This book

a blueprint for HR professionals to become the transformational powerhouse they have « Provides the potential to be and create lasting success for their organizations the latest developments in HR, including futurology and agile ways of working, for « Explores impacting business strategy and building a fair, progressive working environment examples from HR pioneers alongside case studies from a range of global organizations « Includes who are transforming their workplaces including Warburtons, AND Digital and Barry Wehlmiller to this edition: new chapter and critical review of The Four Zones model, updated content « New on transformational organizations and business models to incorporate the latest developments and ways of working

Description HR professionals are uniquely placed to prepare an organization for lasting success in an increasingly competitive world. But, how can they understand and use the latest developments to make an impact on business strategy as well as create a fair, inclusive and progressive working environment? This fully revised edition of Transformational HR is the practical guide professionals need to unlock HR’s potential as a powerhouse for organizational success.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/07/2021 Paperback: 9781398600744 £19.99 Ebook: 9781398600768 £19.99 Hardback: 9781398600751 £60 Previous edition: 9780749481322 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Perry Timms is a coach, consultant, international conference speaker and the founder of People and Transformational HR Ltd. He is also the social media and HR adviser to the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Named by HR Magazine as one of the most influential HR thinkers of 2019, he is a visiting fellow at Sheffield Hallam University Business School, a fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) and the world’s first WorldBlu-certified Freedom at Work coach.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This book puts transformational HR in context, exploring what has and hasn’t worked until now, and sets out a vision of what HR can be. Alongside critical discussion of the latest developments and business models, including agile and humanist ways of working, Transformational HR provides tools and advice for HR professionals aspiring to become more responsive, forward-thinking and impact-led. This updated edition features brand new case studies from companies who have adopted these models and transformed their workplaces, including Warburtons, AND Digital, Danfoss and Barry Wehmiller. It is a blueprint for enabling the HR function to be a driving force for organizational success and create more fulfilling experiences for people.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Romanian

Table of Contents 1 Context 1 Our ever-changing World – Where is the Hope and Hype? 2 Today’s Work – How Have We got to This? 3 The Story of the Human Resource Profession – A Problem Child of the PostIndustrial Era? 4 What’s HR ever done for Us? 2 Models 5 What is Transformational HR? 6 Transformational HR – The Models 7 The One Model to Rule them All? 3 Narratives 8 Transformational Tales from HR Game Changers 9 Transformational Organizations – Stories of the Future 4 Future 10 Transformational HR – Putting it all Together 11 Transformational HR – Strategic-Level Significant Shifts 12 Transformational HR – A Model at Play

Systemic Coaching and Constellations The Principles, Practices and Application for Individuals, Teams and Groups

This book

how to draw out and overcome systemic and relational issues in organizations to improve « Shows coaching approaches and performance a wide range of practical exercises which coaches can use for their own development and « Contains with clients, both in one-to-one and group settings case studies from a joint ICF/EMCC constellation workshop and examples from coaches « Includes around the world, including Australia, Mexico, France, Spain, the US and the Netherlands « Includes answers to the most frequently asked questions in workshops and training sessions to this edition: a chapter on systemic supervision, material on team coaching, systemic « New questions and resourcing constellations as well as fresh case studies and updates to wider research and thinking

Description Systemic Coaching and Constellations offers a refreshingly uncomplicated path into a potentially complex subject, demonstrating how to understand and manage intricate relationship systems as part of a powerful coaching agenda. It provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles that sustain systems, how to map and explore them through constellations, as well as a step-by-step guide to integrating these principles and practices into coaching. Featuring a variety of case studies from around the world to illustrate different facilitation styles and approaches, it also contains practical exercises which can be used in a variety of contexts, including one-to-one coaching, group coaching, leadership development coaching and managing conflict in teams.

Edition: 3 Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789662849 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789662856 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789662863 £90 Previous edition: 9780749475499 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information John Whittington is an individual and team coach with a broad portfolio of clients that includes entrepreneurs, executive leaders and public figures. He facilitates regular systemic workshop interventions in corporate environments and leads a small teaching team who share the systemic coaching and constellations approach with other professional coaches internationally. He is also a guest tutor at Henley Business School for students of the Msc in Coaching and Behavioural change in the UK and South Africa.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This updated third edition of Systemic Coaching and Constellations contains a new chapter on systemic supervision, new material on team coaching, systemic questions and resourcing constellations as well as new and refreshed case studies and updates to wider research and thinking. Whether used in an initial selection meeting or to underpin all coaching conversations and interventions, it remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits looking to transform their practice, as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Polish

Table of Contents 1 Principles 1 The universal language of systems 2 Back to the start – Origins and definitions 3 Belonging – Conscience, guilt and innocence 4 The time is now 5 Inside out 2 Practices 7 An invitation – An experiential exercise 8 Map making 9 Living maps 10 Answers to frequently asked questions 3 Application 11 From tabletop to workshop – Principles and practices in action 12 Sticky moments 13 Supervision from a systemic perspective 14 Extending your practice – Further practices and applications 15 Outside in 16 The F word – Familiar patterns

Performance Coaching A Complete Guide to Best Practice Coaching and Training

This book

a complete resource for creating a coaching culture in organizations and developing the « Provides skills needed to coach effectively the key techniques and models in the field, from 360-degree feedback to neuro-linguistic « Explores programming (NLP), which forms a helpful reference guide for those at all stages of their coaching careers Contains case studies from organizations including Virgin, Johnson & Johnson and IKEA showing how effective coaching approaches have been applied in practice New to this edition: chapters on distance coach training and peer leadership in the workplace, material on neuroscience in coaching, coaching in education, managing difficult conversations and stakeholder mapping and updated wider research with new thinking and models

« «

Description Performance Coaching is a complete resource for improving organizational and employee performance through coaching. Full of tips, tools and checklists, it covers all the fundamental elements of the coaching process, from developing the skills needed to coach effectively, to coaching in leadership, cross-cultural coaching and measuring return on investment. It also explores the key techniques and models in the field, from 360-degree feedback to neuro-linguistic programming (NLP), to allow readers to identify which approach is most suited to specific situations. Featuring case studies from organizations including Virgin, Johnson & Johnson and IKEA showing how effective coaching approaches have been applied in practice, this book is for coaches of all levels of experience, as well as HR managers and leaders looking to embed a coaching culture in their organizations.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789664461 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789664478 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789664492 £90 Previous edition: 9780749470319 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information Carol Wilson is an international speaker, writer and broadcaster and the founder and CEO of Culture at Work and Performance Coach Training. She delivers coaching and leadership programmes throughout the world for a range of organizations including IKEA, UK National Health Service (NHS) and NCR. She worked at board level with Sir Richard Branson at Virgin, where she experienced the value of a coaching culture at first hand. She is an Honorary Life Fellow and Global Advisory Panellist to the Association for Coaching.

This revised third edition of Performance Coaching has been updated to include the latest insights and developments and contains new chapters on distance coach training and peer leadership in the workplace and new material on neuroscience in coaching, coaching in education, managing difficult conversations and stakeholder mapping.

Rights Sold 2nd Edition: Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18

Human Resources, Learning & Development

The fundamentals of performance coaching What is coaching? The differences between coaching, therapy, counselling, mentoring and consultancy The directive-non-directive continuum Self-limiting beliefs Coaching and neuroscience Creating a coaching culture in organizations The meaning of a coaching culture Ten steps to creating a coaching culture Coaching in the workplace Coach training in the workplace Coaching in leadership Cross-cultural coaching Distance coach training Coaching in schools Coaching for Crisis at Christmas Corporate social responsibility and shared value: bringing business and society back together Bullying in the workplace Resilience in leadership Coaching supervision: a workplace perspective

19 ROI: Measuring the return on investment in coaching 3 Skills for coaches and managers 20 Listening 21 Reflecting, summarizing and clarifying 22 Questioning 23 Permission protocol 24 The GROW coaching model 25 The EXACT model: a coaching approach to goal setting 26 Coaching feedback 27 The structure of coaching 28 Setting and reviewing actions 4 Tools of the trade: continuing professional development 29 David Grove’s Clean Language 30 David Grove’s Emergent Knowledge 31 Transpersonal coaching 32 An introduction to neurolinguistic programming 33 Systemic Coaching 34 Transactional analysis and the OK Corral 35 360-degree feedback 36 The Reuven Bar-On Emotional Quotient inventory (BarOn EQ-i) 37 Thomas-Kilmann Conflict Mode Instrument

38 Marshall Rosenberg’s ‘NonViolent Communication’ 39 Peer leadership 40 Situational Leadership 41 Kouzes and Posner: The Leadership Challenge 42 Cultural Transformation Tools 43 The Inner Game 44 Nancy Kline’s Thinking Environment 45 Appreciative Inquiry 46 Mindfulness 47 Elizabeth Kubler Ross’s Change Curve six stage model 48 Bruce Tuckman’s ‘forming, storming, norming and performing’ team development model 49 The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI®) 50 The Enneagram 51 Kolb’s learning styles 52 DISC 53 Johari Window 54 More team role models

Excellence in Coaching Theory, Tools and Techniques to Achieve Outstanding Coaching Performance

This book

a complete resource for best practice coaching from industry experts including Sir John « Provides Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck all the fundamental areas of coaching, from making the personal and business cases for « Covers coaching, to using goal setting, questions and reflection and coaching evaluation and accreditation a range of coaching models and techniques in both theory and practice, to allow readers to « Explores tailor their approach to specific situations to this edition: new chapters including neuroscience coaching, systemic coaching, existential « New coaching, coaching contracts, reflection practice in coaching alongside updates to incorporate new research and models published since the last edition

Description How can you achieve coaching excellence? Use the latest research and insights from some of the biggest industry names in this fully revised fourth edition, which provides a diverse range of theory, tools and models for students and practicing coaches alike. Excellence in Coaching is a comprehensive guide presenting the latest cutting-edge thinking in the field of workplace coaching. Published with the Association for Coaching, this book covers all key components of the coaching process, and examines a diverse range of coaching models including behavioural and transpersonal coaching, enabling coaches and trainers to adapt their approach and excel in their professional practice.

Edition: 4 Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789665475 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665482 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665499 £90 Previous edition: 9780749474454 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Coaching

Author Information Jonathan Passmore is the Director of The Henley Centre for Coaching at Henley Business School, University of Reading. He works with leaders from business, politics and the public sector to help them improve individual, team and organizational performance through coaching. He is also an award-winning researcher, a regular international conference speaker, and the author and editor of a number of publications and books, including Leadership Coaching and Mastery in Coaching, also published by Kogan Page.

With updates to incorporate the latest thinking and insights, this revised fourth edition of Excellence in Coaching also contains a wealth of fresh material, including new chapters on establishing a coaching business, neuroscience coaching, psychodynamic coaching and understanding the coaching relationship. Featuring tips, checklists and tools, and a collection of best-practice material from some of the biggest names in the profession including Sir John Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck. This remains essential reading for practising coaches as well as for students.

Rights Sold 3rd Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 3 7 8 9 10 4 11 12 13

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Understanding coaching and what it can do for you Coaching – Defined and explored [Jonathan Passmore] Coaching – The personal case [Rebecca Jones] Coaching – The business case [Andromachi Athanasopoulou] Understanding yourself and your clients Understanding yourself as a coach [Alison Hardingham] Understanding your clients [Caroline Rook] Understanding the coaching relationship [Erik De Haan] Coaching skills Goal setting in coaching [Gordon Spence & Michael Cavanagh] Questions in coaching [David Clutterbuck] Listening in coaching [Stephen Burt] Using summaries, reflections and affirmations [Tim Anstiss] Coaching approaches Behavioural coaching [Graham Alexander] Person centred coaching [Stephen Joseph] Solution focused coaching [Anthony M Grant]

30 Establishing your coaching 14 Cognitive behavioural business [Michael Beale] coaching [Michael Neenan] 15 Transpersonal coaching [John Whitmore & Hetty Einzig] 16 Psychodynamic coaching [Catherine Sadler] 17 Existential coaching [Michael Moral] 18 Systemic coaching [Natalie Lancer] 19 Integrative coaching [ Jonathan Passmore] 20 Somatic coaching [Aboodi Shabi] 21 Neuroscience coaching [Patricia Riddle] 22 Narrative coaching [David Drake] 23 Team coaching [Kate Lanz] 5 Coaching issues 24 Coaching ethics [Eve Turner] 25 Coaching contracts [Dave Tees] 26 Coaching evaluation [Alison Carter & David B Peterson] 27 Coach accreditation [Alison Whybrow & Dianne Brennan] 6 Beyond coaching 28 Supervision in coaching [Peter Hawkins] 29 Reflection practice in coaching [Ann James]

50 Top Tools for Coaching A Complete Toolkit for Developing and Empowering People

This book

over 50 easy-to-use tools and techniques to use throughout the coaching process, « Provides alongside supporting templates and tips to ensure their success tools to enhance leadership styles, manage periods of change, address conflict and to « Includes increase personal impact and influence to this edition: tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own « New coaching practice resources: additional tools, interactive templates, summary documents and videos of the « Online tools in action demonstrated by the authors

Description Full of exercises, models, checklists and templates, this book covers how to assess the needs of clients, select the right tool for the circumstance and deliver effective coaching with confidence. A complete resource for both in-house and external coaches, 50 Top Tools for Coaching presents the techniques required for every coaching situation. It focuses on every stage of the coaching process, from setting up and managing the coaching relationship, understanding and resolving conflict, developing client confidence and performance to enhancing leadership styles and coaching during periods of change. Supporting hints and tips are found throughout to maximise the effectiveness and impact of the tools.

Edition: 5 Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781789666557 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666564 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666571 £90 Previous edition: 9780749482329 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information Gillian Jones is Managing Director and founder of Emerge, a development consultancy that specializes in leadership, organizational development and executive coaching. Based in the UK, she has worked with clients including Walt Disney, BAE Systems, Total and Airbus to implement coaching and change initiatives and is a regular international conference speaker. Ro Gorell is Director at Change Optimised, which specializes in coaching and mentoring and change management solutions. She has extensive experience in both group and individual coaching. Based in Australia, she is the author of Group Coaching and with Gillian Jones the co-author of How to Create a Coaching Culture, also published by Kogan Page.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This fully revised fifth edition of 50 Top Tools for Coaching includes new tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own coaching practice. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits, as well as managers and leaders looking to improve performance in their organizations through coaching. Online supporting resources include additional tools, interactive templates and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors.

Rights Sold 3rd Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Korean 4th Edition: Polish

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Setting up the coaching relationship Foundation tools Goal setting Problem resolution Values and beliefs Confidence strategies Working effectively with others Personal impact and influence Enhancing leadership style Planning for the future Developing women Coaching during change A manager’s guide to coaching for performance Building a Coaching practice

Leadership Team Coaching Developing Collective Transformational Leadership

This book

a complete resource for coaching leadership teams and other types of teams, including « Provides international teams, virtual teams, executive and non-executive boards and project and account teams

the key techniques and tools to be used at each stage of the coaching process, as well as « Explores guidance on common challenges and pitfalls to avoid case studies from organizations including Deloitte and General Electric (GE) to illustrate « Includes how these approaches have been applied in practice to this edition: new material on agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, « New using ‘nudges’ and ‘time-outs’, and training team leaders to coach their own team as well as new and refreshed case studies and updates to wider research and thinking

Description Organizations are most effective when the teams responsible for their success work together collectively and in a dynamic relationship with the rest of the company. Leadership Team Coaching provides a comprehensive roadmap for those who have the responsibility of developing leadership teams. It explains all the key elements of team coaching and is filled with practical tools and techniques for getting the best performance from international teams, virtual teams, executive and non-executive boards and project and account teams in all types of organizations. Featuring case studies and insights from organizations including Deloitte, and General Electric (GE), it also contains guidance on choosing the best team coach, creating a team-based culture and common challenges and pitfalls to avoid.

Edition: 4 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781789667455 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789667462 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789667479 £90 Previous edition: 9780749478490 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School and a visiting professor at the University of Bath and Oxford Brookes University. The President of the Association of Professional Executive Coaching and Supervision (APECS) and the founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates, he has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. A regular keynote speaker at international conferences, he is also the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, also published by Kogan Page.

This fully updated fourth edition of Leadership Team Coaching contains new material on agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, using ‘nudges’ and ‘time-outs’, and training team leaders to coach their own team as well as new and refreshed case studies and updates to wider research and thinking. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches and senior leaders as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Japanese 2nd Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 3 7 8 4

9 10 5

Human Resources, Learning & Development

High-performing teams Why the world needs more high-performing leadership teams The high-performing team and the transformational leadership team The five disciplines of successful team practice Team coaching What is team coaching? The team coaching process and journey Coaching the five disciplines – Systemic team coaching Coaching different types of teams Many types of teams Coaching the board The next frontier for systemic team coaching – Beyond the high-performing team Disrupting and renewing team coaching New dimensions for ecosystemic team coaching Creating shared leadership, selecting, developing and coaching your own team – Advice to chief executives and other team leaders

11 Selecting the players for a high-performing team 12 Key steps for CEOs in creating a high-performing team with shared leadership 13 How to find, select and work with a good team coach 14 Developing as a team coach 15 Supervising team coaching 16 Team coaching methods, tools and techniques 17 Conclusion

Managing and Leading People through Organizational Change The Theory and Practice of Sustaining Change through People

This book

students and practitioners with the knowledge and practical skills to manage people through « Equips challenging times of change and achieve sustainable operational performance the author’s own evidence-based research to provide new models including a ‘Change « Uses Readiness Assessment Template’ global case studies to help apply the theory to practice, including Kodak, Nissan, Yahoo, « Includes Aegon Asset Management and BankCo to this edition: New chapters on implementing change and individual wellbeing, and new « New content on managing the impact of technological advances « Online resources: lecturer’s slides and discussion points for each chapter

Description Change in organizations is all about people: it is people who plan, prepare for and implement change, and who are affected by it in the daily course of their work. Yet there is a tendency to focus on quantifiable and often more easily solved technical aspects of implementing organizational change programmes, and ignore the complex ways that these will impact individuals. Providing an evidence-based analysis of change and in organizations, Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change is written for practitioners responsible for change programmes and postgraduate students of organizational change.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781789667974 £34.99 Ebook: 9781789667981 £34.99 Hardback: 9781789667998 £160 Previous edition: 9780749474195 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management

Author Information Dr Julie Hodges is an academic, author and consultant. She is currently Associate Dean for MBA Programmes at Durham University Business School and a lecturer and researcher into change in organizations. Before entering the academic world, she worked as a management consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including the British Council, Vertex, PwC and RBS. She is a founding Director of The Leading Well - a social enterprise for developing leaders in the public and third sectors.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This updated edition demonstrates the importance of understanding the effects of change on individuals and engaging them collaboratively through the transformation journey. Featuring new material on individual wellbeing and the impact of technological advances on the workplace, this book sets out frameworks, practical approaches and recommendations for communicating with and leading individuals, teams and organizations through change. Full of exercises, interviews and case studies from across the globe, this book is an essential resource for leaders and students enabling them to achieve sustainable benefits of change at work.

Table of Contents 1 UNDERSTANDING ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE 1 The context and nature of change 2 INDIVIDUAL RESPONSES TO CHANGE 2 The impact of organizational change on emotions 3 Individual wellbeing 4 Individual sense-making processes 3 THE ROLES OF LEADERS AND MANAGERS 5 Leading people through change 6 Fostering commitment and ownership 7 Engaging people through dialogue 8 Understanding and carrying out culture change 4 BUILDING CAPABILITIES 9 Building capabilities for change 10 Implementing change 5 ETHICS, SUSTAINABILITY AND CHANGE 11 Sustaining change

The Heart of Transformation Build the Human Capabilities that Change Organizations for Good

This book

« Outlines the six capabilities that organizations need to develop to achieve real transformation « Provides clear, actionable and simple tools that any organization can use to drive change efforts « Shows leaders how to embed new habits in the daily life of their organization a new standard for organizational excellence embedded in human-not technological-« Establishes capabilities Description Technology doesn’t transform organizations - people do. In an era of technological and constant change, companies are bombarded with urgent advice to become more agile, lean, and digital. Billions are spent on digital transformation efforts with the promise that these efforts will increase competitive advantage. Yet even when only 30% of these efforts succeed, this e-hard-won competitive advantage only lasts until the next disruption before the cycle repeats, causing transformation fatigue. The Heart of Transformation breaks this cycle by suggesting that the pace and complexity of change is too great and too complex to be addressed by a single change effort or transformation. The answer lies in the organization’s greatest asset-its people. In the face of complexity, it is the organization’s people and their ability to adapt and learn that are the true engine of organizational change.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/07/2021 Paperback: 9781398600089 £29.99 Ebook: 9781398600096 £29.99 Hardback: 9781398600102 £90 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Change Management

Author Information Michael Leckie is the former Chief Learning Officer for the Digital Industrial Transformation at General Electric (GE) and is currently founding partner of Silverback Partners, LLC, an organizational consultancy based in Connecticut. He also held the position of Managing Vice President in Gartner’s Executive Programs business, managing teams that provided executive coaching, strategic guidance, and researchbased advisory services to Gartner’s C-suite clients. He speaks, coaches and advises all over the world and across most industriespublic, private, and non-profit.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

The Heart of Transformation outlines the six human capabilities-- adapting, learning, exploring, changing, innovating, and path finding--that create competitive advantage for organizations organically, quickly and from the bottom up. It also offers a new standard for organizational excellence, one that is dependent on the organization’s ability to be deeply human. Instead of offering another “one size fits all” solution, The Heart of Transformation reveals that by leveraging the most human of capabilities, organizations can change better, faster and achieve excellence.

Table of Contents Foreword 1 Introduction 2 Why Our Digital World Demands a Humanity Fix 3 Whistle While You Work--Life Doesn’t Happen in Theory 4 Exploration over Execution 5 Learning over Knowing 6 Changing over Protecting 7 Humanizing over Organizing 8 Innovating over Replicating 9 Pathfinding over Path Following 10 Practice What You Preach--The Small Transgressions of Self 10 Making a Habit of Habits

High-Tech HighTouch Recruiting How to Attract and Retain the Best Talent By Improving the Candidate Experience

This book

best practices for every stage of the recruiting process, from outlining requirements in the « Outlines job description to securing candidate referrals « Explains how to recruit passive talent: the talent that isn’t looking for a new role but is the best fit resources: sample offer letters, recruiting scripts, job requisitions, interview scorecard, a « Online listing of characteristics of best hires and guidelines for a 9-step telephone interview process

Description Despite global economic conditions, companies are always looking to attract and retain the best talent. Unfortunately, almost 30% of US job seekers leave a new job within the first 30 days. Why? Many new recruiters rely too heavily on high-tech tools to attract candidates and may not have learned the fundamental relationship-building skills that help recruiters ensure that clients and candidates are a good match. High-Tech High-Touch Recruiting provides recruiters with an end-to-end process for recruiting the highest caliber talent who, after they are hired, will become engaged employees. While emphasizing the overall importance of building “high-touch” relationship-building skills, the book outlines how these can be blended successfully with “high-tech” tools such as AI-powered software applications to identify a large pool of qualified job candidates. Once you’ve identified candidates, the author cautions against the sole use of text and email communication and suggests that recruiters conduct a general interview in order to better ascertain whether a candidate is the best fit for the role.

New

High-Tech High-Touch Recruiting comes with online resources including sample offer letters, recruiting scripts, job requisitions, interview scorecard, a listing of characteristics of best hires and guidelines for a 9-step telephone interview process.

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789665154 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789665161 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789665178 £60 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Author Information Barbara Bruno has trained over 25,000 recruiters in 13 countries and is based in Crown Point, IN. She consults to some of the largest recruiting companies in the world, including Management Recruiters International, Robert Half, Pride Staff, Express Employment Professionals, Fortune Personnel and DAV in South Africa. Her company, Good As Gold Training and HR Search, offers in-person and virtual training services and tools. She has received the highest national award from the Staffing and Recruiting Profession, The Harold B. Nelson Award, and was inducted into the National Association of Personnel Services Hall of Fame.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Table of Contents Introduction 1 Start with updating the hiring process 2 Identify the best and communicate differently 3 Interview to hire the best talent 4 Clarify timing with hiring authorities and candidates 5 Extend offers that will be accepted 6 Employ techniques to eliminate surprises 7 Nurture candidates pre- and post-hire and obtain referrals 8 A Balanced Approach to Recruiting 9 Conclusion

Agile Workforce Planning How to Align People with Organizational Strategy for Improved Performance

This book

how to assess what skills are needed in the workforce and whether to buy, borrow or build « Explains these capabilities guidance on how to analyze the gap between the supply and demand for talent in an « Provides organization and how best to close this gap how to collect the relevant data needed to calculate current and predicted organizational « Shows churn « Explains how to carry out both quantitative and qualitative demand modelling « Includes case studies from organizations such as Thames Water, Lloyds Bank, John Lewis and HSBC

Description Agile Workforce Planning is a practical guide for HR and organization development practitioners needing to align their staff, skills and resources with evolving company goals. As business priorities change and focus shifts to address arising issues, HR professionals need to be able to reorganise talent swiftly and plan for future needs to enable the business to succeed. It covers how to forecast organizational demand for people, resources and skills, analyze the gap between supply and demand and most importantly, how to fill this gap. This book explains how to use agile workforce planning to achieve this. It also covers how to identify the skills needed in the workforce, where these skills are already available and when they’re missing, how to decide whether to buy, borrow or build them.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666052 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666069 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666076 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Author Information Adam Gibson is a global leader in workforce planning and currently Group Director of Strategic Workforce Planning at Capita. Prior to this he was the Strategic Workforce Planning Leader at the Metropolitan Police and the Head of Resource Management at PwC UK. He is also the Founder of Agile Workforce planning Ltd and leads the Strategic Workforce Planning Faculty at the CIPD (Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development).

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Agile Workforce Planning explains how to collect data to calculate and predict staff churn as well as how to use qualitative and quantitative demand modelling to forecast for future needs and provides strategies to address these including lateral internal recruitment. There is also expert guidance on horizon scanning, scenario planning and how to secure stakeholder buy in and engagement for an agile workforce plan. Supported by case studies from companies including Thames Water, HSBC and John Lewis, this is essential reading for HR and OD professionals needing to continuously align the talent and capabilities in their workforce with the overall business strategy

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to Workforce Planning 1 What is Workforce Planning 2 The value of Workforce Planning 3 Limitations of traditional SWP 4 Four values of agile 2 Baselining 5 Understanding the workforce 6 Gaining buy in 7 The kick off 3 Supply 8 Calculating organizational churn 9 Calculating workforce performance 10 Understanding workforce evolution 4 Demand 11 What is demand? 12 Demand modelling quantitative methods 13 Demand modelling qualitative methods 5 Gap analysis 6 Action planning 14 Collaborating with key partners 15 Optimizing demand 16 Managing supply 7 Deliver 17 Implementing the plan 18 Managing stakeholders

19 Managing a living plan

Digital Talent Find, Recruit and Retain the People your Business needs in a world of Digital Transformation

This book

how to recruit, retain and develop the people with the digital skills organizations need to « Explains succeed the myth that only millennials have digital skills and explains how digital talent is linked to « Dispels mindset, not date of birth « Provides guidance on how the increase in digital skills impacts hiring criteria and job titles « Includes advice on how to help employees avoid digital distraction and information overload

Description The skills employees need to ensure a company succeeds in a disrupted and technologyenabled world of work are changing. Digital skills, knowledge and abilities are now crucial, so HR professionals’ ability to attract, recruit and retain people with these skills is the difference between business success and failure. Digital Talent equips HR with the tools they need to assess what these critical skills are, how to attract the people who have them, keep these people engaged, productive and performing to the best of their abilities. It also provides crucial guidance on how to continuously develop these employees to ensure that the organization has the skills it needs both for today and the future.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9780749490959 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749491659 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789660197 £60 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Author Information Matt Alder is a strategic consultant based in the UK. He focuses on recruitment marketing, employer branding and HR Technology. Over the last 17 years he has built a reputation as a global thought leader, working with employers to optimize their digital strategies. Mervyn Dinnen is a talent analyst, advising recruitment and HR businesses on the emerging trends impacting hiring, retention and engagement. Based in the UK, he is a writer, international speaker and an awardwinning recruitment blogger. Prior to this he spent 20 years as a recruitment and HR practitioner.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Digital Talent provides guidance on how to help staff avoid digital addiction and stop employees becoming overwhelmed by technology. This book also dispels the myth that digital proficiency is the sole domain of the millennial workforce. With advice on how to create new processes that are fit for purpose in the age of digital transformation, build inclusion when digital culture is becoming more prominent and effectively use digital abilities to maximise productivity while maintaining employee wellbeing, this is the book on talent that all HR professionals need to make sure that their people, and the business as a whole, stay ahead of the competition..

Table of Contents 1 What does digital mean? 2 A mindset, not a date of birth 3 Identifying the skills the business needs 4 Finding and developing the right people 5 Retention 6 Engagement and wellbeing 7 Digital diversity and inclusion 8 New processes and culture 9 Digital addiction and overwhelm 10 Skills for the future

Neurodiversity at Work Drive Innovation, Performance and Productivity with a Neurodiverse Workforce

This book

« Explains what neurodiversity is and how it creates performance, productivity and financial benefits guidance on how to optimize recruitment and talent management processes to attract, « Provides acquire and retain neurodiverse employees case studies and interviews from IBM, LinkedIn, UK Cabinet Office, Autotrader and « Includes Heathrow Airport « Covers how to adapt policies and workplaces to ensure that they work for all employees Description An organization’s employees are its biggest competitive advantage. Performance gains can be achieved through cost saving, process improvement or technology adoption, but the biggest difference is made by people. This means that recruiting, engaging and retaining the very best talent has never been more important. Crucially, these employees should be a diverse group of people with different approaches, skills and strengths in problem solving and driving innovation. As well as focusing on gender, race, age and class, it is critical that businesses also develop a neurodiverse workforce if they are committed to outperforming the competition and achieving sustainable business growth. Neurodiversity at Work is a practical guide that explains what neurodiversity is, why it’s important and what the benefits are. It covers how to attract, recruit and engage neurodiverse talent and provides guidance on how to adapt HR policies, processes and workplaces to ensure that all employees, including the 1 in 10 employees in the UK who are neurodiverse, can reach their full potential.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781398600249 £29.99 Ebook: 9781398600256 £29.99 Hardback: 9781398600263 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment

Author Information Professor Amanda Kirby is the Founder and CEO of Do-IT Solutions and a registered GP. Based in the UK, she is an advisor to the Department of Work and Pensions on Neurodiversity as well as a lecturer at the University of South Wales. Theo Smith is the Recruitment Manager at NICE (The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence). Based in the UK, he was selected to be part of the Resourcing Leaders 100 (RL100), Europe’s leading network of resourcing leaders. Prior to this he was the Resourcing Manager at TMP Worldwide.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Neurodiversity at Work is packed full of case studies from leading organizations who are already seeing the productivity, performance and financial benefits of neurodiversity in the workplace including Microsoft, Ford and EY. Also featured are interviews with people who have successfully adapted their HR processes for neurodiversity, including the Head of Talent Acquisition at IBM and the Head of People and Culture at Autotrader. Including tips, advice, examples and ‘how to’ actions in every chapter, this is essential reading for every HR professional.

Table of Contents 1 What is Neurodiversity? 2 Why is Neurodiversity important? 3 Words and Labels 4 Neurodiversity and Recruitment 5 Inclusive job adverts and applications 6 Assessments and Interviews 7 Inductions and Onboarding 8 Employee Engagement 9 Employee Retention 10 Policies and Processes 11 Workpaces and Places 12 Health and Wellbeing

Building Top Performing Teams How to Develop Your Employees for Business Success

This book

how to develop a purpose-driven team with shared goals, vision and identity who can « Explains achieve greater business success than individual employees are able to how to manage internal team conflict that can arise from employees having different « Shows priorities, motivations and levels of experience diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises in each chapter so that readers can « Provides identify how the content can apply in practice in their own team « Provides tips on how to motivate and engage a multi-generational team practical case studies from organizations including John Lewis, Mothercare, Carlsberg, « Includes PepsiCo and Unilever

Description The best way for a business to succeed is through its people. While there are gains to be had from streamlining processes, reducing costs or making a strategic change, the biggest potential for success comes from people. More than this, the greatest gains are achieved through a high performing team which is greater than the sum of its parts. Building Top Performing Teams is a practical guide for HR professionals, coaches and anyone with management responsibility on how to motivate, develop, engage and reward a team of employees with different levels of experience and different priorities from a variety of generations to achieve outstanding business success.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666762 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666779 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666786 £90 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Performance Management

Author Information Lucy Widdowson is the Founder and Director of Performance Edge Consulting. She has over 30 years’ experience and has worked at board level as HR Director at The Body Shop and Head of HR at Virgin Nigeria Airways. She is also a UK Associate Board Member for the International Coach Federation. Paul Barbour is Lead Facilitator at FXL Performance Management where he works with tech start-ups, blue chip multinationals and third sector organizations to develop and coach their teams for improved performance. Prior to this, he worked in-house at the Kerry Group Plc.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Building Top Performing Teams also includes essential guidance on how to manage internal team conflict and ensure that teams are purpose-driven and working towards a shared business goal. Each chapter includes diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises to allow readers to identify how to apply each element of team development to their own workforce. There are also tools and techniques throughout on how to promote team ways of working rather than individual-focused processes. Supported by case studies from companies including John Lewis, Mothercare, Carlsberg, PepsiCo and Unilever, this is essential reading for anyone needing to unlock the value of their team to achieve greater business performance.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Why teams add more value than individuals Approaches to team development The purpose-driven team Building team identity Shared goals, values and commitment Motivating and engaging your team Managing conflict in the team Coaching your team Team ways of working

The Energized Workplace Designing Organizations where People Flourish

This book

why traditional organizational structures and processes are holding employees and « Explains businesses back and how to redesign them to allow both people and the business to reach their full potential

how technological advances that mean staff are connected to work in their evenings, « Shows weekends and on holiday are having a direct impact on employee wellbeing and how to tackle this international case studies from companies including ING Bank, Ministry of Social Affairs, « Includes Belgium and WD-40

Description Productivity is flatlining, employee wellbeing is at an all-time low and stress at an all-time high. Mental health issues are now the biggest single disability affecting the UK and are estimated to cost the economy £105bn each year. Traditional company design, structures and processes are making these issues worse and leading to unprecedented levels of staff burnout. This not only impacts individual employees, there is also a detrimental effect on overall company performance when employees can’t perform to their full potential. It is the responsibility of Organizational Development and HR professionals to address these issues urgently and redesign work to allow people to flourish and businesses to thrive. Full of practical advice, tips and tools, The Energized Workplace provides a blueprint for how practitioners can redesign their organizations to support employees and ensure the business outperforms the competition.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9780749498665 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749498672 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789661071 £60 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Organizational Development

Author Information Perry Timms is a coach, consultant, international conference speaker and the founder of People and Transformational HR Ltd. He is also the social media and HR adviser to the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Named by HR Magazine as one of the most influential HR thinkers of 2017, he is a visiting fellow at Sheffield Hallam University Business School, a fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) and the world’s first WorldBlu-certified Freedom at Work coach. Perry Timms is also the author of Transformational HR, published by Kogan Page.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

It covers everything from why existing structures are causing business output to decline, why traditional processes are holding organizations back and what the consequences of not addressing these design issues will mean for business including increased staff turnover, a rise in employee absence and a decline in company profits. Including case studies from organizations across a range of sectors who have successfully put people at the heart of their workplace design such as ING Bank, Tata Consulting and WD-40 and with specific guidance on designing for five generations working side by side, across different countries and on separate time zones, The Energized Workplace will help OD and HR professionals confidently tackle the organizational issues putting their company success and employee health and happiness in jeopardy. Supported by research from Cranfield School of Management, this book is essential reading for practitioners needing to deal with the wellbeing crisis and productivity puzzle in the new world of work.

Table of Contents 1 The future design of work 2 Traditional design flaws 3 The impact of the new working life 4 The 20 dysfunctions of modern work 5 Evidence to support the redesign of work 6 Exemplary organizations designed to help people flourish 7 How people-focused design creates top performing businesses 8 Design tips and tools for building a workplace of the future 9 Advice for sustained success 10 What next?

Networked, Scaled, and Agile A Design Strategy for Complex Organizations

This book

examples from global companies such as PepsiCo, Kimberly-Clark, the Singapore « Includes government, Google, Mailchimp, Intuitive Surgical, Philips, Gallo, Nike and Novartis how organization design can help mature companies better embrace and connect digital « Outlines capabilities, and how fast-growth companies can mature and scale a culture that was effective for a start-up but is now facing new competition Conveys contemporary concepts around organization design in practical, accessible language

Description While technology and geopolitical forces change the face of business today, the patterns and challenges of organizing humans to work together across organization, culture, language and time zone boundaries remain. To face these challenges, all organizations need to be agile, networked and scalable. Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how to shape organizations that will enable people to make faster and better decisions in a more complex world. By outlining the tension between the need for agility/differentiation and scale/integration, the book offers a new way to think about this debate using the models of the Tower (vertical integration) and the Square (horizontal integration). It addresses the role of the leadership team and how the organization design process can build C-suite leaders and successors. Each chapter concludes with a series of reflection questions for leaders as well as a summary of key concepts and tips.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667790 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789667806 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789667813 £160 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Organizational Development

Author Information Amy Kates, Greg Kesler, and Michele DiMartino are organization design practitioners that consult to senior executives in companies around the world and live in New York, NY, Turnbull, CT and St. Petersburg, FL respectively. They are Managing Directors at Kates Kesler Organization Consulting, which is part of Accenture. Kates Kesler is recognized as one of the leading organization design firms and their methodology has become the global standard. The firm has been named by Forbes as one of the best consulting firms annually since 2016.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Including case studies from global organizations, Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how organization design can address three of the biggest business challenges organizations face today: how to build a new capability across the entire enterprise; how to make the entire organization more customer-centric; and how to allow for faster innovation.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Central Design Problem 2 Operating Models 3 Organization Models 4 Vertical Organization--The Tower 5 Horizontal Organization--The Square 6 Leadership in the Tower and the Square 7 Design Challenge--Enterprise Capabilities 8 Design Challenge--Customer Solutions 9 Design Challenge--Faster Innovation 10 Conclusion

Managing Culture Develop a People-Centred Organization for Improved Performance

This book

how a strong, values-based company culture can improve engagement, reduce employee « Shows turnover and increase profits the importance of company values and how to use them to measure and reward « Outlines performance how to resolve internal conflict and employee disagreements that can derail a company’s « Explains culture case studies from companies including Aviva, Royal Mail, Deutsche Bank and the NHS (UK « Includes National Health Service)

Description Company culture is the foundation of business success. Organizations with strong cultures see an average of four times more revenue growth, develop a more engaged workforce with employees who are 12% more productive and reduce employee turnover by almost half. However, good culture can be derailed by company politics, employee disagreements and internal politics. Managing Culture provides practical guidance for HR professionals on how to address these issues and develop a people-centred culture for both individual and business success.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781789661088 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789661095 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789661101 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Organizational Development

Author Information David Liddle is the CEO of the TCM Group where he trains individuals and organizations on managing conflict, resolution and how to solve cultural issues that are holding companies back. Based in the UK, he is also the founding president of the Professional Mediators’ Association (PMA), the founder of the Collaborative Justice Institute, an engagement guru for Engage for Success and the author of Managing Conflict, also published by Kogan Page.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

With expert discussion on the benefits of a people-focused culture, the importance of company values and how to measure and reward performance, this is an indispensable guide for HR and OD practitioners looking to create an environment that gives their organization the best chance of success. Guidance is also included on how to tackle bullying and harassment, the role of mediation and how to align workplace culture with CSR. Including toolkits, downloadable templates and case studies from organizations who have successfully implemented this approach including Aviva, Deutsche Bank and Royal Mail, Managing Culture enables HR practitioners to create, develop and embed a personcentred approach to company culture and improve both employee and company performance.

Table of Contents 1 What is the culture challenge 2 The benefits of a personcentred organization 3 The value of values 4 How to create and embed, a people-centred strategy 5 Simplifying rules, policies and processes 6 Using values to measure and reward performance 7 Managing cultural change 8 Tackling complaints of bullying and harassment 9 The role of mediation and restorative justice 10 Aligning workforce culture with CSR 11 Toolkits and templates

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation

This book

how businesses can embrace digital transformation and agile processes to achieve « Shows organizational success guidance on how to scale agile principles and operations, make change stick, and adopt « Provides agile mindsets and culture examples from organizations including AirBnb, Amazon and Google and real-life insights « Contains from organizational development professionals at the leading edge of digital transformation to this edition: material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear « New to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams

Description Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation is an in-depth look at transforming businesses so they can achieve competitive advantage in a digitally-enabled world. It is a guide for all those needing to better understand, implement and lead digital transformation in the workplace. It sets aside traditional thinking and outdated strategies to explain what steps need to be taken for an organization to become truly agile. It addresses how to build organizational velocity, embed innovation, link strategy to execution, develop talent to succeed and the role of vision and purpose.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781789666533 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789666540 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667493 £60 Previous edition: 9780749480394 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Organizational Development

Author Information Neil Perkin is a writer, keynote speaker and founder of Only Dead Fish, a consultancy which specialises in digital strategy, transformation and agility. He has worked with organizations including Vodafone, GSK, Samsung, the UK Government and The Financial Times, and curates the quarterly series of Firestarters thought leadership events for Google UK. Peter Abraham is co-founder of weareCrank, which helps businesses accelerate growth by using data and analytics to drive insight and action. He has over 20 years’ experience of helping global companies define their digital strategy and build digital centres of excellence to support digital transformation.

Human Resources, Learning & Development

This majorly revised second edition of Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation contains new material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams. Full of practical advice, examples from organizations including AirBnb, Amazon and Google and real-life insights from organizational development professionals at the leading edge of digital transformation, this book is an essential guide to driving success by becoming an agile and digital native business.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Greek, Indonesian, Korean

Table of Contents 1

The digital-native organization 1 The key forces for change 2 How digital disrupts 3 What’s stopping you? 4 Defining digital transformation 2 Fast 5 Operating in the ‘ambiguity zone’ 6 Digital-native processes 7 The agile innovation process 8 Agile structures and resourcing 9 Scaling agility 3 Focus 10 The role of vision and purpose 11 Agile strategy and planning 12 Linking strategy to execution 4 Flexibility 13 Building the culture to move fast 14 Agile talent 5 The transformation journey

Organization Development A Practitioner’s Guide for OD and HR

This book

a complete guide for both students and practitioners to implementing effective OD to « Provides drive performance and growth theory overviews as well as tools, techniques and international case studies from « Includes organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, employee « Explores engagement, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change to this edition: chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation, « New organization health and ‘use of self’, material on digitization, OD in SMEs, competence profiles and OD education and development, new case studies and practice suggestion boxes at the end of each chapter

Description Organization Development (OD) is key to ensuring that organizations and their people can adapt to and engage in ongoing change in today’s fast-paced and competitive world. Written by two of the leading experts in the field, Organization Development is a guide to the theories, practices, tools and techniques for identifying an organization’s needs and determining the most appropriate course of action to maximize capability. Featuring international case studies from a range of organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield, it also explores the role of HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, employee engagement, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781789667912 £34.99 Ebook: 9781789667929 £34.99 Hardback: 9781789667943 £110 Previous edition: 9780749470173 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Organizational Development

Author Information Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge has over 30 years’ experience of delivering transformational change in a range of international organizations, including the BBC and Singapore’s public sector agencies. A widely published author and international conference speaker, she was voted a Top Influential Thinker by HR Magazine in 2018 and 2019. Linda Holbeche is Adjunct Professor at Imperial College London Business School and Visiting Professor at four other UK universities. She is President of the Institute for Organisational Development, and was previously Director of Research and Policy at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). She is the author of The Agile Organization, also published by Kogan Page.

This revised second edition of Organization Development contains new chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation, organization health and ‘use of self’, material on digitization, OD in SMEs, competence profiles and OD education and development, new case studies and practice suggestion boxes at the end of each chapter. Whether you’re an experienced practitioner or student, this is an indispensable handbook to understanding, communicating and implementing organization development approaches.

Rights Sold 2nd Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 14 15 16 17 18

100

Human Resources, Learning & Development

19 Building the context for An OD practitioner’s employee engagement guide for Organization 20 Developing effective Development leadership What is OD? Its brief history Theories and practices of OD: a theory overview The OD cycle and the entry and contracting phase The diagnostic phase The intervention phase The evaluation phase Living at the edge of chaos of change Organization health Back room and front room change matters Can behavioural change be made easy? The Organization Development practitioner ‘Use of self’ Power and politics and Organization Development HR in relation to OD HR in relation to OD Organization Design Transformation and culture change Building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation Building organizational agility and resilience

Human Experience at Work Drive Performance with a Peoplefocused approach to Employees

This book

original research to show the performance and wellbeing benefits of a human-centric « Uses approach to work how to focus on employees as people rather than a commodity in order to attract, engage « Explains and retain the best talent guidance on how to embed a people-focused approach to employee practices and « Provides processes to improve business performance case studies from global organizations including Microsoft, Salesforce, Adidas, Costco, « Includes BrewDog and GSK

Description The only way for HR professionals to ensure sustainable top performance from their workforce is by taking a people-focused approach to their employees. To outperform their competitors, businesses need happy, engaged and committed employees performing to their full potential. Investing in new technologies or embracing people analytics won’t achieve this but a people-focused approach will. It not only improves staff engagement, productivity and wellbeing but also secures the benefits for the business with Deloitte reporting in 2019 that ‘organizations focusing on human experience are twice as likely to outperform their peers in revenue growth over a three-year period.’ Human Experience at Work is a practical guide for HR professionals and those responsible for talent management which provides advice, examples and guidance on how to embed people-centred approach to staff development.

New Edition: 1 Title

Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789667639 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667646 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667653 £90 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Author Information Ben Whitter is the Founder and Chief Experience Officer of the World Employee Experience Institute and the author of Employee Experience. He is also a guest lecturer and global mentor at The University of Nottingham Ningbo China. He is the Chair of the UK Employee Experience Awards and Global Ambassador for Engage for Success.

101

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Human Experience at Work covers what human experience is, the benefits for the organization, the benefits for employees, how to make it part of a talent management and organizational development strategy and how to leverage it. There is also coverage of how focusing on people and allowing them to be themselves at work creates a more diverse and inclusive work environment. Supported by original research from the author and case studies from organizations including Salesforce, Adidas, GSK, Microsoft and BrewDog.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

What is human experience at work? Why does human experience matter? Experience and engagement Experience and recruitment Experience and performance Experience and wellbeing Experience and productivity Experience and motivation Experience and diversity People-focused processes People-focused practices Human experience and business strategy

Employee Experience by Design How to Create an Effective EX for Competitive Advantage

This book

how designing and implementing effective employee experience initiatives improves staff « Shows engagement, productivity and performance how to evaluate and measure the ROI of employee experience and evaluate its impact on « Explains business outcomes insights from neuroscience and positive psychology to demonstrate how best to motivate « Includes employees an evidence-based approach to employee experience to empower HR professionals to build a « Takes robust business case for EX « Includes case studies from organizations including Virgin Atlantic, Credit Suisse, gsk and Asda

Description Engaged employees outperform their peers by 147%, take 15 fewer sick days per year and are 20% more productive. To achieve these results, a company must have an effective employee experience strategy. A motivated, engaged and productive workforce is essential for a company to achieve its goals. Employee Experience by Design is a practical guide for HR professionals on how they can create exceptional employee experience that drives staff to perform to the best of their abilities.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667714 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789667721 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789667738 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Author Information Emma Bridger is an award-winning employee engagement and experience specialist and Director of People Lab, an Employee Engagement Consultancy that works with clients worldwide. With over 20 years’ experience she has designed courses for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), contributed to the UK government’s Engage for Success review and now advises the UK Government taskforce on engagement as part of the ‘guru group’. Belinda Gannaway is the Director of Strategy for experience design consultancy, Fathom XP. Prior to this she was the Digital Transformation Culture Director at Brilliant Noise and the Account Lead at NixonMcInnes.

102

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Employee Experience by Design explains how to take a people-centric approach to employee experience to achieve the greatest results. Using an evidence-based approach it allows HR professionals to build a robust business case for employee experience and explains how to align EX activity with business strategy and assess its impact on business outcomes. Using insights from neuroscience and positive psychology it shows that employee experience must be more than perks and benefits from workplace culture, environment and behaviours, to technology and values. Most importantly it includes guidance on how to assess where efforts are best focused for maximum impact and how to measure the return on investment (ROI) of employee experience. Including tips, tools, advice, examples and case studies from organizations including Virgin Atlantic, GSK, Credit Suisse and Asda, this is essential reading for all HR and OD professionals needing to develop a happy, productive, high performing workforce.

Table of Contents 1

Defining your Employee Experience (EX) 2 Setting your Strategy 3 Finding your Collaborators 4 Busting Myths’ 5 Building your Experience Delivery Team 6 EX Design in Action 7 From Empathy to Insights 8 Redefine the Problem 9 Prototype, Test and Iterate 10 Measurement 11 ROI

Artificial Intelligence for Learning How to use AI to Support Employee Development

This book

« Shows how to use AI to curate and personalize learning content to improve learner engagement the myths around AI and explains how to cut through the hype and critically assess the « Debunks impact of artificial intelligence on L&D guidance on how artificial intelligence can be used to improve the assessment, evaluation « Provides and measurement of learning in organizations how AI can be used as an aid in employee learning and is not a replacement for L&D « Explains professionals case studies and real-world examples from companies including Netflix, British Airways, « Includes Vision Express and the NHS Description Artificial intelligence is creating huge opportunities for workplace learning and employee development. However, it can be difficult for L&D professionals to assess what difference AI can make in their organization and where it is best implemented. Artificial Intelligence for Learning is the practical guide L&D practitioners need to understand what AI is and how to use it to improve all aspects of learning in the workplace. It includes specific guidance on how AI can provide content curation and personalization to improve learner engagement, how it can be implemented to improve the efficiency of evaluation, assessment and reporting and how chatbots can provide learner support to a global workforce.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789660814 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789660821 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789660838 £90 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Donald Clark has over 30 years’ experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher on AI in learning and is also a Visiting Professor at the University of Derby.

103

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Artificial Intelligence for Learning debunks the myths and cuts through the hype around AI allowing L&D practitioners to feel confident in their ability to critically assess where artificial intelligence can make a measurable difference and where it is worth investing in. There is also critical discussion of how AI is an aid to learning and development, not a replacement as well as how it can be used to boost the effectiveness of workplace learning, reduce drop off rates in online learning and improve ROI. With real-world examples from companies who have effectively implemented AI and seen the benefits as well as case studies from organizations including Netflix, British Airways and the NHS, this book is essential reading for all L&D practitioners needing to understand AI and what it means in practice.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

How did we get here? Intelligence, learning and AI AI is the new UI Teaching and AI Learning using AI Chatbots and AI Creation and curation using AI Personalised learning and AI Practice using AI Assessment using AI Learning jobs and AI

The Learning and Development Handbook A Learning Practitioner’s Toolkit

This book

practical tips, tools and models to improve performance both immediately and for mid and « Provides long-term success « Shows how to embed digital and social learning into an organization’s L&D offering guidance on engaging stakeholders in learning and aligning L&D strategy with overall « Includes business strategy how to use neuroscience to deliver brain-friendly learning content for improved learning « Explains retention how to measure and evaluate the effectiveness of learning and build these insights « Demonstrates into future L&D decisions

Description The skills needed in today’s business world are not the same as they were in the past. Therefore, upskilling, reskilling and developing staff has never been more important. However, classroom training isn’t the best way to achieve this with employees forgetting more than 70% of what they’ve been taught within just one day. Learning outside the workplace is social, digital and immediate and companies need to embrace this to achieve the productivity, performance and revenue benefits that come from effective learning. The Learning and Development Handbook is a practical guide for L&D professionals wanting to move away from traditional classroom teaching but not sure where to start. Full of practical tips and advice, this is urgent reading for anyone in the learning profession.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789663327 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789663334 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789663341 £90 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Michelle Parry-Slater is an award-winning L&D professional with more than 15 years’ experience in the industry. She is the Founder and Director of Kairos Modern Learning, an L&D consultancy specialising in driving a shift from traditional courses to the best of digital, social and face-to-face workplace learning. Michelle Parry-Slater is also an L&D consultant for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the Lead Volunteer for L&D for Girlguiding UK and was listed as one of the Top 20 Corporate eLearning Movers and Shakers of 2018 by eLearning Industry.

104

Human Resources, Learning & Development

The Learning and Development Handbook includes advice on how to embed social and digital learning, make the most of blended learning, adopt brain-friendly learning and design more effective learning content for improved employee engagement and performance. This book also provides guidance on how to identify learning needs in an organization, gather evidence to engage stakeholders and align L&D strategy with overall business strategy. There is also expert guidance on how to evaluate and measure the effectiveness of learning, where to find the data needed to support learning activity. Written by an L&D practitioner, for L&D practitioners, this book is packed full of tips, hints, tools and models that can be used to improve both employee and overall business performance in the immediate, middle-term and long-term future.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6

Practical L&D Immediate ideas Social and digital learning Stakeholder engagement Consultative L&D Evidence-based practice Models and tools The whole 100 – Blended learning 7 ICE – Information, Communication, Education 8 EPC – Environment, Permission and Culture 9 3Rs – Required, Resourced, Referred 3 Impact 10 Evolution or revolution 11 Evaluation and measurement 12 Data and metrics 13 Reflective practice 14 Celebrating success

Excellence in Learning and Development Practice Drive Individual and Business Results as a top-performing L&D practitioner

This book

how L&D practitioners can prioritize performance and overcome barriers to learning in their « Shows organization « Supported by insights from research with over 7,500 L&D professionals and 50,000 workers guidance on how to develop strategies for learning success to improve individual « Provides employee performance as well as overall business results what skills are needed to become a high performing L&D practitioner and how to develop « Outlines them interviews with exceptional L&D professionals including the Chief Learning Strategist at « Includes PwC and the Learning and Innovation Director at Unilever

Description The world of work is changing and the pressure on learning and development (L&D) professionals to develop a workforce with the necessary skills to succeed both now and in the future as well as to drive overall business performance is huge. However, this goal can only be achieved if L&D practitioners themselves have the right skills, capabilities and strategies in place. According to research from Towards Maturity which surveyed 7,500 learning professionals, 95% of people didn’t feel confident in their ability to meet this objective because they felt ill-equipped and under-skilled. Excellence in Learning and Development Practice solves this problem by providing L&D practitioners with everything they need to use their role to drive individual and business performance.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781789665239 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665246 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665253 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Laura Overton is an award-winning learning expert with over 30 years’ experience in the learning industry. She is the founder of Towards Maturity, an independent learning analysis company which has been delivering the L&D industry’s annual benchmark report since 2003. Prior to this, she was an e-learning champion at e-Skills UK and was responsible for e-learning implementation at Smartforce. In 2018, Laura Overton was listed number one in the e-learning Movers and Shakers list, an annual report of the Top 100 most influential people in the learning industry across the world.

105

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Excellence in Learning and Development Practice covers how to assess the current learning landscape, how to prioritize performance, how to overcome barriers to learning, outlines strategies for learning success and develops the skills and mindset needed to succeed in an L&D role. It is supported by insights from Towards Maturity research throughout and is full of practical tips, tools and examples from top-performing learning organizations. It also includes interviews with exceptional L&D professionals such as the Chief Learning Strategist at PwC and the Learning and Innovation Director at Unilever. Written by a leading name in the learning industry, this is a book that no L&D practitioner can afford to be without.

Table of Contents 1 The learning landscape 2 The L&D role 3 The L&D skills needed for success 4 The strategies needed for success 5 Driving performance

Designing Accessible Learning Content A Practical Guide to Applying bestpractice Accessibility Standards to L&D Resources

This book

expert guidance on how to make L&D content more accessible including instruction on « Provides colour, font, contrast, spacing and navigation « Explains how to make all media and format types accessible including video, audio and images advice on how to make employees’ interactions with learning resources more inclusive « Includes with accessible quiz and input fields with the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.1 (WCAG) which are the recognised as the « Aligns ‘gold standard’ of accessibility « Online resources: PowerPoint slides showing best practice examples of accessible learning content

Description Making learning and development (L&D) content inclusive and accessible for all employees is not only a good thing to do, it’s the right thing to do. Designing Accessible Learning Content provides evidence-based advice on making learning content that works for everyone. Designing Accessible Learning Content is a practical guide for L&D professionals as well as instructional designers and course developers which provides evidence-based advice on how to create content that is accessible to everyone. This allows all employees to develop their skills and knowledge in order to perform to their full potential. There is specific guidance on the visual design of content which covers everything from colour, contracts, font and spacing through to headings, labels and hierarchies. There is also expert guidance on how to make interaction and functionality accessible for all, which includes instruction on quiz and input fields. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781789668056 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789668063 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789668070 £120 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Designing Accessible Learning Content also addresses all media and format types found in learning resources and how to make them accessible including audio description, live and pre-recorded captions as well as ‘alt text’. Aligned to the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG 2.1), this is essential reading for L&D professionals needing to ensure they employ with industry requirements and make their content as effective as possible for improving individual employee and consequently business performance. Online resources including supporting PowerPoint slides show best practice examples of accessible learning.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Susi Miller is an eLearning accessibility consultant with over 25 years’ experience as a learning and development professional. Based in the UK, she is Founder and Director of eLaHub, a skilled instructional designer and online course developer. She was also shortlisted for the Learning Technologies Awards for her work on accessible eLearning.

106

Human Resources, Learning & Development

The Case for Accessible Learning 1 The ethical case 2 The legal case 3 The business case 4 The learning case 2 Types of impairment 5 Visual 6 Hearing 7 Motor 8 Cognitive 3 Accessibility Framework 9 Text 10 Fonts 11 Headings and labels 12 Meaningful sequence 13 Images 14 Audio 15 Video 16 Colour 17 Contrast 18 Quiz and Input fields 19 Interaction and navigation 20 Resizing and reflowing 21 Moving elements and pause stop - hide 22 WCAG 2.1 and AAA compliance

Human Resource Management at Work The Definitive Guide

This book

reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and « Includes self-test their learning progress « Aligns fully with the new CIPD Advanced Level 7 qualification human resource management (HRM) in a business context and includes case studies and « Puts practical examples to help prepare students for a professional HR role to this edition: Brand new chapter on organisation design and development including « New coverage of workplace culture, job design and change management as well as additional coverage of analytics, diversity and inclusion Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and a lecturer’s guide

Description A leading textbook in its field, Human Resource Management at Work is a comprehensive guide to the theory and practice of HRM. The first part of the book covers HRM strategy and the global context, the forces shaping HRM at work and international and comparative HRM. Part Two discusses the role of HR professionals in the workplace and how the responsibilities for delivering effective HR vary in a changing world of work, Part 3 has expert coverage of the key areas of HR including resourcing and talent management, performance, reward and employee relations and this edition now includes a brand-new chapter on organisational design and development. The final part equips readers with the research skills they need to collect and analyse HR data from a business perspective and feel confident in their ability to present their insights to business stakeholders. Edition: 7 Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789664867 £48.99 Ebook: 9781789664874 £48.99 Hardback: 9781789664881 £150 Previous edition: 9781843983712 Pages: 576 Format (mm): 246x189 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: CIPD

Author Information Mick Marchington is emeritus professor of Human Resource Management at University of Manchester, UK and a Chartered Companion of the CIPD. Adrian Wilkinson is a professor and the director of the Centre for Work, Organisation and Wellbeing at Griffith University, Australia and a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD. Rory Donnelly is Professor of HRM at the University of Liverpool, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD. Anastasia Kynighou is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD.

Fully updated throughout, Human Resource Management at Work includes case studies, reflective practice activities to encourage critical thinking and ‘explore further’ boxes to encourage wider reading. Fully aligned to the new CIPD Level 7 qualification yet also relevant on non-CIPD accredited HR masters courses, this book covers everything students need to excel in their academic studies and will ensure that they can hit the ground running in a practitioner role after university. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 3 8 9 10 11 12

107

Human Resources, Learning & Development

14 Examining the links HRM, strategy and the between HR practices and global context processes and organisational HRM, strategy and corporate performance social responsibility 4 HRM and performance from Forces shaping HRM at work a business perspective Aligning HRM with 15 Research skills and project organisational goals and management market context Organisation design and development International and comparative HRM Responsibilities for delivering HRM The role of the HR function in changing times Line managers, leadership and HRM HRM practices and processes Resourcing and talent management Performance management Learning and knowledge development Managing employment relations Employee involvement and participation – Creating engagement and voice in the workplace Reward management

Data-Driven HR How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Drive Performance

This book

how to take a data-driven approach to recruitment, engagement, safety, wellbeing, training « Shows and performance management HR professionals analyze the vast amount of company data to gain tangible organizational « Helps insights and drive performance guidance on how to ensure data collection is transparent and that employees understand « Includes what information is being collected and why

Description FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2019 - HR and Management Category Traditionally seen as a purely people function unconcerned with numbers, HR is now uniquely placed to use company data to drive performance, both of the people in the organization and the organization as a whole. Data-Driven HR is a practical guide which enables HR professionals to leverage the value of the vast amount of data available at their fingertips. Covering how to identify the most useful sources of data, collect information in a transparent way that is in line with data protection requirements and turn this data into tangible insights, this book marks a turning point for the HR profession.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2018 Paperback: 9780749482466 £29.99 Ebook: 9780749482473 £29.99 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x160 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Author Information Bernard Marr is a big data guru and bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has and advised many of the world’s best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business and data strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of data and analytics for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse. Bernard Marr is also the author of Data Strategy (2017) published by Kogan Page.

108

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Covering all the key elements of HR including recruitment, employee engagement, performance management, wellbeing and training, Data-Driven HR examines the ways data can contribute to organizational success by, among other things, optimizing processes, driving performance and improving HR decision making. Packed with case studies and real-life examples, this is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to make a measurable difference in their organizations.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Japanese, Spanish, Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 What is data-driven HR? 2 The evolution of intelligent (and super-intelligent) HR 3 Data-driven strategy: making a business case for more intelligent HR 4 Capitalizing on the data explosion: identifying key sources of HR-relevant data 5 Data-driven HR tools: turning data into insights with HR analytics 6 Potential pitfalls: looking at data privacy, transparency and security 7 Data-driven recruitment 8 Data-driven employee engagement 9 Data-driven employee safety and wellness 10 Data-driven learning and development 11 Data-driven performance management 12 The future of data-driven HR

Excellence in People Analytics How to Use Workforce Data to Create Business Value

This book

how to use insights from data to improve business decision making and prove the ROI of « Shows people analytics « Provides advice on how to formulate smart business questions and use people data to answer them « Explains how to implement processes and establish robust infrastructure for ethical data collection case studies from global organizations who are leveraging the value of people analytics « Includes including IBM, Vodafone, Disney, Bosch and JPMorgan Chase

Description Effectively analyzing people data and leveraging the insights from this analysis is what sets the best HR professionals apart. However, knowing what data to collect, how to do this ethically and what questions to ask of the data is crucial for success. Excellence in People Analytics provides HR practitioners with everything they need to know from how to embed the correct infrastructure and technologies for data collection, establish consistent and transparent processes and build a culture of analytics in the HR team. Most importantly, it allows HR professionals to translate their data into tangible actions to improve business performance.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9780749498290 £29.99 Ebook: 9780749498306 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789661187 £90 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics

Author Information Jonathan Ferrar is a consultant, speaker, author and business advisor in HR strategy, workforce analytics and the future of work. Previously, he worked for more than 25 years in corporate business (most recently IBM) in both the United Kingdom and the United States. David Green is a speaker, advisor and executive consultant on people analytics, data-driven HR and the future of work. Prior to launching his own consultancy, he was the Global Director of People Analytics Solutions at IBM Watson Talent.

109

Human Resources, Learning & Development

Full of practical tools and advice, Excellence in People Analytics enables human resources teams to turn their data into organizational value including increasing profits, improving staff retention and workplace productivity as well as developing individual employee experience. With expert tips on how to present data insights to stakeholders in the rest of the business, assess how new sources of data can impact business growth and build a culture of analytics throughout the HR department. With case studies from global organizations including IBM, Vodafone, Bosch, Disney and AXA, this book is essential reading for all HR professionals needing to unlock the potential in their people data and gain competitive advantage.

Table of Contents 1 Foundations 1 Create strong governance 2 Use consistent methodologies 3 Manage stakeholders 2 Resources 4 Build a skilled team 5 Create technology infrastructure 6 Manage high quality data 3 Value 7 Deliver workforce experiences 8 Maximise business outcomes 9 Create an analytical culture

Marketing & Communications Innovation and Best Practice in Advertising B2B Marketing Branding Consumer Behaviour Digital Marketing Luxury Marketing Market Research Marketing Analytics Marketing Fundamentals Marketing Strategy & Planning Public Relations Retail Sales & Account Management

www.koganpage.com

110

Featured Titles

Understanding Digital Marketing

Stand Out Marketing

Damian Ryan November 2020 9781789666014

Simon Kelly, Paul Johnston & Stacy Danheiser December 2020 9781789664829

Influencer Marketing Strategy

Brand Elevation

Gordon Glenister March 2021 9781789667257

Wolfgang Schaefer & JP Kuehlwein November 2020 9781789664669

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

111

The New Chameleons How to Connect with Consumers Who Defy Categorization

This book

« Identifies the unique and complex relationships modern consumers form with products and services how many of the most fundamental assumptions marketers use to understand customers « Discloses actually don’t make sense anymore the breaking of traditional boundaries using examples such as bitmojis, avatars, video « Illustrates games, Augmented Reality, the sharing economy and unisex clothing brands Description Consumers are changing but the marketing categories used to identify them have not. Engage with this new generation of consumers who increasingly take for granted that products and advertising will blend their multiple brand identities rather than market to them as a specific subculture. Male or female, work or play, online or offline, These and other market categories are no longer relevant as modern consumers defy traditional boundaries and identify as members of multiple subcultures. The New Chameleons reveals how to engage with this new generation and how to stand out among the competition.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781398600041 £14.99 Ebook: 9781398600058 £14.99 Hardback: 9781398600065 £45 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 216x138 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Author Information Michael R. Solomon is professor of marketing in the Haub School of Business at Saint Joseph’s University and he resides in Philadelphia, PA. He advises global clients in leading industries on marketing strategies to make them more consumer-centric. He is the author of several leading textbooks on marketing, consumer behavior, advertising and social media.

112

Marketing & Communications

Global consumer behavior expert Michael R. Solomon directs marketers to move beyond their traditional categories and communicate with consumers as individuals rather than as a market segment. He explains how traditional marketing is based on the assumption of boundaries between us and them, the individual and the collective, producer and consumer, work and play, humans vs. computers, and editorial vs. commercial. He then shows how those boundaries are blurring: people identify with members of multiple subcultures; individuals seek collective advice before making a purchase; consumers no longer distinguish between purchases online or in-store; consumer generated content becomes the norm; gender identity is fluid; gamification strategies turn work into play; and identity marketing becomes more popular. Combining history, data, experience and examples, The New Chameleons is written for every marketer (or reader) who wants to offer products and services that resonate with consumers now and in the future.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Consumer that Defies Us Vs. Them 2 The Consumer that Defies Me vs. We 3 The Consumer that Defies Offline vs. Online 4 The Consumer that Defies Producing vs. Owning 5 The Consumer that Defies Male vs. Female 6 The Consumer that Defies Work vs. Play 7 The Consumer that Defies Body vs. Belongings 8 The Consumer that Defies Humans vs. Computers 9 The Consumer that Defies Arts vs. Crafts 10 The Consumer that Defies Editorial vs. Commercial 11 Conclusion--Then vs. Now

Brand Storytelling Put Customers at the Heart of Your Brand Story

This book

into authentic brand loyalty and human connection by aligning brand voice with individual « Taps customer values, experiences and aspirations how to weave, measure and advocate the brand storytelling mission into the marketing mix « Shows and throughout every department leverage a brand as a creative thought leader with a personalized brand narrative for leaders, « Helps employees and influencers, to strengthen customer engagement and differentiate from competitors on cutting edge interviews and case studies with leading storytellers from different « Builds industries such as Expedia, McDonalds, Adobe, Coca Cola and Google

Description Written by the award-winning storyteller Miri Rodriguez at Microsoft, this actionable guide goes beyond content strategy and, instead, demonstrates how to leverage brand storytelling in the marketing mix to strengthen brand engagement and achieve long-term growth, with advice from brands like Expedia, Coca Cola, McDonalds, Adobe and Google. Despite understanding essential storytelling techniques, brands continue to explain how their product or service can help the customer, rather than showcasing how the customer’s life has changed as a result of them.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2020 Paperback: 9780749490478 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749490539 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789660586 £60 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 230x155 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

Brand Storytelling gets back to the heart of brand loyalty, consumer behaviour and engagement as a business strategy: using storytelling to trigger the emotions that humans are driven by. It provides a step by step guide to assess, dismantle, and rebuild a brand story, shifting the brand from a ‘hero’ to ‘sidekick’ mentality, and positioning the customer as a key influencer to motivate the audience. Simplifying where to begin, how to benchmark success and ensure a consistent brand voice throughout every department, this book clearly shows how readers can align an emotive connection with the customer’s personal values, experiences and aspirations, and how that will enable brand leaders, employees and influencers to celebrate and strengthen brand engagement for the long-term, rather than simply trying to win it. Clarifying why machine-learning, AI and automation only tell one side of the story, this book will inspire you with cutting edge interviews and case studies from leading brands like Expedia, Coca Cola, McDonalds, Adobe and Google, to tap into authentic brand loyalty and human connection.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Korean, Russian, Spanish

Author Information Miri Rodriguez is an award-winning storyteller and creative journalist at Microsoft. She is a renowned keynote speaker and international thought leader in brand storytelling, personal branding and youth entrepreneurship. Her previous clients include Adobe, Discover, Walmart and McKesson.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

6 7 8 9 10

113

Marketing & Communications

What is brand storytelling and why is it important? Brand, business, customer? Where to begin in building your brand story The five essential elements to humanize your brand through storytelling Assessing and dismantling your current brand story to redesign a customer-led narrative Shifting the role of your brand from hero to sidekick in your brand story, giving your customer the starring role Bring your story to life with the sixth storytelling element – Passion How to integrate brand storytelling into your marketing mix Embracing dark social, immersive and data-driven storytelling Why ‘personal branding’ your leaders is a key pillar of brand storytelling success The power of advocacy – Using employees and influencers to celebrate your story

11 Inspire your brand story – Interviews with leading storytellers around the world 12 How to align and integrate brand storytelling into every department 13 Benchmarking and measurement – How do you know your brand storytelling is working? 14 The future of brand storytelling – How machine, AI and automation can only tell one side of the story

Brand Elevation Lessons in Ueber-Branding

This book

« Explains how any marketer, in any category, can benefit from knowing about prestige branding actionable checklists and advice on how to apply the power of prestige to their own brand « Provides and how to build a B2B prestige business « Includes answers to key questions such as how to operate a luxury brand on social media with case studies from leading global brands including including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, « Packed Burt’s Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube Description How can a brand become one of those peerless ‘Ueber-Brands’ we all admire and are willing to pay a premium for? - Is there a proven process? - Where should we start? Brand Elevation explains the main drivers behind brands becoming peerless and priceless and how to harness these principles to develop a winning brand strategy. Written for marketers and brand managers of all levels of experience, and for both those working in start-ups and established players, it proposes a six-step, easy-to-follow program to elevate your brand.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789664669 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789664676 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789664683 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Branding

Author Information Wolfgang Schaefer is CEO and Founder of zwoelf consulting, where he focusses on developing narrative brand strategies. He’s also guest professor at the XU Exponential University, Potsdam and a board member of Make-a-Wish Germany. For the past 25 years as a chief strategist he has worked with some of the world’s top marketers at LVMH, P&G, Miele, Swarovski, Coty and Unilever. JP Kuehlwein is the Founder of marketing consultancy Ueber-Brands. He’s also Adjunct Professor of Marketing at NYU Stern and Columbia Business School and leader of the Marketing Institute at The Conference Board think tank. Previously, he was Executive Vice President at Frederic Fekkai & Co as well as Brand Director and Director of Corporate Strategy at Procter & Gamble.

Brand Elevation explores challenges such as creating a distinct and brand-guiding mission, mediating between exclusivity and inclusion and mastering the art of seduction. Featuring case studies and expert accounts from organizations including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, Burt’s Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube, Wolfgang Schaefer and JP Kuehlwein skilfully explain how any brand regardless of sector and industry - can become a modern prestige brand.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 3 7

8 9

114

Marketing & Communications

The power of prestige – The ueber-model of brand elevation A new kind of prestige The ueber-brand model (including the six dimensions) The ueber-process 101 Marketing forward – Ueberanswers to branding’s biggest challenges Are we post-purpose? Why brands will always need a why Is Uber ueber? When platforms become brands Medium or message? How communication is being reintegrated Lessons from the top – Ueber-branding in action Rimowa – How to build a powerful influencer strategy [Hector Muelas, CMO Rimowa] LVMH – [Mathilde Delhoume, Global Brand Officer LVMH] Kashi – Building a healthy premium in mass [Ivan Pollard, Global CMO General Mills] Pernot Ricard – CRM in prestige [Tareef Shawa, Director Luxury/CRM at Pernot Ricard]

11 Tiffany & Co. – Walking the fine line between proximity and distance [Andrea Davey, SVP Global Marketing, Tiffany & Co.] 12 We-Work – Re-Inventing the way we work – That’s ueber 13 Google – Lifting brands beyond words through YouTube [Rija Goldscheider, Video Brand Evangelist, Google] 14 Vanguard 15 Volvo

International Brand Strategy A Guide to Achieving Global Brand Growth

This book

the necessary tools to create more informed marketing strategies, enabling brands to « Provides thrive in foreign markets « Delivers a proven, repeatable methodology that can be adapted to any product, industry or region organizations engage more effectively with buyers in the foreign market, and seize market « Helps opportunities promptly clear, practical tips to recognize and avoid the most common pitfalls when entering new « Contains markets readers understand the dynamic of product, price and value from a foreign market’s « Helps perspective

Description In theory, the Internet allows all brands to market internationally. But in practice, most companies struggle to compete outside their home market. Written from a marketing practitioner’s perspective, International Brand Strategy evens the playing field with clear, actionable techniques to guide any organization going through the process. This book helps companies build sales in foreign markets, but just as important it helps them thrive by maintaining price integrity and building brand equity at the same time.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666298 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666304 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666311 £90 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Branding

Author Information Sean Duffy is founder and CEO of Duffy Agency, based in Hollis NH, USA and Malmö, Sweden. He is Adjunct Professor in International Strategic Marketing at Lund University School of Economics & Management, Sweden, and a Mentor to its Masters Programme in Entrepreneurship. He has served two terms as European Governor of TAAN Worldwide, and was previously creative director with MullenLowe Group, Sweden.

115

Marketing & Communications

With the guidance provided in International Brand Strategy companies hit the ground running in foreign markets. This provides a competitive advantage from day one, empowers companies to avoid costly mistakes, and saves months of trial and error. The book lays out a unique methodology for managing brands abroad that can be implemented for any product in any market. These methods have proven their value for companies large and small across six continents. The book guides readers with pragmatic models and a wealth of examples from the Americas, Europe, and Asia. International Brand Strategy was written for those who are planning to enter a new market and for those who are already there but wish to improve their brand’s performance. It helps the reader recognize some of the most common pitfalls and how to avoid them, provides practical tips to understand the dynamics of price, product and value from a foreign buyer’s perspective, and defines a conceptual framework to assess and improve brand equity at home and abroad.

Table of Contents 1 PREPARATION 1 Why brands fail abroad 2 The business case for entering a foreign market 3 Choosing the right market 4 The difference between domestic and international brand building 5 Defining an approach to international markets 6 Preparing the brand for travel 2 THE NEW MARKET 7 Understanding the mechanics of building brand equity abroad 8 Setting realistic expectations 9 Dealing with language 10 Assembling the right team 11 Segmenting the market and targeting 12 Understanding local buyers in foreign markets 13 Understanding local competitors from the buyer’s POV 14 Seeing your product from the local buyer’s POV 15 Seeing your product’s price from the local buyer’s POV 16 Seeing your brand’s value from the local buyer’s POV 17 Creating an international web presence

18 3 19 20

Responding to the market GET MOVING Engaging company leadership A different type of management 21 The renewed importance of vision and mission 22 Distinguish between marketing and sales 23 Defining success 24 Evaluating risk 4 CONCLUSION

Communicate in a Crisis Understand, Engage and Influence Consumer Behaviour to Maximize Brand Trust

This book

a coordinated crisis response plan to overwhelming and often misinformed media and « Clarifies public reaction on social media organizations to maximize positive customer engagement with a practical, step by step « Enables understanding of how a crisis spreads, the peaks and troughs of consumer reaction and how to turn it into an opportunity Embeds a ‘bottom-up’ crisis culture, including how to differentiate a daily problem from a crisis, engage in early mitigation and legally sound stakeholder response Features case studies from leading global brands, as well as personal anecdotes from front-line industry experience

« «

Description Communicate in a Crisis is the definitive guide for any PR or marketing professional to recognize, plan and respond to a sudden wildfire of consumer-led reaction, ‘manipulated outrage’ sparked from interaction on news feed algorithms, fuelled by social media and the constant demand for an instantaneous response. This book turns the traditional crisis management approach on its head, starting by understanding changing consumer behaviours and the new ‘threat’ for brands, then outlining practical steps to prepare, synchronize and execute a coordinated brand response across all channels - under pressure. It reveals why we love to hate our favourite brands, how to recognize a day to day problem from a crisis, and offers valuable advice, such as using influencers and brand advocates to address social media trolls, rumours and the impact of fake news. With unique case studies, interviews and anecdotes from global leaders, Communicate in a Crisis will embed a bottom-up culture of long-term reputation management, always ready to face the unexpected. Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2019 Paperback: 9780749486501 £19.99 Ebook: 9780749486822 £19.99 Hardback: 9780749498924 £60 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x158 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Public Relations

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

Kate Hartley is co-founder of Polpeo, a crisis simulation training consultancy that works with some of the biggest brands in the world. Hartley has 25 years’ agency-side experience in crisis and reputation management and corporate PR. She has spoken and run workshops on the impact of social media on crisis management at international events including SXSW, The Global PR Summit, PR Week’s Crisis Comms, and Social Media Today’s Social Shake Up. She is a member of the CIPR and the PRCA, and sits on the PRCA’s digital steering committee which is designed to shape digital best practice in the PR industry.

1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Polish

1 1 2 3 4

5 6 7

2 8

116

Marketing & Communications

Understanding how consumer behaviour has changed Kick a brand when it’s down – Why we love to hate our favourite brands The issue of declining trust in the spread of fake news Who do I trust? The rise of individual influencers versus declining traditional media It’s outrageous! Understanding the new response to outrage and bad news, and the role of social media I want it now – Managing consumer expectation for instant information Profile of a troll – Understanding and dealing with trolling behaviour The conscious consumer – The question complex and pressures of brand transparency The role of changing consumer behaviour in crisis management and response The new challenges – Understanding the impact of changing consumer behaviour on crisis management strategies

9 What is acceptable in a crisis? How to differentiate business as usual versus crisis management 10 The social media Hydra: Principles of transparency versus suppression of information in crisis mitigation 11 Crises in action: Lessons learned from crisis responses from five major brands 12 The importance of telling the truth and its role in crisis and reputation management 13 Withstanding the attack: The importance of resilience in your communications teams 3 Building your crisis communication strategy and response 14 The brain’s response to a crisis and training your team to cope 15 Insights from crisis communication influencers on managing the threats facing brands 16 The role of leadership in a crisis and preparing your crisis team

17 Showing humanity and empathy in a crisis: When it counts and when it’s empty 18 What do I do first? Getting your priorities right in a crisis 19 Harnessing the crowd: Using influencers and advocates to calm the crisis: An interview with Scott Guthrie 20 The role of technology in crisis management: Using predictive analysis, social listening, search data and insights 21 Practical steps to prepare, execute and analyse a crisis response (and avoid common pitfalls)

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns A Strategic Approach

This book

all aspects of planning and managing campaigns in a structured way, from research and « Covers analysis, to objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales, resources, evaluation and review case studies such as WRAP’s Love Food, Hate Waste campaign; McArthur River Mining; « Features AkzoNobel’s Corporate Revolution; the UK Department of Culture, Media & Sport’s First World War Centenary Commemorations; and Lanson’s campaign for unbiased.co.uk New to this edition: focus on agile planning, an up-to-date look at recent industry developments such as the gig economy, influencer marketing and disruptive models, plus new global case studies Online resources: extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks

« «

Description Taking a public relations campaign from planning through to implementation can seem overwhelming. Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns provides a blueprint for success, and is widely regarded as one of the best ‘how-to’ guides for students and practitioners. Digestible and easy to read, this fifth edition presents a 12-point plan for ensuring success of campaigns of all sizes, covering vital areas including the role of public relations in organizations, the importance of context, research and analysis, setting objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales and resources, evaluation and review. With discussion of new developments in the industry, from the gig economy and online influencers, to disruptive models, this fully updated new edition addresses the need for agile planning and draws on fresh case studies to provide up-to-date examples of best practice. Supported by a suite of online resources, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is an invaluable guide for students and practitioners alike. Online resources include extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks. Edition: 5 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789663204 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789663211 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789663235 £90 Previous edition: 9780749468736 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Public Relations

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Anne Gregory is a professor of corporate communication and leading international academic. She is based in the School of Business and Law at the University of Huddersfield, and previously spent many years in public relations practice with senior experience both in-house and in consultancy. She remains a consultant and an advisor at board level to several large organizations.

4th Edition: Vietnamese

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

117

Marketing & Communications

Planning and managing – The context Public relations in context Starting the planning process Research and analysis Communication theory and setting aims and objectives Knowing the public and messages Strategy and tactics Timescales and resources Knowing what has been achieved – Evaluation and review

Litigation PR A Practical Guide to Managing Disputes and Minimizing Reputation Damage

This book

the challenges of creating a synchronized team of PR professionals, lawyers and clients, « Discusses and ensuring they are working in concert to simultaneously protect the client’s reputation while achieving legal aims

with fascinating international case studies, including claims against a UK High Street bank, « Packed a Central Asian manufacturing company, and repatriation of funds in a multi-million international fraud case Gives clear guidance on achieving strategic aims, including how best to reach key stakeholders with messaging through the media and independent voices

Description Become an expert in one of the newest, most dynamic branches of PR. Often pure legal advice is at odds with pure PR advice, so litigators increasingly need a good feel for the balance between the priorities of the law and reputation management, just as specialist litigation PR experts must understand the legal reporting restrictions, the finer details of the case, and the client’s wider objectives. Litigation PR is an essential handbook to this unique and challenging branch of communications.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789667332 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789667349 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789667356 £120 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Tim Maltin is a holder of the CIPR’s Communications Award for Excellence and was named “Outstanding Individual of the Year” at the Citywealth Brand Management and Reputation Awards 2019. He is ranked in Chambers and Partners for his litigation support work, and is a regular contributor to industry publications on PR matters, including the Legal 500 Litigation Country Comparative Guide. He was previously Chairman of international fashion brand Hardy Amies Plc, and City PR firm Lehmann Communications, and now runs his own agency Maltin PR.

118

Marketing & Communications

Highly practical in approach, Litigation PR emphasises the importance of building and maintaining a compelling narrative that appeals to the press while still serving their legal aims. It features numerous fascinating international case studies including a £200 million litigation against a UK high street bank, the PR surrounding the repatriation of funds in a $300 million international fraud, and a global hedge fund who initiated legal proceedings against a billionaire sporting magnate for alleged bribery. The book gives clear guidance on establishing a communications strategy that will act as an anchor throughout the entire litigation process, from first claim to judgement day. It will also help all PR practitioners work in harmony with litigators and clients to ensure that reputational damage is contained, and that the client will win in the court of public opinion regardless of what happens in the courtroom.

Table of Contents

Introduction – what to expect from Litigation PR? 1 Building a strategy 1 Building a narrative 2 Introducing other voices 3 Avoiding the pitfalls 2 Engaging with the press 4 Pre-trial/hearings 5 During the trial/hearings 6 Judgement day 3 Managing your reputation 7 Managing your reputation throughout the litigation 8 Countering the opposition 9 Countering disinformation 10 Social Media engagement 11 Conclusion

Influential Internal Communication Streamline Your Corporate Communication to Drive Efficiency and Engagement

This book

a clear, repeatable methodology that will transform an organization’s IC practices from « Delivers chaos to calm data and statistics to prove the impact that IC has on profit margins, and gives practical tips « Uses for getting board members on side for IC initiatives relevant research, comments and input from leading industry figures including Seth « Highlights Godin and Brené Brown practical case studies from companies such as Perrigo, SSP and transport organizations like « Includes fire services and airports

Description Streamline your organization’s communication with the powerful and easy-to-follow methodology presented in this book, featuring insight from experts including Seth Godin and Brené Brown. Better communication will mean better business practice company wide... increased employee engagement, happier clients, and stronger profits. As the title suggests, Influential Internal Communication proves just how influential internal communications (IC) is, and the measurable impact it has on an organization’s growth. For many organizations, IC often slips down the list of priorities when there are high pressure, high stakes business situations to cope with. This causes a sense of chaos and confusion within the organization that will - eventually - permeate to external customers and clients. Influential Internal Communication presents a clear, adaptable methodology that will help readers identify, diagnose and fix their own IC practices, thereby transforming the chaos into calm.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781789666137 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666144 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666151 £90 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Jenni Field is president of the CIPR, and was formerly Chair of its internal communication (IC)-specific group CIPR Inside. She has worked at Director level for numerous organizations including the global pharmaceutical company Perrigo. She was listed on the Institute of IC’s 30 under 30, and on the CIPR’s top 70 practitioners to commemorate their 70th anniversary. She now runs her own IC agency and keynotes regularly at industry events.

119

Marketing & Communications

Backed up with data and statistics from industry reports on workplace culture, Influential Internal Communication is based on research and input from CEOs and some of the best known names in the industry today, including Seth Godin and Brené Brown. The theory is backed up with real world case studies, showing how the model has worked in a range of organizations of varying size and industry. Written by the 2020 President of the CIPR and the former Chair of CIPR Inside group, Influential Internal Communication will streamline any organization’s IC practices, and help to drive engagement, efficiency and profit across the board.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction to internal communication Understanding organizations Understanding people The Field Model Data and diagnostics The fix Long term approaches From the inside out

Truth Be Told How Authentic Marketing and Communications Wins in the Purposeful Age

This book

« Explains what ‘purpose’ is and why companies need to activate their purpose mission « Describes when and how to act across all media channels to deliver integrity and authenticity by two hugely experienced and respected marketing and PR executives, working with the « Written global media group Omnicom and individual brands such as Porter Novelli, BBDO and Interbrand case studies and examples from organizations as diverse as Unilever Dove; Code Zero « Includes Plastic from King of Shaves, Nike’s Colin Kaepernick campaign, Bodyform sanitary wear , BrewDog’s IPA girl’s campaign and Pagatonia

Description The emergence of Purpose as a defining business philosophy has led to a place where many organizations struggle to make sense of what they need to do, and ‘purpose washing’ is commonplace. Truth Be Told identifies the challenges and opportunities of marketing and PR in the age of purpose and shows readers how to create authentic messaging, activate successful campaigns and asses the value that these have for key audiences. Purpose has become a leadership and managerial imperative for business large and small, non-profit organizations and charities. However, many businesses don’t know how to clearly execute this, and the marketing and PR function of a lot of companies struggle disproportionately. This had led to an increase in cynicism and the growth of ‘purpose washing’.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781398600164 £19.99 Ebook: 9781398600171 £19.99 Hardback: 9781398600188 £60 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Public Relations

Author Information John O’Brien is an advisor to business, non profits and governement bodies on purpose, its activation, organizational culture, partnerships and performance change. He is a senior pupose strategise and EMEA managing partner of Omnicom. He is based in the UK. David Gallagher leads Omnicon’s international programme, He has served as jury president for Cannes Lions International Festival of Creativity. He is member of the advisory committee for the Centre for Global Business at the University of Texas at Austin. He is based in the UK.

120

Marketing & Communications

When purpose is created with an authentic culture, the opportunity for building brand reputation and positive customer engagement will be significant. Truth Be Told will help readers understand and present the core truths of the company or organization which will drive clear, authentic purpose powered communication

Table of Contents 1 1

Purposeful truth What is purposeful truth and why it matters to be a ‘truth teller’ 2 Where to find purposeful truth 3 The truth recipe 2 How truth is harnessed 4 Self-assessment 5 Your purpose truth 6 Storytelling 7 Channels and audiences 8 Measuring results 3 Purpose truth lived 9 A truth-focused culture 10 Inspiring others

PR Technology, Data and Insights Igniting a Positive Return on Your Communications Investment

This book

the specific purpose-built technologies, data assets, and actionable insights that PR « Reveals professionals can use to inform better executive decisions how you can use technology, data and insights to quantify PRs contribution to business « Outlines objectives case studies from Mastercard, Cisco, Southwest Airlines, Adobe, Oracle, Bill & Melinda « Includes Gates Foundation, KPMG, Bank of NY Mellon, Wells Fargo, Visa, Audi, IBM, FedEx, NFL, Airbus and General Motors

Description Data, technology and insights have forever changed the way PR objectives are set and evaluated and how messages and campaigns are developed. By not taking advantage of these additional assets available to them, PR professionals risk losing organizational investment to the business units who can provide the necessary data and metrics to demonstrate ROI.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781398600409 £29.99 Ebook: 9781398600416 £29.99 Hardback: 9781398600423 £160 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Mark Weiner is the Chief Insights Officer for Cision, based in New York, NY. He is an advisor for The University of Florida Public Relations Advisory Council and a trustee for the Institute for Public Relations. He is the 2018 recipient of the Institute for Public Relations Jack Felton Medal for Lifetime Achievement. He was the Chief Executive Officer for PRIME Research after serving as Global Director and Senior Vice President of Ketchum Research. He has lectured at public relations programs at Columbia University, The University of Texas at Austin, UNC-Chapel Hill, and New York University.

121

Marketing & Communications

While “building buzz” or “breaking through the media clutter” may have been adequate measures of success in the past, PR and communications professionals today are expected to manage relationships, results and ROI, all while making tangible contributions to the organization. In addition to storytelling and media relations expertise, senior leaders now expect corporate communications and PR professionals to understand the fundamentals of business and how PR efforts demonstrate - and generate - a positive contribution towards the organization’s objectives. PR Technology, Data and Insights helps communications professionals understand the purpose-built technologies, data assets and actionable insights that are available to them. With an understanding of these tools, the book then outlines how to apply these assets in order to improve PR performance over time, versus objectives and against competitors, while clearly quantifying the unique contribution to business results that PR brings. Using case studies from industries as varied as Mastercard, Cisco, Southwest Airlines and General Motors, PR Technology, Data and Insights shows communications professionals how to take advantage of technology, lead with data, quantify PR’s ability to convert outputs to outcomes and deliver insights to assist senior executives in decision-making.

Table of Contents Introduction 1 New Methods for Driving ROI 1 Applying Purpose-Built Technologies to Drive Business Results 2 Identifying and Applying Data to Improve PR Processes 3 Connecting PR Outputs to Business Outcomes 4 Deriving Actionable PR Insights to Inform Strategy 2 Optimizing the PR Process 5 Landscape Analysis--Revealing Stakeholder Preferences and Competitor Activity 6 Objectives-Setting--Aligning Resources to Meet or Beat Established Targets 7 Strategy Development-Identifying Your Target Audience and Establishing Your Positioning Statements 8 Tactical Execution-Formulating and Executing Your PR Campaign 9 Evaluation and Attribution-Measuring Performance Against Objectives 10 Conclusion

Commercialized Customer Experience How Being Customer-Centric Will Increase Your Value

This book

a unique analysis of verified public opinion and data to prove that an increased focus on « Provides customer centricity delivers a parallel increase in revenue and shareholder value fascinating case studies and examples from companies including Ryanair, JD Sports, Apple, « Features Deliveroo, Lego, Selfridges, BMW, Hilton an in-depth analysis of the companies leading the way in customer experience, and « Delivers dissects their marketing strategies to deliver invaluable insights and lessons that can be applied in any organisation

Description A customer is for life, not just for Christmas. Understand the impact of online customer reviews and digital comparisons on some of the best known brands, and gain invaluable insights that can be used to grow emerging brands and revitalise existing brands. Having a customer-centric business model has evolved from being a nice-to-have to a must-have for any organization. A focus on products and services alone is no longer enough to outstrip the competition. In the current digital ecosystem, consumers can instantly compare products, prices and services with the touch of a button from the comfort of their home. Therefore, every organization must now focus on their overall customer experience to achieve the tricky but imperative balance between efficiency and personalization.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781789667875 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667882 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667899 £60 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Retail

Author Information Martin Newman has 30 years’ experience as a Chairman, Board Advisor and Non-ExecutiveDirector. He founded The Customer First Group and has worked with major brands including Harrods, Speedo, Burberry, Pentland Brands and Intersport. A regular contributor to Retail Week, he delivers keynote presentations at major events around the world. He has been named by Retail Week as one of the 50 most powerful people in online retail for 5 consecutive years, and named one of Retail Insider’s top 100 retail movers and shakers. He is the co-author of 100 Practical Ways to Improve Customer Experience, also published by Kogan Page.

In Commercialized Customer Experience, global thought leader Martin Newman presents clear data that proves the direct link between customer-centricity with profit and shareholder value. Drawing on examples from well-known companies like JD Sports, Delta Airlines, Lego, Selfridges, BMW, Hilton, Deliveroo and Uber, it analyses how organizations provide the most effective customer experience, and reveals the strategies that have allowed them to succeed.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5

7 8 9

122

Marketing & Communications

Introduction: 10 key traits of market leading brands The consumer shift from buying less stuff to experiences The fallen: The brands who have sadly bitten the dust and why The resurrected: Brands that have come back from the dead and been successful Customer centricity: The cause and effect of different aspects of customer experience on profit and loss Employee First: The first building block in driving customer centric transformation The shift from value to values: Culture always comes before strategy Brands that have stood the test of time and why The transformers: brands who have successfully transitioned their legacy businesses into customer led organisations The disruptive business models in consumer sectors and why they are commercially successful

11 Customer-centricity in the automotive industry 12 Customer centricity in the financial and banking industries 13 Customer centricity in the retail industry 14 Customer centricity in the airline industry 15 The objectives, incentives and measures required to drive customer centricity 16 The circular economy: brands that lend themselves to rent rather than ownership

Selling Transformed Develop the Sales Values which Deliver Competitive Advantage

This book

a new framework that will help sales people dramatically improve their performance by « Introduces providing a better customer experience a range of case studies from diverse global organizations including Starbucks and Hewlett « Presents Packard models diagrams and self-assessment questionnaires which will help sellers develop more « Provides customer-focused mindsets « Online resources: videos to support learning and teaching

Description For years, sales people have struggled with cliched views of how they sell, while at the same time customers have become more sophisticated and discerning, stopping off at different or unconventional places in the sales funnel. The result is that the technique of sales people controlling the sales conversation and learning how to influence the customer no longer works. Selling Transformed introduces the new world of selling, and addresses the reasons why sales people are so poorly perceived.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789665352 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789665369 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789665376 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Sales & Account Management

Author Information Philip Squire is CEO of Consalia, a sales consulting group. For over 20 years he has provided sales consulting education services and training to brands including Apple, AT &T, Ford, Hertz, HP, Pirelli, Royal Caribbean, SAP and Zurich Financial Services. He is a subject matter expert for the UK Trail Blazer undergraduate apprenticeship sales degrees and is co-founder of the International Journal of Sales Transformation.

Selling Transformed provides fresh, tangible ideas on how to develop better sales practices. Focusing as much on the customers as on the sellers, it explains key theories of selling effectively and introduces four proven strategies that are based on the values customers look for in sales people: authenticity, client-centricity, proactive creativity and being tactfully audacious. Explaining what customers look for in sales people, and advising on how to develop and deliver these values, this is a new type of sales manual guaranteed to improve sales performance.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13

123

Marketing & Communications

How history informs current sales practice Sales psychology and the pressure of time Changing sources of competitive advantage require a new selling paradigm A new paradigm of selling based on values - the research journey Values creating a positive or negative selling experience Values that are an antecedent to trust Principle one: the value of authenticity Principal two: the value of client centricity Principle three: the value of proactive creativity Principal four: the value of tactful audacity Royal Caribbean International case study – turning a potential disaster into an opportunity The role of leadership in transforming sales Looking to the future

Leading the Customer Experience How to Chart a Course and Deliver Outstanding Results

This book

what customer experience is and why everyone in the organization has a leadership role in « Defines achieving it « Quantifies the costs and benefits of customer experience how to build a team and deliver a great product that is surrounded by the right customer « Reveals expectations, communication and service

Description Customers today have heightened and fast-evolving expectations. Organizations need to come up with more than a simple quick fix in order to stay afloat and compete for their attention and loyalty. Many organizations have not responded effectively to the new generation of customers created by innovations such as mobile connectivity, AI and machine learning. As a result of failing to build the internal strategy, culture, processes and teams needed to deliver great customer experiences, they suffer higher costs, unnecessary brand damage and unhappy customers. Leading the Customer Experience provides a bold, path-breaking guide to delivering experiences that win loyalty and deliver outstanding business results. Based on the author’s extensive experience working with B2B and B2C organizations in the private sector and government, Leading the Customer Experience begins with an explanation of what customer experience is and then shows how to establish a customer experience vision. More importantly, the book reveals how to align processes and empower employees to make decisions consistent with that vision. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781789666878 £22.99 Ebook: 9781789666885 £22.99 Hardback: 9781789666892 £70 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Sales & Account Management

More than just laying out strategy, Leading the Customer Experience shows how to build a team and an organizational culture that can execute on a customer experience vision. The author tackles key technological, cultural and leadership challenges, outlines how to use metrics, and discusses the emerging role of Chief Customer Officer (or Customer Experience Officer). He also provides specific guidance on how to tackle megatrends that will influence service delivery well into the next decade.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Brad Cleveland is known globally as one of today’s foremost experts in customer strategy and management. Based in Sun Valley, ID, he has worked across 45 states and in over 60 countries for clients as diverse as American Express, Apple, USAA, the University of California, and the federal governments of Australia, Canada, and the U.S. His books and articles have been translated into more than a dozen languages. He is a sought-after consultant and keynote speaker.

124

Marketing & Communications

Introduction 1 Understanding Customer Experience 2 Build Your Approach--The Basics 3 Build Your Approach-Employee Experience 4 Listen and Learn--Voice of the Customer 5 Listen and Learn--A New Paradigm for Customer Service 6 Educate and Design--Telling Your Customer’s Story 7 Educate and Design--Shaping Processes and Technology 8 Inspire and Execute--Building a Culture of Customer Advocacy 9 Inspire and Execute-Delivering Perfection 10 Adjust and Innovate-Assessing and Improving Results 11 Adjust and Innovate--Keeping the Momentum Going

A Practitioner’s Guide to AccountBased Marketing Accelerating Growth in Strategic Accounts

This book step-by-step guidance on harnessing account-based marketing techniques and setting up « Provides ABM programmes to deliver successful B2B marketing guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and « Includes managing your ABM career insights from practising ABM professionals and case studies from organizations including « Features Microsoft, Accenture, O2 and Fujitsu to this edition: updates to the ABM adoption model, further material on quantified value « New propositions, new and updated case studies and examples and updated wider research

Description Account-based marketing, also known as client-centric marketing, is in the process of transforming modern marketing practice. It involves taking a strategic approach to business to business marketing, in which important individual accounts are treated as markets in their own right. A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing outlines a clear, step-by-step process for readers to harness ABM tools and techniques and set up ABM programmes to deliver successful B2B marketing. Featuring insights from practising professionals and case studies from organizations including Microsoft, Accenture, O2 and Fujitsu, it also contains guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and managing your ABM career and is fully endorsed by the Information Technology Services Marketing Association (ITSMA), who pioneered the concept of ABM in the early 2000s. Edition: 2 Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781398600874 £29.99 Ebook: 9781398600898 £29.99 Hardback: 9781398600881 £90 Previous edition: 9780749479893 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Sales & Account Management

Author Information Bev Burgess is Senior Vice President at ITSMA, leading its Global Account-Based Marketing Practice and delivering consultancy and training on the design, development, and implementation of ABM programmes. The first to codify this new B2B marketing strategy in 2003, she has personally helped companies around the world to accelerate account growth using ABM techniques. Dave Munn is the President and CEO of ITSMA, where he oversees defining, documenting, and inspiring marketing excellence with the ITSMA global membership community. Prior to this, he held senior field positions with Oracle and Apple.

This revised and updated second edition contains further discussion on how ABM initiatives can go from a pilot to being embedded in a business, new material on quantified value propositions and updated wider research. Meticulously researched and highly practical, A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing will help all marketers strengthen relationships, build reputation, and increase revenues in their most important accounts.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 13 14

125

Marketing & Communications

Setting up an account-based marketing programme The essentials of accountbased marketing Building the right foundations for account-based marketing Investing in the right tools and technologies Deciding which accounts to focus on The ABM adoption model Account-based marketing step-by-step Knowing what is driving the account Playing to the client’s needs Mapping and profiling stakeholders Developing targeted value propositions Planning integrated sales and marketing campaigns Executing integrated campaigns Evaluating results and updating plans Developing your career as an account-based marketer The competencies you need to do account-based marketing Managing your ABM career

Digital Marketing Strategy An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing

This book

costly trial and error to identify and streamline a measurable digital marketing strategy « Reduces tailored to business objectives essential theory with global business practice using practical templates, case studies and « Balances expert contributions such as display advertising and SEO to new edition: New chapters on marketing automation, messaging and email and « Updates expansion on social selling, data protection laws and technology advances like AI, big data, consumer behaviour plus online and offline integration Online resources: Lecture slides, activity sheets, test banks, practical implementation guides and templates

Description Optimize your digital channels and ensure your marketing strategy aligns with business objectives, with this second edition of the bestselling guide to digital marketing recommended by the Chartered Institute of Marketing. There is no shortage of digital marketing resources yet finding a book that covers all disciplines can be a challenge. This essential and highly readable book provides an accessible, step-by-step framework to the planning, integration and measurement of each digital platform and technique, all tailored to achieve overarching business objectives.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/04/2019 Paperback: 9780749484224 £29.99 Ebook: 9780749484231 £29.99 Hardback: 9780749498085 £90 Previous edition: 9780749474706 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 235x157 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Bestselling author Simon Kingsnorth is a recognized digital leader and strategist, and is currently Global Head of Digital Marketing at Citi Private Bank, based in the UK. Highly experienced at leading teams in digital marketing, digital transformation and user experience, he is a regular keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications.

Now featuring cutting edge updates on social media, SEO, content marketing, user experience and customer loyalty, Digital Marketing Strategy is an ideal road map for navigating: Marketing automation, personalization, messaging and email; Online and offline integration; The power of technologies, such as AI; New data protection and privacy strategies Accompanied by downloadable practical implementation guides spanning SEO, paid-search, email, lead-generation and more, Digital Marketing Strategy will show you how to effectively select, align and manage digital channels and operations, to streamline a winning digital marketing strategy for measurable, optimized results. It is an essential guide for any marketer to build an effective and practical digital strategy.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Russian, Turkish, Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7

3 8 9

126

Marketing & Communications

Introduction – How will this book transform your digital marketing strategy? The foundations of digital marketing Knowing your business objectives and your customer Understanding the digital ecosystem Integrating digital into wider organization strategy Understanding the evolving digital consumer Barriers, considerations and data protection in digital marketing strategy Integrating digital change into your wider organization Enabling technologies for online marketing and digital transformation Planning your digital marketing strategy – Objectives, teams and budgeting Using channel strategy to reach your customers SEO strategy and organic techniques Building and optimizing a winning paid search strategy

10 Display advertising and programmatic targeting 11 Tailoring your social media strategy 12 Marketing automation, messaging and email marketing – The unsung heroes 13 Lead generation that delivers results 14 Content strategy – A key pillar of success 15 Personalizing the customer journey and digital experience 4 Conversion, retention and measurement 16 Effective design, e-commerce and user experience (UX) 17 Managing loyalty, CRM and data 18 Providing a smooth online service and customer experience 19 Measuring success through data analytics and reporting 5 Tailoring your final digital marketing strategy 20 Putting together your digital marketing strategy 21 Index

The End of Marketing Humanizing Your Brand in the Age of Social Media and AI

This book

how to humanize your brand through storytelling, customer advocacy and effective « Explains influencers « Describes how to engage customers and employees as brand ambassadors case studies and examples from social media giants such as Kim Kardashian and D J « Features Khaled the importance of AI and explains how marketers and bots can co-exist and thrive in a « Evaluates digital world « Makes the case that every organization should replace their logo with a face and a name

Description FINALIST: Business Book Awards 2020 - International Business Book category Social networks are the new norm and traditional marketing is failing in today’s digital, always-on culture. Businesses across the world are having to face up to how they remain relevant in the choppy waters of the digital ocean. In an era where a YouTube star gets more daily impressions than Nike, Coca-Cola and Walmart combined, traditional marketing as we know it is dead. The End of Marketing revolutionizes the way brands, agencies and marketers should approach marketing. From how Donald Trump won the American presidency using social media and why Kim Kardashian is one of the world’s biggest online brands, through to the impact of bots and automation, this book will teach you about new features and emerging platforms that will engage customers and employees. Discover bold content ideas, hear from some of the world’s largest brands and content creators and find out how to build smarter paid-strategies, guaranteed to help you dominate your markets. Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Paperback: 9780749497576 £14.99 Ebook: 9780749497590 £14.99 Hardback: 9780749497583 £45 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 220x140 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Carlos Gil is an international keynote speaker and award-winning digital storyteller with over a decade of experience leading social media strategy for global brands including LinkedIn, Winn-Dixie, Save-A-Lot, and BMC Software. His work has been featured in Harvard Business Review, Inc., Entrepreneur, and Social Media Examiner, and his speaking includes keynotes for clients across the United States, Europe and South America. He is the CEO and Founder of Gil Media Co., working with Fortune 500 clients including DocuSign, Western Union, and Keller Williams.

127

Marketing & Communications

The End of Marketing explains that no matter how easy it is to reach potential customers, the key relationship between brand and consumer still needs the human touch. Learn how to put ‘social’ back into social media and claim brand relevancy in a world where algorithms dominate, organic reach is dwindling and consumers don’t want to be sold to, they want to be engaged.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Estonian, Spanish, Vietnamese

Table of Contents 1 Marketing is dead 2 Stranded in a digital ocean 3 How to be savage AF – like Randy 4 Don’t be mad at Facebook you just suck at marketing 5 Swipe right - sales and marketing is no different from finding your match on Tinder 6 Growth hacking your way to greatness 7 Marketing lessons from social media giants DJ Khaled and Kim Kardashian West 8 Transforming your advocates into the faces of your brand 9 Judgment day – the battle of AI versus humans 10 The power of personality and persuasion 11 Bringing it all together 12 The new frontier

Understanding Digital Marketing A Complete Guide to Engaging Customers and Implementing Successful Digital Campaigns

This book

tips on how to best connect with customers in a rapidly changing climate of engagement « Provides and interaction current and emerging trends which are shaping the industry, including voice-search and « Explores voice-based marketing, chatbots, and data insights to this edition: updated content on social media, UX and CX, video marketing, and « New harnessing data insights including investment in AI and chatbots; a new look at current trends including voice technology; and updated and new global case studies Online resources: bonus contributor views and additional case studies on Kwik Fit, Battersea Dogs Home and Yves Saint Laurent

Description The world of digital media is constantly changing, as technologies continue to transform the way we interact and communicate on a global scale. In this climate, Understanding Digital Marketing provides a practical, no-nonsense guide to digital marketing, from strategy and digital transformation to bestpractice basics and trends. Clear, informative and packed with case studies and examples, it gives an essential grounding in SEO, email marketing, social media, content marketing, performance marketing and much more. This fifth edition of the bestselling Understanding Digital Marketing is fully updated to reflect the latest global developments in the industry. Complete with first-hand accounts of what success in digital marketing looks like, this book is an essential resource for practitioners and students alike. It is now required reading for more than 100 universities and colleges, and has received endorsements from Harvard University, Hult Business School and the Chartered Institute of Marketing. Edition: 5 Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789666014 £22.99 Ebook: 9781789666021 £22.99 Hardback: 9781789666038 £70 Previous edition: 9780749478438 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

Damian Ryan is a media and marketing expert with over 30 years’ experience. He created the Golden Spider Awards for internet excellence, before establishing the first digital agency in the UK and Ireland in 1997. He went on to successfully build and sell three digital marketing businesses and is now a specialist adviser in mergers and acquisitions in corporate finance. Ryan is now a partner with BDO where he covers deals in media marketing communications and marketing technologies. He is also author of Understanding Social Media and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World, both published by Kogan Page.

2nd Edition: Italian 3rd Edition: Arabic, Chinese (Simplified) 4th Edition: Spanish 5th Edition: Portuguese

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

128

Marketing & Communications

Introduction: Digital transformation Digital marketing strategy setting Being online: welcoming the world Search engine optimization (SEO): basics and trends Search engine marketing (SEM) Email marketing Mobile marketing Understanding social media Content marketing and native content Programmatic marketing Performance marketing How to form meaningful insights from data Creativity in digital marketing

E-Commerce Website Optimization Why 95% of Your Website Visitors Don’t Buy, and What You Can Do About it

This book

the most effective changes to undertake on your e-commerce site, demonstrating how to « Highlights focus valuable time on tangible efficiencies and revenue gains how to gain insights into online customers’ behaviour and identifies free or inexpensive « Shows tools to help access them the transition to becoming a data-driven organization, helping to adopt a scientific « Supports approach to implementing an optimized e-commerce website to this edition: new content on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, as well as a « New new chapter on persuasive copywriting, plus updated case studies and recommended tools

Description Conversion rate optimization (CRO) is a complex field and one that is rapidly evolving. It’s about understanding people and their behaviour, not simply website visits. E-commerce Website Optimization provides an all-encompassing guide, explaining the how and why, before focusing on techniques and tools to increase the percentage of visitors who buy from the site, and subsequently the amount that these visitors spend when they buy. Grounded in best-practice theory and research, it brings together usability, analytics and persuasion to offer a detailed, step-by-step guide to improve conversion rates, increase ROI from online marketing campaigns, generate higher levels of repeat business and increase the e-commerce value of websites.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789664423 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789664430 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789664454 £60 Previous edition: 9780749475383 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Dan Croxen-John is CEO of AWA Digital, a global e-commerce conversion optimization agency. He is a certified Web Analyst, a Fellow of the Institute of Direct Marketing, and has served on advisory boards for numerous associations. Johann van Tonder is COO at AWA Digital, working with brands such as Canon, Avis and Interflora. He has trained and coached big and small e-commerce businesses around the world, and is a regular speaker at international conferences.

129

Marketing & Communications

In the fast-moving world of e-commerce, this fully revised second edition includes updates on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, as well as a new chapter on persuasive copywriting. Alongside updated case studies and newly recommended tools, E-commerce Website Optimization is an invaluable book for those seeking to implement a data-driven ethos for their organization’s e-commerce programme, for everyone from chief digital officers and heads of online sales, to entrepreneurs and small business owners.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Italian, Russian

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to e-commerce website optimization 2 The kick-off 3 How people buy 4 Essential research 5 Add depth with further research 6 Merchandizing analytics 7 Creating the optimization plan 8 Hypotheses and creative work 9 Testing your hypothesis 10 Personalization 11 Optimizing the optimization 12 People and culture 13 Persuasive website copywriting 14 Launching a new website

Influencer Marketing Strategy How to Create Successful Influencer Marketing

This book

the importance of maintaining control of the brand message while still giving the « Discusses influencer the freedom to create posts in their natural style readers understand the key facets of influencer marketing, walking them through the process « Helps of preparing their own influencer marketing strategy in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, « Features to showcase the variety of influencer marketing strategies that can be adopted. Examples include Mumsnet, Fyre Festival, Dermalogica and Ryan’s Toys Offers advice on incorporating influencer marketing into a wider content marketing strategy

Description Create an influencer marketing strategy that benefits both brand and the influencer with this fascinating guide, rich in case studies from the biggest and the best and the small and specialist. Influencer marketing can no longer be ignored. Whether it’s broad scale celebrity endorsement, or micro-influencers with niche, highly targeted followings, influencer marketing has become a natural extension of content marketing. However, while the opportunities are vast, the very nature of influencer marketing means that a brand must relinquish control of their marketing message to allow the influencer to communicate in their natural style. This can be unnerving, and it’s therefore imperative to have a clearly defined campaign that mutually benefits and protects both the brand and the influencer.

New Edition: 1 Title

Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789667257 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789667264 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789667271 £90 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Gordon Glenister (UK) is Global Head of Influencer Marketing for the Branded Content Marketing Association, and has over 25 years’ experience in promotional marketing. He runs his own membership and merchandise consultancy, and regularly speaks around the world on influencer marketing, membership and merchandise. Gordon Glenister was Director General of the British Promotional Merchandise Association for 11 years.

130

Marketing & Communications

Influencer Marketing Strategy gives readers everything they need to create influencer marketing strategy. It will walk readers through the key considerations, and offer insight into decisions such as choosing the right influencer, planning content, and how to incorporate influencer marketing into your wider marketing strategy. This book presents fascinating, in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, demonstrating the variety of ways that influencer marketing can be utilized, and the huge opportunities it presents for organizations and industries of all sizes. Influencer Marketing Strategy is the ultimate guide to developing a successful influencer marketing strategy - and building campaigns that create real value.

Table of Contents 1 About influencer marketing 1 What is influencer marketing? 2 The influencer strategic framework 3 Choosing and working with influencers 4 The A-Z of running an influencer marketing campaign 5 Understanding the analytics 6 Influencer ethics, and staying above board 7 Measuring Influencer Marketing Success 2 Influencer marketing in action: In-depth influencer marketing case studies 8 Mumsnet 9 Fyre festival 10 Dermalogica 11 Ryan’s toys

B2B Digital Marketing Strategy How to Use New Frameworks and Models to Achieve Growth

This book

clear, direct explanations of the more advanced aspects of digital B2B marketing, and makes « Gives these accessible and user-friendly explains the most up-to-date digital frameworks relevant to the B2B marketing sphere, « Expertly and shows how to implement these to achieve lead generation, customer retention and data management Is due to be the set text for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)’s course Advanced B2B Digital Marketing, and recommended reading for the courses B2B Acquisition and Retention Marketing, and Introduction to B2B Digital Marketing Includes a wealth of global case studies, featuring companies such as Danfoss, American Express, IBM, Schneider Electric and more

« «

Description B2B Digital Marketing Strategy is a decisive guide to the most recent developments in the field. It gives readers an overview of the latest frameworks and models, and shows how these can be used to overcome the everyday challenges associated with account targeting, data utilization, and digital campaign management. Intensely practical, B2B Digital Marketing Strategy helps readers get to grips with some of the more advanced and complex elements of B2B marketing. It expertly explains how to incorporate the latest digital methodologies into critical processes such as lead generation, customer retention and customer experience personalization. Packed with global case studies and examples, this book is an invaluable resource for any professional operating in the B2B space. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789662542 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789662559 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789662566 £90 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: B2B Marketing

Author Information Simon Hall is a marketing innovator with around 25 years’ experience in Technology and Services Marketing. In his former career, he served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as many senior European roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In addition to running courses and workshops with companies on various B2B marketing and digital marketing areas, Simon Hall also lectures final year university students and degree apprentices in strategy, and marketing at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, of the DMA B2B Council, and a Global Thought Leader in B2B Marketing for the ICG Group (a global consulting company). He is the founder of NextGen Marketing Solutions and author of Innovative B2B Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

131

Marketing & Communications

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 The new evolving business landscape 2 Developing digital strategy and understanding the customer digital experience 2 The B2B digital marketing strategy framework 3 The customer experience and the digital journey 4 Personalization of the customer experience 5 Customer insights and data management 3 Generating awareness in the early stage of the customer journey 6 Defining the B2B SEO and search strategy 7 Website and dynamic web content 8 The B2B digital awareness mix 4 Digital for lead nurturing 9 Lead generation and lead nurturing 10 The importance of content marketing in nurturing 11 Digital nurturing techniques and tactics 5 Digital campaign management and integration 12 The digital campaign process

13 Digital integration management 14 Digital sales and marketing alignment 15 Measuring and controlling digital marketing 6 Digital for retaining customers 16 Digital and customer retention 17 Digital marketing mix for retaining customers 7 The future of B2B digital marketing 18 Marketing technology landscape and AI, what’s next?

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio How to Use the Creative Luxury Process to Develop Products Everyone Wants

This book

examples from global brands such as Harley-Davidson, Caterpillar, Disney, Apple, « Provides Madecraft, LinkedIn, Johnson & Johnson, Nestle, FedEx, and Gillette among others luxury as a series of attributes or “switches” that create greater perceived value in the « Redefines eyes of consumers a detailed step-by-step formula to transition any part of your portfolio, regardless of « Introduces industry, to luxury status resources: sample syllabi for classroom use, templates for application of framework, case « Online studies, discussion questions

Description Expand your existing portfolio by using the creative luxury process to elevate specific products and provide greater value to customers. Contrary to popular belief, luxury is a well-defined code that can be reapplied to any other product or service to enhance its value. Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio reveals how non-luxury companies can apply the principles of luxury and creativity to transition parts of their portfolio to luxury status. Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio describes how companies can elevate any product or service at each step of the customer buying journey (awareness, search and compare, purchase, use, advocate). By applying the creativity technique Closed World Principle, readers can determine which luxury benefits (security, fun, self-respect, self-fulfillment, accomplishment, recognition, relationships or belonging) would best map to their product or service and garner the greatest business impact at that particular stage of the customer buying journey. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789666090 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789666106 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789666113 £90 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Drew Boyd is Associate Professor of Marketing and Innovation at the University of Cincinnati in Mason, Ohio. He trains, consults and speaks on the topics of innovation, persuasion and marketing strategy at Macy’s, Toyota and Procter & Gamble. He spent 17 years at Johnson & Johnson in marketing, mergers and acquisitions, and international development, where he also earned his first of five patents for medical devices. His work has been featured in business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Bloomberg, Industry Week, Psychology Today, and Strategy+Business.

132

Marketing & Communications

Illustrated with examples from industries as diverse as healthcare and industrial equipment, Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio shows companies how to borrow the elements of luxury and sprinkle them throughout the customer experience in order to strengthen loyalty and increase their appeal to potential new customers. Online resources include sample syllabi, templates to aid in application of framework, case studies and discussion questions.

Table of Contents 1 The Luxury Opportunity 2 The Tools of the Creative Luxury Process 3 Transforming the Product or Service 4 Transforming the Shopping/ Buying Experience 5 Transforming the Usage Experience 6 Transforming the Post Purchase Experience 7 Applying the Creative Luxury Process 8 Conclusion

Customer Insight Strategies How to Understand Your Audience and Create Remarkable Marketing

This book

an array of easy-to-implement techniques and strategies, showing how to use customer « Presents insights to create effective marketing and business practices how to use customer insight to achieve lead generation, improve thought leadership and « Shows content marketing, focus social selling/social media, incorporate customer analytics, identify and market to personas, and apply and create customer segments Contains global case studies including Cisco, Conduent, NTT, Refinitiv (part of Thomson Reuters), Nisbets, Kerry Properties (part of the Shangri La hotel group) and Peak Re, and interviews with key business leaders on how they have used customer insight to drive growth in their own companies Teaches skills and strategies that can be scaled to suit any budget or organizational size

« «

Description In a noisy, fast-paced marketing world, customer insight holds the key to creating memorable, purpose-driven marketing. Customer Insight Strategies outlines the critical role of customer insight, and provides techniques and strategies that will help marketers identify trends, nurture leads and understand consumers - ultimately, empowering them to grow profits. The strategies are explained in a straight-forward, jargon-free manner, and can be applied to a huge range of marketing challenges regardless of time, budget or organizational size.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789662504 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789662511 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789662528 £60 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy & Planning

Author Information Dr Christine Bailey is Managing Director, SMB UK & Ireland, and CMO at Valitor. She has over 25 years marketing experience in the technology sector, including leading European marketing functions for Hewlett-Packard and Cisco Systems. She is a respected thought leader and motivational speaker who blogs for Forbes Women, and serves on numerous advisory boards.

Customer Insight Strategies shows precisely how customer insights can be used to build a mission with purpose. It discusses many of the core methods through which customer insight can be gleaned, providing easy-to-follow guidelines for applying them to everyday marketing practice. Covering topics such as customer segments, marketing to personas, lead generation and more, it also contains interviews with leading business professionals sharing how they have used customer insights to grow profits. Written by a highly respected thought leader and industry influencer, Customer Insight Strategies will help any professional to create truly powerful marketing.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

133

Marketing & Communications

An introduction to customer insights The importance of having a mission with purpose How insights can help create and apply customer segments Using insights to understand, create and market to personas Using insights for thought leadership & content marketing Using insights for lead generation Customer analytics and how to apply them Let’s get social – Insights and social media Technology to help Implications & recommendations for practitioners

Stand Out Marketing How to Differentiate Your Organization in a Sea of Sameness

This book

fascinating original research comparing the websites and social media feeds of over 30 « Presents organizations from various sectors, proving how consumers are dealing with a ‘sea of sameness’ with many of them saying the same thing

a clear, seven-step, values-based framework that will help organizations break away and « Offers differentiate themselves from the competition companies identify the exact capabilities, attitudes and behaviours that need to be adjusted « Helps to escape the ‘herd instinct’, enabling them to meet consumers’ needs more effectively, and therefore stand out from the competition

organizations create differential value for their customers, by re-focusing on the consumer « Helps and the kinds of solutions they want, rather than the kinds of solutions the organization has traditionally offered

Description When it comes to buying a mobile phone, choosing a university, selecting a software system, or making any other purchase in a crowded marketplace, many consumers feel they are faced with a ‘sea of sameness’. The websites and social media streams of the various companies all seem to blur into one, with the same phrases and promises repeated over and over again. Stand Out Marketing presents original research which compares the content produced by over 30 organizations in leading sectors to quantify this effect, proving not only that the ‘sea of sameness’ exists, but documenting its precise size and nature. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789664829 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789664836 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789664843 £90 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Marketing Strategy & Planning

Author Information Dr Simon Kelly is President of Shake Marketing, and was formerly Marketing Director (SVP) of British Telecom. He is also Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Sheffield Business School, and Lecturer in Marketing and Sales at University of York. Dr Paul Johnston teaches marketing at Sheffield Hallam University and is currently Associate Lecturer and Researcher. He has also been Visiting Lecturer for the IESEG Management School Paris, Visiting Supervisor for the University of Birmingham UK, and Visiting Supervisor for the University of Sheffield UK. Stacey Danheiser is CEO and founder of Shake Marketing. She is also CEO and Course Creator for Customer Value Link.

On the back of this unique and fascinating research, Stand Out Marketing traces the problem back to its roots and offers a proven, seven-step framework to help companies rise above it and differentiate themselves from the competition. By re-focusing on the customer and their needs, and re-shaping the capabilities, attitudes and behaviours of the organization accordingly, the framework will help companies stand out and deliver genuine value. Over time, this value will convert to growth and profits for any business.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Portuguese

Table of Contents 1 2 3

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

134

Marketing & Communications

B2B organizations are stuck in a sea of sameness Why does sameness happen in B2B marketing? The value competency framework – core competencies for B2B differentiation The role of sales and marketing in B2B organizations – what is important? The visionary – competencies for seeing the next competitive move The activator – competencies for getting things done The learner – competencies for staying in tune with your customers Usefulness – competencies for becoming indispensable to your customers The evaluator – competencies for making good decisions Building a value competency culture Using value competencies to stand out from your competitors

Activate Brand Purpose How to Harness the Power of Movements to Transform Your Company

This book

a framework to help brands jumpstart their purpose and prove that they stand for « Provides something more meaningful than simply making money readers instigate a positive, productive company culture that encompasses purpose in all « Helps aspects of business, both internally and externally a clearly explained, proven framework that will help readers spark a cultural revolution « Provides within their own company that will then permeate externally to consumers and clients

Description Being an active, purpose-driven brand has never been more meaningful. Recent statistics prove that more than 87% of consumers would purchase a product because a company advocated for an issue they cared about, and more than two-thirds would refuse to do so if the company supported an issue contrary to their beliefs. Become a truly ‘purpose-driven’ brand that creates action, with this proven framework. We live in an age of activism - the conscious consumer is more socially aware than ever before, and this is reflected in their buying habits. Yet, activism on behalf of brands is lagging. While many claim to be ‘purpose driven’, far too often this purpose is relegated to a plaque above the CEO’s desk, and never goes any further. Or, worse, the ‘purpose’ is transparently used as a marketing ploy, but never acted upon in any real way.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789668247 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789668254 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789668261 £60 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy & Planning

Author Information Scott Goodson, based in New York, is the founder and CEO of StrawberryFrog, the world’s first Movement Marketing agency. For the last 25 years he has worked with iconic global brands including Google, Coca Cola and Mercedes. A regular speaker on the subject of Movement Marketing, he has also appeared in The New York Times, The FT, the Economist, Harvard Business Review and Forbes. Chip Walker, based in New York, leads the strategy and research divisions at StrawberryFrog. He has helped to lead the transformations of organizations including Bank of America, Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley.

135

Marketing & Communications

Activate Brand Purpose shows readers how to transform their brand’s purpose into meaningful action by sparking a company wide cultural movement, beginning internally and permeating externally. Regardless of whether your purpose is lofty and socially conscious, or all business, consumers will respond if you can prove that you care about that purpose, and that you’re working to realize it, rather than simply chasing the next dollar. This book contains a clearly explained, proven framework that will make this happen. Written by a veteran of the marketing industry, and the founder of the movement marketing crusade, Activate Brand Purpose is the definitive guide to this revolutionary approach to business growth.

Table of Contents 1 Living in the age of movement 2 Defining movement marketing 3 Business benefits to movement marketing 4 Creating a movement inside your company 5 Expanding that movement beyond your company 6 Movement marketing in practice – the step-by-step guide 7 The power of purpose – local and global 8 Movement marketing in the future

Marketing Strategy Overcome Common Pitfalls and Create Effective Marketing

This book

an easy-to-follow framework for creating a marketing strategy which is scalable and « Presents adaptable and can be applied to any business or industry by thought-leader Jenna Tiffany, who has been has been recognized as one of the top 100 « Written female marketers to follow worldwide by Search Engine Journal the most common pitfalls in everyday marketing practice and provides tools to pre« Identifies emptively avoid them key concepts with practical tasks for the reader to complete, to cement their « Supports understanding of the tasks discussed

Description Tasked with creating marketing strategy? This book is for you. Learn about the most useful tools and models, dodge common mistakes, and optimize your marketing strategy success, with this practical and adaptable framework from thought-leader Jenna Tiffany. Create an effective marketing strategy for your business with Marketing Strategy, which offers a clear, easy-to-follow overview of why strategy is important, how to create it, how to implement it, and - crucially - how to measure its success. Packed with global examples and case studies, the book opens by discussing the role strategy plays in any organization’s long-term vision. It also discusses the key models and frameworks that can be used to analyze the marketing environment, and offers information on segmentation, targeting and positioning. Importantly, it will outline some of the key challenges likely to crop up, and gives pre-emptive tools for avoiding them. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781789667417 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789667424 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789667431 £60 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Marketing Strategy & Planning

Marketing Strategy is highly practical in approach. Chapters are supported by short tasks to complete throughout, to cement the reader’s understanding of the concepts discussed. Put together, these tasks create an easy to follow, step-by-step framework for creating a marketing strategy. The framework is adaptable and can be applied to any industry or business. Marketing Strategy also includes input from leading marketing strategists including Mark Ritson, Mark Lantrok and Nichola Stott.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Jenna Tiffany is Founder and Strategy Director at marketing agency Let’s Talk Strategy and was recognized in 2019 as one of the top 100 female marketers to follow worldwide by Search Engine Journal. A Chartered Marketer and awarded fellow of the IDM, she has worked with brands such as Shell, Hilton and World Duty-Free, and is an elected member of the prestigious DMA UK Email Marketing Council. Jenna Tiffany is also an international conference speaker and a thought-leader on marketing trends.

136

Marketing & Communications

1 Why is a strategy important? 2 Scenario - where is the business now? 3 Defining your strategy & tactics 4 Planning your marketing campaign 5 Implementing a marketing strategy and plan 6 Measuring success 7 Common pitfalls in marketing strategy

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations Innovation and Best Practice in Logistics Manufacturing & Production Maritime Operations Procurement Retail Supply Chain Supply Chain Sustainability Transport

www.koganpage.com

137

Featured Titles

Lowe's Transport Manager's and Operator's Handbook 2021 David Lowe February 2021 9781789668285

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals Jonathan O'Brien August 2020 9781789662580

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain Simon Templar, Erik Hofmann & Charles Findlay August 2020 9781789663488

The Road to Zero Emissions Dennis Evans, Des Evans & Alistair Williamson August 2020 9781789665604

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

138

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics How to Understand the Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash

This book

« Provides a strategic approach to improving value generation in the supply chain practical solutions applicable to those directly working in supply chain as well as senior « Offers management, directors and investors to this edition: updated case studies from Barco, Casio and Johnson Controls, new chapters « New on strategy-driven S&OP and strategy-driven enterprise, worked examples and practical solutions to improve value generation

the concepts of inventory and working capital, which is overlooked in many of the more « Examines strategic supply chain management texts « Online resources: chapter summary figures and additional technical information

Description Optimize your supply chain using the latest strategic insights from Bram DeSmet on how to improve value generation within your business. Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics is a step-by-step guide to balancing the triangle of service, cost and cash which is the essence of supply chain management. Supply chains have become increasingly strategy-driven, and this Supply Chain Triangle approach puts the supply chain at the heart of the strategy discussion instead of seeing it as a result.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781398600454 £44.99 Ebook: 9781398600478 £44.99 Hardback: 9781398600485 £140 Previous edition: 9780749482572 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information Bram DeSmet is the CEO of Solventure where he advises global production and retail organizations in the domain of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium.

The new edition of Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics focuses on the key business questions that need to be addressed company wide. The information on offer is applicable to those working in supply chain as well as senior managers, directors and investors in the field. Practical solutions are provided to teach readers how to improve value generation and worked examples highlight common issues and how to resolve them. New strategy-driven chapters and updated case studies make this book a valuation resource to those looking to approach supply chains strategically and successfully. Online resources include additional technical information and chapter summary figures.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

139

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle Strategy-Driven S&OP The Strategy-Driven Enterprise The Strategy-Driven Scorecard Implementing the StrategyDriven Enterprise Appendix – Financial Templates – Inventory Management Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management Understanding the Supply Chain

This book

breadth and depth of coverage of supply chain strategy and logistics/distribution including « Unique step-by-step strategic accounts of setting up and operating supply chains for maximum value and the tactical elements of logistics and distribution

examples using current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps, equations) from the « Worked authors’ first-hand experience bring the concepts to life resources: lecture slides (featuring tables, images and formulae from the text), glossary of « Online terms, weblinks, blog articles, video interviews and infographics and flow charts show how the elements of supply chains are interdependent, and a « Figures dedicated chapter on supply chain integration brings them together to this edition: fully revised to include the latest key topics and developments in « New globalization, technology, digital/data and sustainability. Revised and re-ordered chapters, including Logistics Costs and Trade-Offs; Inventory Planning and Forecasting; Road Freight Transport: Vehicle Routing & Scheduling; Logistics Outsourcing and Humanitarian Logistics. New material on reverse logistics and new warehouse equipment (e.g. robots in multi-level grid systems), environmental best practice and cool chain as well as a brand new chapter on International Freight Forwarding

Description Get a complete coverage on all the key aspects of distribution, logistics and supply chain planning and management with clear and straightforward explanations from the definitive guide to supply chain philosophy, strategy and the practicalities of logistics and distribution.

Edition: 6 Date: 03/01/2017 Paperback: 9780749476779 £44.99 Ebook: 9780749476786 £44.99 Previous edition: 9780749466275 Pages: 912 Format (mm): 240x171 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Author Information Alan Rushton is a Director of Dialog Consultants, and was formerly the Director of Graduate Programmes at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management at Cranfield University. He is also a Chartered Fellow of the CILT (UK). Phil Croucher is an independent supply chain consultant and lecturer, has an MSc in Logistics and Distribution Management from Cranfield University and is a Chartered Fellow of CILT (UK). Dr Peter Baker is an independent consultant and lecturer, a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield University and a Chartered Fellow of CILT (UK).

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management is a step-by-step guide to setting up and managing supply chains to add maximum value to the organizations they serve. Benefiting from the author team’s years of practical experience in some of the most challenging environments across the world (from developed economies to third-world countries and war zones), this book will enthuse students and be an invaluable desk reference throughout their careers. The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management offers complete coverage on all the key aspects of distribution, logistics and supply chain planning and management. This is not a compilation of work drawn from a disparate collection of research papers and miscellaneous projects, but a logical and complete view of how supply chains fit together, including minute details of distribution and logistics.

Rights Sold 6th Edition: Greek

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 14 15 16 17 4 18

140

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Concepts of Logistics and Distribution Introduction to Logistics and Distribution Integrated Logistics and the Supply Chain Customer Service and Logistics Channels of Distribution Key Issues and Challenges for Logistics Planning for Logistics Planning Framework for Logistics Logistics Processes Supply Chain Segmentation Logistics Costs and Trade-Offs Logistics Network Planning Logistics Management and Organisation Omnichannel Fulfilment Manufacturing Logistics Procurement, Inventory and Demand Forecasting Procurement and Supply Inventory - The Basic Concepts Inventory and the Supply Chain Inventory Planning and Demand Forecasting Warehousing and Storage Principles of Warehousing

19 Storage and Handling Systems (Palletised) 20 Storage and Handling Systems (Non-Palletised) 21 Order Picking and Packing 22 Receiving and Despatch 23 Warehouse Design 24 Warehouse Management and Information 5 Freight Transport 25 International Logistics - Modal Choice 26 Maritime Transport 27 Air Transport 28 Rail and Intermodal Transport 29 Road Freight Transport Vehicle Selection 30 Road Freight Transport Vehicle Costing 31 Road Freight Transport Planning and Resourcing 32 Road Freight Transport Vehicle Routeing & Scheduling 33 International Freight Forwarding 6 Outsourcing Logistics 34 Outsourcing - Operations & Services 35 Outsourcing - Decision Criteria 36 Outsourcing - The Selection Process 37 Outsourcing Management 7 Operational Management

38 Cost and Performance Monitoring 39 Benchmarking 40 Information and Communication Technology in the Supply Chain 41 Security and Safety 42 Logistics and the Environment 43 Humanitarian Logistics

Health and Safety in Logistics Assessing and Avoiding Risk in Warehousing and Transportation

This book

health and safety from the basic principles such as establishing the best culture, through « Outlines to issues relating to physical and mental health, personal protection equipment, manual and mechanical handling, and safe transport operations

the most up to date regulatory information on health and safety, such as the Health and « Provides Safety at Work Act (HASAWA) on assessment and elimination of risks, compliance and the avoidance of unsafe practices « Focuses in logistics and transportation at vehicles, their maintenance and driving standards as well as the important role of « Looks managers in safe operation, for example by optimum vehicle routing

Description Logistics is a complex industry that exposes employees to a whole variety of risks, such as falling from a height, poor lifting technique, unsafe use of forklifts, or inadequate fire safety provision. Work related accidents within the storage and warehousing industry remain a major issue, with many thousands of reported incidents recorded each year. Health and Safety in Logistics examines each aspect of health and safety in turn, with a focus on warehousing and transportation. Health and Safety in Logistics informs managers of the potential hazards found within the logistics industry and how they can make the workplace as safe as possible for their staff, giving them an indepth knowledge of this vital area.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789663259 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789663266 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789663273 £120 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Logistics

Author Information Jerry Rudd is a logistics consultant. He was formerly Logistics Manager at Gefco and Business Unit Director at Wincanton, working with Waitrose, Sainsburys and British Airways.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

141

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Introduction – The importance of health and safety Basic principles of health and safety Physical health issues Mental health Drug and alcohol issues Personal protection equipment Safe storage and warehouse layout Manual handling Materials handling equipment Fire safety Yard safety Vehicle loading Road vehicle specifications, maintenance and compliance Accident prevention during vehicle operations Transport of dangerous goods by road Vehicle mounted loading equipment Seafreight, rolling motorway and airfreight Miscellaneous issues Health and safety monitoring and audit

E-Logistics A Guide to Supply Chain Information Systems and Technology

This book

the latest insights from leading thinkers to keep readers up to date with the growth and « Provides evolution of e-logistics key technological and business developments, such as cloud computing, social technology « Explains and distributed leger technology, and how they can be applied the strategic role of e-logistics in managing information and information flows within and « Examines between organizations to this edition: new chapters on AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of « New Things, Immersive technology, robotics, drone and last mile deliveries « Online resources: lecture slides, instructor’s manuals and self-test questions and answers

Description E-Logistics serves as the nerve system for the whole supply chain and enables smooth information flow within and between organizations. This new and updated edition provides the latest and most comprehensive coverage on digitalization in logistics and supply chain. It covers all transport modes and the role of ICT in supporting an integrated freight and supply chain network.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9780749496883 £49.99 Ebook: 9780749496890 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789661194 £160 Previous edition: 9780749472665 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Author Information Dr Yingli Wang is a lecturer in logistics and operations management at Cardiff Business School. Her research focusses on e-logistics and has attracted funding from various funding bodies. Before embarking on her academic career, she worked at Nestlé China in various senior managerial roles. Dr Stephen Pettit is a member of the Transport and Shipping Research Group within the Logistics and Operations Management Section at Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a wide range of transport-related research projects and has recently focused on international logistics, port operations and management, and the application of information and communication technology in the fields of transport, logistics and supply chain management.

E-Logistics provides a cross-academic and industry perspective with leading academics and practitioners as contributing authors. A variety of successful e-logistics business approaches are discussed covering a range of commercial sectors and transport modes. Subsequent chapters address in depth support systems for B2C and B2B e-commerce and e-fulfilment, warehouse management, RFID, electronic marketplaces, global supply network visibility and service chain automation. Industry case studies are used to support the discussion. The new edition also covers emerging technologies such as AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of Things, Robotics, drone and last mile deliveries.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 3 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 15

142

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

E-logistics development E-logistics – An introduction Emerging technology Supporting ICT infrastructure for future logistics E-logistics for transport modes and nodes ICT for airfreight management ICT for rail freight management ICT for efficient road freight transport Electronic bills of lading Port-centric ICT system Automating e-logistics B2C e-commerce and fulfilment The challenges of e-commerce on warehousing in the future Advanced warehouse management systems and innovations RFID in logistics The role of GS1 in logistics and e-procurement Automating a logistics service chain Regional and global e-logistics Regional electronic marketplaces to improve logistics

16 Trade and transport electronic single windows 17 Single window systems for global supply chain management 18 End-to-end global visibility and order management for integrated supply and demand chains 5 Future outlook 19 ICT in multimodal transport and technological trends

Managing the Demand-Driven Supply Chain How to build resilience, responsiveness and sustainability in a market-driven network

This book

« Examines all the advantages of the move from forecast push to demand planning « Presents methods needed to achieve 50% less average inventory « Step-by-step advice on how to significantly reduce lead times and costs of solid theory and research supported by practical examples of using these methods in « Consists industry « Online resources: Lecture slides of replenishment planners and forecasting tools Description Blend the theory, research and practice behind demand planning, gives examples of successful integration of demand planning into the supply chain and provides vital information on how to adopt the demand planning process with this book. The examples used in Managing the Demand-driven Supply Chain and supporting online resources consistently follow a hypothetical company and its connected supply chain, allowing the students to engage with an ‘end-to-end’ practical exercise of the challenges of managing a supply chain. The accompanying (graded in difficulty) spreadsheet building exercises allow active participation in experiencing such challenges. Managing the Demand-driven Supply Chain has a logical, connected approach from one chapter to the next, leading from the basics to issues/challenges of the day. The book begins by focusing on the structural and routine aspects of a supply chain, before moving on to the complex issues of supply chain management and demand planning. The final chapters deal with restrictive and opportunistic challenges to the implementation.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/05/2021 Paperback: 9781398600591 £49.99 Ebook: 9781398600607 £49.99 Hardback: 9781398600614 £160 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Sebastian Kitching is a Senior Lecturer at Swansea University with ten years experience of teaching Operations and Supply Chain Management modules, at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels. Research interests are focussed on using system dynamics to investigate supply and demand challenges posed in the management of perishable inventory within the supply chain. Prior to academia, he spent a number of years implementing automated inventory management systems for major retailers in the UK as well as six years in Japan where he developed his interest in demand-driven service operations.

143

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

The design of the text has the module co-ordinator in mind. The chapters form the basis of the lectures and are accompanied by online resources, such as slides, teaching notes, reading lists. This allows for a complete module to be easily created from the core text. A seminar, along with additional material features in the online resources and is composed mainly of practical exercises (mostly quantitative) related to the theoretical presentations of the connected chapter. This book is also suitable for online only courses, providing ample options for students to self-study through supporting guidance notes.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Supply Chain Components of Structure, facilities, transportation 3 Procurement, Supplier Sourcing, Selection and Relationships 4 Network Design Options and strategies for delivering products/services 5 Responsiveness and meeting customer demand 6 Issues of Inventory such as cycle and safety, lead-time management, postponement principle etc 7 Dynamics of a Demand Driven Approach 8 Achieving an Integrated Supply Chain and barriers, IT facilitation 9 Vulnerability and Resilience 10 Sustainability and Reverse Logistics

Retail Innovation Reframed How to Transform Operations and Achieve Purpose-led Growth and Resilience

This book

disruption in the retail industry, the opportunity innovation offers and the operations « Examines processes that need to be implemented the latest thinking on how to manage retail operations successfully and demonstrate value « Provides to clients and organisations guidelines on how to overcome obstacles in disruptive retail environments and reframe your « Gives business operations at the right ways to analyse and test new innovations, providing evidence, tools and business « Looks operations models case studies of Walmart, Amazon, Telstra, Sears, KMart, Starbucks and Nike looking at how « Includes they manage retail operations in a disruptive environment

Description This is a book by retailers for retailers. Authors Gareth Jude and Andrew Smith include case studies of the business operations of large, established retailers such as Walmart, Target (USA), Nike, Inditex and Lush who are thriving while their competitors in the same sector struggle. They look at how their successes contrast starkly with the struggles of discount department stores, Sears and Kmart. Some retailers have been able to adapt to the changing environment, but most struggle to innovate and continue to compete using last century tactics. Throughout this book the authors demonstrate that the difference between success and failure in the new environment is not down to the execution of retail basics, as it has been for centuries, but the ability to reframe. To get the competitive edge, retailers need to change business operations in order to solve different consumer problems in an internet world. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781398600911 £29.99 Ebook: 9781398600935 £29.99 Hardback: 9781398600928 £90 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Operations

Author Information Gareth Jude is Co-Founder & Asia Pacific Leader of ThinkUncommon. He was formerly group wide merchandise/marketing and store planning manager for the DSE division of Woolworth’s. In the latter role he led the launch of Australia’s first full range, fully trading web site by a traditional retailer. Gareth Jude lectures at Sydney, Macquarie, UTS and Shanghai Jiao Tong Universities. Andrew Smith is co-founder and America’s leader of ThinkUncommon. He was formerly the Head of Retail Operations for Telstra in Australia. It was in this role that Andrew Smith led the team that opened Telstra’s internationally recognized and award-winning flagship stores, as well as a successful innovation strategy that boosted customer experience, sales performance, productivity and reduced operating costs. Andrew Smith took on a transformation role to create Telstra’s international, all segment and all product Customer Experience strategy.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

4 5

7 8 9

Logistics, Supply Chain &

144 Operations

Innovation and retail operations management models Retail innovation as an operations process How to build an retail operations launch pad and the importance of organisational purpose, culture and team alignment Finding the most sustainable innovations Get innovation ready - why it can’t be done without sponsorship, cross-functional teams and adequate resourcing and supply chains Analyse and design the operations management solution - how to do retail prototyping properly Make the design and scale it - how to roll out a successful retail innovation and process Embedding new initiatives into the fabric of business operations How to ensure that retail reframing is an operations management success

Road Passenger Transport Management Planning and Coordinating Passenger Transport Operations

This book

« Essential guide to cost-effective, sustainable road passenger transport management a complete set of management tools equipping readers for success in the passenger « Features transport field essential guidelines on topics such as coordinating staff training, putting together « Includes performance reports for directors and arranging vehicle maintenance « Online resources: sample performance reports and target assessment forms. Description Road passenger transport management is an important role, involving the planning and coordinating of passenger transport operations, including routes and schedules. Managers ensure that passengers reach their destinations safely, on time and in the most cost-effective way. Road Passenger Transport Management covers all the essential tasks a transport manager is expected to master. Road Passenger Transport Management provides tips and tools for working with customers, planning routes and scheduling delivery times, as well as managing a team of supervisors, administration staff and drivers. The authors include guidelines for coordinating staff training and arranging vehicle maintenance, MOTs and tax payments, as well as organizing vehicle replacements and managing contracts and developing new business. This is a contributed book, with expertise shared from wellknown academics and practitioners who have spent many years in the passenger transport field. The tools and case studies in this vital new guide will enable readers to learn new skills or build on existing expertise. Online supporting resources include sample performance reports and target assessment forms.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9780749497019 £44.99 Ebook: 9780749497026 £44.99 Hardback: 9781789660470 £140 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Transport

Author Information Anthony Francis is a consultant providing guidance on operating and commercial issues affecting the road, rail and aviation transport industries to passenger transport companies. He previously worked in senior strategic roles for the Department of Transport, the Strategic Rail Authority and Arriva. David Hurdle is an independent transport consultant and a transport and town planner. He has written and spoken extensively on sustainable transport issues. He has worked for local government and the public transport industry.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

6 7 8 9

10 11

145

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

12 The future – AI – Keep Definition (bus, coach, light watching the horizon rail, taxi, demand responsive, 13 Case studies to highlight community transport) best and perhaps not so best History and heritage and how practices that has shaped the business Its purpose and importance (objective) The market for public transport and its relationship with Society and other transport modes, plus land use and planning Commercial considerations, fares & charges, other income sources, and sensitivity to market changes Business responsibilities Relationships with other transport modes Legal framework in relationships, government bodies, other stakeholders Planning – Research, consultation, business case, options, route planning, scheduling in depot locations Operations (forward planning and immediate day-to-day) Human resources (recruitment, training, retention, career development)

The Road to Zero Emissions The Future of Trucks, Transport and Automotive Industry Supply Chains

This book

the new technologies, artificial intelligence systems and applications needed to drive a « Examines sustainable trucking industry how the acceleration of the adoption of zero emission transport will be linked to « Explains infrastructure investments, supported by case studies from companies such as Jaguar, Land Rover and Honda Presents the many other factors that will impact the survivability of Diesel as an energy source in the future, for the global manufacturers of Diesel cars and trucks Details new players in freight sustainability across four continents and examines future plans and models, which manufacturing companies are planning to role out by 2050

« «

Description The emergence of electric trucks will present new challenges, from changes to the facility and investment in tooling and training, to embracing new business models to offset the reduction in maintenance required. The Road to Zero Emissions examines the growing impact of technology, artificial intelligence systems and applications which will drive massive change in the industry.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 10/09/2020 Paperback: 9781789665604 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789665611 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789665628 £160 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Transport

Author Information Dennis Evans has held senior positions in truck manufacturing companies around the world, most recently with a division of VW Commercial Vehicles. He has worked in the UK, Europe, USA, South America, Middle East and Africa, with all of the major vehicle manufacturers. Des Evans is an honorary Professor within the Advanced Services Group at Aston University Business School. He was awarded an O.B.E. for services to the Motor Industry. Alistair Williamson started as a technical engineer with Bedford Trucks and graduated through senior engineering roles at Scania UK and MAN AG, becoming Global Marketing Director for MAN AG based in Munich. He has operated his own successful Marketing consultancy for 14 years.

146

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

The Internet of Things (IoT) presents a significant challenge to Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs), Tier Suppliers and Transport & Logistics providers. Companies will need to master the demands of improved productivity and customer expectations driven by vast amounts of intelligence generated by integrated systems embedded in today’s products. The Road to Zero Emissions presents case studies of innovative new entrants into the future automotive space to provide examples to readers of how to adapt and capitalize upon the opportunities available alongside these challenges. The authors also present future plans and models from major manufacturing companies to guide readers in how to develop a forward-thinking zero emission strategy.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

4 5 6 7

The development of alternative energy sources for transport The market for transport products and services The impact of regulation all around the world on the utilization of alternative energies The Internal Combustion Engine platform (ICE) and the Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) Changes to production and supply chain development The distribution model for sales and aftersales and the impact of digital services Future scenarios for the truck and transport industry

Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2021

This book

essential information on professional competence, technical standards and goods vehicle « Provides operations « Offers a definitive one-stop reference source for those working in the haulage industry to this edition: the latest guidelines and regulations, the impact of Brexit on the transport « New industry and streamlined content to focus on key issues

Description Maintain your understanding of the rules governing road transport operators in the UK, Ireland and Europe to ensure the safe and legal operation of your fleet. Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2021 is the best-selling guide available on operational rules and guidelines governing the UK, Ireland and the EU’s road transport operators. The handbook is written and designed for transport managers, fleet operators, owner-driver hauliers and students involved in the transport industry. This is an essential resource to maintain an informed grasp on the most pressing issues in today’s transport industry. It includes details on professional competence, insurance, international transport of animals, dangerous and perishable goods, international haulage and customs procedures. Now in its 51st edition Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2021 remains the reference guide for those in the transport industry. This manual includes guidance for drivers in the Republic of Ireland and mainland Europe, along with the rules and penalties governing these regions. New to this edition of Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2021: Edition: 51 Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781789668285 £59.99 Ebook: 9781789668292 £59.99 Hardback: 9781789668308 £180 Previous edition: 9781789663136 Pages: 520 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Transport

Author Information Glen Davies is a transport and logistics specialist and founder of AtoH. He formerly worked as a Freight and Fleet Programme Manager for Transport for London and established the Fleet Operator Recognition Scheme (FORS). He is an active member of the CILT Transport & Logistics Safety Forum. David Lowe has been involved in the road haulage industry for many years and is an experienced consultant and freelance writer. He has written notable books on transport including The Professional LGV Driver’s Handbook and The Pocket Guide to LGV Drivers’ Hours and Tachograph Law.

147

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

- The latest developments relevant to managers and operators - The impact of Brexit on the transport industry - Streamlined content to focus on key issues

Table of Contents 22 Safety Goods vehicle operator 23 Energy savings opportunity licensing scheme (ESOS) 2 Professional competence 3 Goods vehicle drivers’ hours and working time 4 Tachographs – Fitment and use requirements 5 Driver licensing and licence penalties 6 Driver testing and training 7 Vehicle registration, HGV road user levy, excise duty and trade Licences 8 Insurance (vehicles and goods in transit) and conditions of carriage 9 Road traffic law 10 Goods vehicle dimensions and weights 11 Construction and use of vehicles 12 Vehicle lighting and marking 13 Goods vehicle plating, annual testing and vehicle inspections 14 Light vehicle (MoT) testing 15 Maintenance advice 16 The safety of loads on vehicles 17 Carriage of livestock 18 Special types vehicles 19 UK carriage by road regulations 20 Insurance 21 Fuel economy aids 1

Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals A Proven Approach for Negotiations with Suppliers

This book

a ground-breaking new approach to delivering winning negotiations in procurement and « Offers supply chain management « Provides the vital tools and comprehensive tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation purchasers to evaluate a supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their « Helps negotiation strategy to this edition: changing themes in procurement such as near shoring, update of contextual « New global factors to negotiation.

Description Highly effective negotiation skills are an essential element of a purchasing and supply chain professional’s toolkit. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a stepby-step approach to delivering winning negotiations and getting game-changing results. It provides purchasers and supply chain managers with the necessary tools and tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals allows the purchasing professional or the buying team to evaluate the supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their negotiation strategy depending on concession strategies, cultural influences and game theory. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a strong framework for discussion in advance of the meeting, allowing the negotiator to plan their agenda, objectives and tactics. Based upon the Red Sheet® Methodology, this book is a proven and collaborative technique used by many companies globally. The new edition includes supply chain planning, updates on multi-party negotiation for supply chain negotiations, Brexit as a retrospective example of negotiation and how the negotiation capability will need to change in the future. Edition: 3 Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789662580 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789662597 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789662603 £160 Previous edition: 9780749477301 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Procurement

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider. With over 30 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their negotiation and purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of negotiation and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management, now in its second edition, The Buyer’s Toolkit and Category Management in Purchasing, now in its fourth edition, all published by Kogan Page.

148

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Rights Sold 3rd Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 Introducing negotiation 2 Countering the seller advantage 3 Red sheet 4 Planning the negotiation 5 Negotiation across cultures 6 Personality and negotiation 7 Power 8 Game theory 9 Building the concession strategy 10 The negotiation event 11 Winning event tactics 12 Body language 13 Managing what you say and how you say it 14 Post-negotiation activities 15 Negotiation as a key enabler for success 16 Appendix - The Red Sheet negotiation templates

A Practical Guide to eAuctions for Procurement How to Maximize Impact with eSourcing and eNegotiation

This book

practical guidance for procurement organizations on eSourcing from Maersk, a world leading « Offers organization a proven process for developing an eSourcing and eNegotiation strategy as well as change « Presents management initiatives for securing buy-in internally in the organization practical learnings from more than 10,000 eSourcing programmes across all spend « Features categories a new perspective on the future of eAuctions which includes the increased development of « Provides AI and Robotic Process Automation within the negotiation discipline

Description A Practical Guide to eAuctions for Procurement provides practical guidance to procurement professionals on how to realize the potential of eSourcing and eAuctions. It has global scope and features practical learnings from more than 10,000 eSourcing programmes across all spend categories. Author Jacob Gorm Larsen, Head of eProcurement at Maersk, describes how eSourcing works in practice and what it takes to drive adoption successfully across a global organization. Maersk are the first organization in the world to introduce robots which are executing eSourcing end-to-end and have thereby kicked-off a transformation that will fundamentally change procurement negotiations in the coming years. The book presents a proven process for developing an eSourcing and eNegotiation strategy, along with a catalogue of change management initiatives for securing buy-in internally in the organization. These are all demonstrated with practical examples, templates and advice that can be adopted by the reader. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/02/2021 Paperback: 9781398600287 £44.99 Ebook: 9781398600294 £44.99 Hardback: 9781398600300 £160 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Procurement

Author Information Jacob Gorm Larson is Head of Digital Procurement in Maersk with responsibility for developing and executing the digital strategy for procurement. He heads up a global team located in Copenhagen, Mumbai, Manila, Shanghai and Panama.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 12 13 14 4 15 16 17 18 19

149

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Understanding eSourcing and eNegotiation What is an eAuction? Applicability, when can you use eAuctions? The history of eAuctions Value in a theoretical perspective eNegotiation strategy Game theory - eNegotiations as a strategic game Negotiation theory eAuction formats eNegotiation strategy objectives Supplier relationships maintain relationships eNegotiation strategy framework Bidder engagement The value proposition for suppliers Supplier communication Supplier Training Driving usage and adoption Introduce a Center of Excellence (COE) for Support, Technology and Governance Ensure executive support to eAuctions Make it strategic Drive it with hard KPI’s Address the myths

20 Re-inventing yourself every year 21 Examples of best-practice 22 The selling never stops 5 The future of eNegotiation 23 The accelerating digitization of negotiations 24 AI powered negotiation guides 25 Automating negotiation processes 26 The future of eAuctions, cup half full or half empty

Warehouse Management A Complete Guide to Improving Efficiency and Minimizing Costs in the Modern Warehouse

This book

« Provides essential advice on how to tackle the challenges faced by today’s warehouse managers the reader with practical guidance on how to operate an efficient and cost-effective « Equips warehouse « Delivers new case study initiatives directly relevant for application in the workplace to this edition: definitive updates on warehouse design, technology and robotics and the « New increasing challenges of e-commerce resources: downloadable warehouse tools and audit checklists for analysis and application « Online into own operational environment, along with PowerPoint slides as study aids for students Description Offering comprehensive advice on all aspects of managing a warehouse, the third edition of Warehouse Management is an ideal guide and detailed reference book for anyone looking to gain a real insight into warehouse operations. It examines everything from the latest technological advances, operations and people management to current environmental issues. This third edition of Warehouse Management includes definitive updates across the industry, such as the vast expansion of warehouse technology and robotics, warehouse design and the increasing challenges posed by e-commerce. Gwynne Richards tackles the core challenges for today’s managers, offering experienced advice on how to reduce lead times, increase productivity and improve customer service. Revamped with more practical case studies and an array of downloadable warehouse tools, this new edition of Warehouse Management includes useful warehouse audit checklists and is firmly supported with insightful photographs, video links and projections.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/11/2017 Paperback: 9780749479770 £44.99 Ebook: 9780749479787 £44.99 Previous edition: 9780749469344 Pages: 528 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain

Rights Sold

Author Information

Table of Contents

Gwynne Richards has over 30 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners. He is also the co-author of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit with Susan Grinstead, also published by Kogan Page. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport.

150

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

1st Edition: Arabic 2nd Edition: Bahasa-Indonesian, Chinese (Simplified), Polish, Russian

Introduction 1 The Role of the Warehouse 2 Role of the Warehouse Manager 3 Warehouse Processes: Receiving and Put-away 4 Warehouse Processes: Pick Preparation 5 Picking Strategies and Equipment 6 Order-picking Methods 7 Warehouse Processes from Replenishment to Despatch and Beyond 8 Warehouse Management Systems 9 Warehouse Layout 10 Storage and Handling Equipment 11 Resourcing a Warehouse 12 Warehouse Costs 13 Performance Management 14 Outsourcing 15 Health and Safety 16 The Warehouse and the Environment 17 The Warehouse of the Future Appendix 1 – Warehouse Audit Checklists Appendix 2 – Barcodes Websites of Companies That Have Contributed to This Book and Other Useful Websites

Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations

Financing the Endto-End Supply Chain A Reference Guide to Supply Chain Finance

This book

readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply « Provides chain theory and practice to tackle key issues and adapt supply chain finance to individual « Combines organizations’ circumstances several initiatives to coordinate and develop cross-border financing from institutions such « Presents as the World Bank to this edition: interviews from SCF platform providers, new examples on working capital « New management, additional learning activities and a terminology list

Description Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain provides readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply chain. It demonstrates the importance of the strategic relationship between the physical supply of goods and services and the associated financial flows. The book provides a clear introduction, demonstrating the importance of the strategic relationship between supply chain and financial communities within an organization. This book links together treasury, banking, supply chain, systems, IT, and key stakeholders.

Edition: 2 Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789663488 £44.99 Ebook: 9781789663495 £44.99 Hardback: 9781789663518 £140 Previous edition: 9780749471415 Pages: 456 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information Simon Templar is a founding member of the Supply Chain Finance Community, a non-forprofit association. Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with 20 years’ industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MSc’s at Cranfield University. Erik Hofmann is Head of Supply Chain Finance-Lab at the University of St.Gallen in Switzerland. He is also Director of the Institute of Supply Chain Management (ISCMHSG) and Boardmember of the Supply Chain Finance Community (SCFC). Charles Findlay is an experienced Business Strategy, Supply Chain and Procurement consultant , an agel investor and a Director of State of Flux.

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain will help senior supply chain practitioners to build collaboration, improve relationships and enhance trust between supply chain partners. With its combination of theory and practice it tackles vital issues including physical, information and financial flows, and tailoring supply chain finance to individual organisations’ circumstances. Recognizing that supply chain finance means different things in different countries, the authors also consider various initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing as well as including an agenda for national and international policy makers. The new edition features interviews from SCF platform providers on how ecosystems are involved in supply chain finance, additional learning activities for students and new examples on working capital management.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

151

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Supply chain management and financial performance The big issue – Working capital management Supply chain management evolution The concept – A case for supply chain finance The ecosystem – Organizations involved in a supply chain finance The value proposition – Options for supply chain finance Implementation – Bringing SCF programmes to life The global setting – Cross border issues for supply chain finance The next thing – New frontiers for supply chain finance

Strategic Value Chain Management Models for Competitive Advantage

This book

how to integrate customer responsiveness and agile supply chains into the overall « Demonstrates value chain strategy research-based models and frameworks which introduce new ways of driving effective « Provides strategic decision-making « Presents an interdisciplinary approach, highlighting the important field of systems sciences real-life examples of how to increase competitive advantage through effective value chain « Includes management, from large corporates such as BAT and Maersk « Online Resources: powerpoints summarising key theories and applications

Description A supply chain is the process of all parties involved in fulfilling a customer request, while a value chain is a set of interrelated activities a company uses to create value and a competitive advantage. In Strategic Value Chain Management the authors bring together a variety of disciplines, showing how to move from traditional supply chain management to value chain management. Research from the (ISM) International School of Management, Germany, originating from a network of companies in a range of sectors, is integrated with case studies to demonstrate particular concepts.

New

Strategic Value Chain Management brings together theory and practice and presents tangible ways of creating competitiveness in a changing world through the use of effective models and frameworks. Challenging the traditional Porters Five Forces Model, the authors introduce the important academic disciplines of cybernetics and systems sciences as essential drivers of strategy within the supply chain, supported by case studies illustrating their implementation.

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9780749484422 £44.99 Ebook: 9780749484439 £44.99 Hardback: 9781789660418 £140 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information Qeis Kamran is a Professor at ISM International School of Management, Dortmund. He previously worked in sales, management and leadership roles in retail, energy, oil and petrochemicals industries. Dr Rolf Neise was the Global Head of Logistics Operations at BAT (British American Tobacco plc.) responsible for defining Logistics Excellence in the End-to-End Supply Chain. He’s currently a lecturer at the International School of Management (ISM) in Germany and a senior consultant supporting multinational companies in optimizing their supply chain management and logistics structures.

152

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Table of Contents 1

The strategic management framework and supply chain strategy 1 The role of strategy in general management 2 Strategic requirements and needs of today’s economy 3 Systems theory and cybernetics and the supply chain 4 A new model to shape supply chain strategy 2 Supply chain management as a key strategy enabler 5 The role of SCM in a company’s strategy 6 Supply Chain drivers and metrics 7 Supply Chain performance to achieve strategic fit 8 The strategy implementation and adaptation process of SCM 3 Case studies 9 BAT 10 Daimler 11 Mondi 12 Unilever

Supply Chain Risk Management How to Design and Manage Resilient Supply Chains

This book

first edition, Supply Chain Risk Management, won the ACA Bruel Special Mention Prize in Paris « The for its contribution to the purchasing and supply chain industry key areas of supply chain risk management, such as cargo crime, climate change and « Explains cyber-crime case studies, such as Dell’s response to climate changes, the Port of Antwerp cyber breach « Provides and the Yemen Air Cargo Plot, to embed learning using applicable examples to this edition: a new chapter on ‘The threat of supply chain cyber crime’, additional case « New studies, the latest thinking on political risk as well as updates throughout « Online resources: lecture slides

Description From political uncertainty to trade disrupts and cyber threats, the risk environment is continuously evolving, and new challenges frequently arise demanding immediate attention to avoid disruption to supply chains. Supply Chain Risk Management is the guide to professionals and academics on how to recognize, review and react to these risks. This book is a practical learning tool which explores a wide range of external threats using case studies to embed knowledge. The third edition of Supply Chain Risk Management offers a comprehensive framework to understanding risk and how to engineer resilience into the supply chain. This book details how to approach various threats, including natural disasters, climate change, cargo crime and piracy and terrorism and security, and uses recent, topic examples to demonstrate how to successfully manage these risks. Academic pedagogy such as objectives, summaries and key point checklists in each chapter help strengthen learning. The new edition also provides up-to-date online resources. Edition: 3 Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789666373 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789666380 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789666397 £160 Previous edition: 9780749480158 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information John Manners-Bell is the CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is also Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University.

Rights Sold 2nd Edition: Turkish

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

153

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

A framework for understanding risk Engineering supply chain resilience Industry sector resilience to supply chain threats Natural disasters and pandemics Climate change and emissions policy Economic risks to the supply chain Societal risks to supply chains Corruption in the logistics industry Cargo crime and piracy The threat of supply chain cyber crime Political risks in supply chains Illicit supply chains Terrorism and security

Global Logistics New Directions in Supply Chain Management

This book

« Provides expert insights on a range of topics relating to logistics and supply chains guidance on how to improve logistics, supply chain management and operational « Offers effectiveness important trends, key challenges, and latest developments in logistics and supply chain « Examines management to this edition: a revised structure and focus, a range of new topics including the supply « New chain of the future, ethical supply chains and supply chain leadership Description Logistics and the supply chain management are well established as key strategic functions within organizations. When undertaken effectively, businesses can thrive. However, these are broad and multifaceted subjects with constant developments and possibilities for improvement. From the advent of new technologies and data in the supply chain, new approaches towards sustainability and innovative methods for improving efficiency in response to market needs and competition. Increasingly, there is a need for information to assist in forming long term plans, developing effective strategies and adapting to fundamentals changes in the industry. Global Logistics provides expert guidance on the key issues in logistics in a thought-provoking manner to help answer questions and inform decisions.

Edition: 8 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781398600003 £49.99 Ebook: 9781398600010 £49.99 Hardback: 9781398600027 £140 Previous edition: 9780749471330 Pages: 504 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information Edward Sweeney is Professor of Logistics and Systems, and Director of the Aston Logistics & Systems Institute at Aston University. He is a fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT) and Chairman of the Logistics Research Network (LRN) conference organised by the association. Previously, he was Director at the National Institute for Transport and Logistics (NITL). He is a member of the international editorial boards of several leading academic journals and an advisor to Dubai-based Supply Chain and Logistics Group (SCLG). Donald Waters has over thirty years’ experience of teaching and working in logistics and operations management. He is a visiting professor at various universities, including University of Calgary, Warsaw School of Economics, Czech Management Centre, University of Quebec at Montreal, University of Sheffield, Henley Management College and Edinburgh Business School. He is the author of several well-known logistics books.

Global Logistics presents a varied and international perspective guide to understanding and applying insights on logistics and supply chain. This book has a clear and informative approach to the foundations of what is supply chain management all the way through to the future of the supply chain. The eighth edition also covers important topics such as: - Strategic issues in contemporary logistics and supply chain management - Improving logistics and supply chain management and operational effectiveness - Managing global supply chains - Sustainability and the people element

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5

2 6 7 8 9 10 3 11

154

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Background, definitions and context Introduction [Edward Sweeney] What is SCM and why is it important? [Edward Sweeney] New directions in logistics [Martin Christopher] The strategic dimension of SCM [Daniel Park] Linking supply chain management to shareholder value [Heimo Losbichler and Farzad Mahmoodi] Strategic issues in contemporary logistics and SCM Risk in the supply chain [Lars Stemmler] Managing supply chain vulnerability [Alan Braithwaite] Building a resilient supply chain [Richard Wilding] Building more agile supply chains [Remko van Hoek] Using marketing and logistics to fulfil customer needs [David B Grant] Improving logistics and SCM operational effectiveness New procurement directions in SCM [Louise Knight]

12 Optimizing the movement of freight by road [Alan McKinnon] 13 Retail logistics [John Fernie] 4 Managing global supply chains 14 Trends and strategies in global logistics and supply chain management [Christian F Durach, Frank Straube and Andreas Wieland] 15 Global sourcing and supply [Alan Braithwaite] 16 Outsourcing: the result of global supply chains? [Stephen Rinsler] 17 International supply chain relationships [Patrick Daly] 18 Developments in Western European strategies [Michael Browne, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn] 19 Logistics strategies for Central and Eastern Europe [Grzegorz M Augustyniak] 20 Recent development of e-tailing and its logistics in China [James J Wang] 21 North American logistics [ Jean-Paul Rodrigue and Markus Hesse] 5 Sustainability and the people dimension

22 Delivering sustainability through supply chain management [Kirstie McIntyre] 23 People powering contemporary supply chains [ John Gattorna] 24 Supply chain leadership [Richard Atkinson] 25 Supply chain talent management [Bethany Fovargue and David Leach] 26 Ethical SCM [Steve New] 27 Key issues in humanitarian supply chains [Yasmin Sabri and George Fenton] 6 Engineering the supply chain of the future 28 Effective deployment of technology in supply chains [Witold Bahr and Edward Sweeney] 29 Performance measurement and management in the supply chain [Alan Braithwaite] 30 Supply chain design [Aris Matopoulos] 31 Supply chain programme and project management [Shan Rajegopal] 32 The supply chain of the future? [Edward Sweeney]

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics Understanding the Challenges of Production, Operation and Sustainability in the Food Industry

This book

« Examines the food supply chain from production through to distribution « Explains current trends in the industry, new challenges and emerging technologies and innovations to this edition: food innovation, emerging trends including data analytics within the food « New supply chain, Post-Brexit challenges to food supply chains and veganism, as well as online resources international case studies from Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks to help readers embed « Provides learning « Online resources: lecture slides Description First edition WINNER: ACA-Bruel 2015 - Prix des Associations Food supply chains are integral in ensuring that food makes it from the farm to the table. But the food industry faces a constant challenge in making sure this happens and does so consistently. Shortages make front page news, whereas normal operations are often unnoteworthy. Understanding food supply chains has never been more important. The new edition of Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics is the guide to all aspects of food supply chains. This book examines food production, operational challenges and the future challenges of the industry and sustainability. The emergence of new technologies, which are key in increasing the effectiveness and efficiency of processes, such as blockchain and data analytics are discussed. As are wider trends including veganism and local sourcing.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Paperback: 9781398600126 £49.99 Ebook: 9781398600133 £49.99 Hardback: 9781398600140 £160 Previous edition: 9780749473648 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain

Author Information Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management and former Head of Logistics, Operations and Hospitality Management at the University of Huddersfield. He has experience of leading and working on various research projects in a diverse range of management and supply chain related topics, including projects relating to food supply chain risks, food sustainability and food value chains.

Case studies from Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks help the reader understand topics. Online resources include lecture slides.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified), Polish

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 11 12 13 14 15

155

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Introduction to food supply chains Food production Food production Food manufacturing Operational challenges Food retailing Food logistics Challenges in international food supply chains Collaboration and relationships Food sourcing and procurement Risk management Technology trends in food supply chains Sustainability and future challenges Food regulation, safety and quality Food innovation Sustainability challenges in food supply chains Food sector and economic regeneration Food security and future challenges

A Circular Economy Handbook How to Build a More Resilient, Competitive and Sustainable Business

This book

guidance on how to move away from the ‘take, make, dispose’ approach towards a circular « Provides economy model that regenerates goods into new products how to create value instead of waste at every stage in the supply cycle, with real examples « Explains and case studies covering ecodesign, food waste apps, industrial manufacturing and key legislation changes effecting circular economies New to this edition: circular economy framework 2.0, ecodesign, food & agriculture, recycled fabrics in fashion logistics, new chapter on packaging and examples from Africa, India and other developing countries Online resources: lecture slides with figures and tables from every chapter

« «

Description WINNER: 2018 Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain - The Committee Special Prize The growing global consumption of resources highlights that our current approaches to production and business are fundamentally flawed and will rapidly become outdated and problematic. Engaged businesses are now increasingly re-thinking product design, material choices, business models and supply chains, and adopting the principles of the circular economy. Through decoupling resources from consumption, products and materials remain in use, waste is reduced and cost-savings are increased. A Circular Economy Handbook is the comprehensive guide to the circular economy and is designed to help the reader create future-fit, sustainable strategies moving forward.

Edition: 2 Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789665314 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789665321 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789665338 £160 Previous edition: 9780749476755 Pages: 432 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

Author Information Catherine Weetman is a Visiting Fellow at the University of Huddersfield, a Vice-Chair of the Environment and Sustainability Forum at the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transportation and holds an MSc in Logistics from Cranfield University. She has experience working for Tesco, Kellogg’s and DHL, and has a background in industrial engineering in manufacturing and retail distribution, logistics solution design and logistics product development and supply chain consulting.

156

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

Now in its second edition, A Circular Economy Handbook provides a holistic framework for the design of supply chain and supporting business models and includes tools the reader can use to generate ideas. Using real examples across a range of market sectors, this is a must-read for businesses, students and policymakers to understand the theory and fast-developing practice of the circular economy.

Table of Contents 1

An overview of the circular economy 1 The circular economy – What is it? 2 The design and supply chain 3 Circular economy business models 4 Circular economy enablers and accelerators 2 How are businesses adopting circular economy models? 5 The ‘Great Acceleration’ 6 Food and agriculture 7 Fashion and textiles 8 Consumer electricals and electronics 9 Industrial manufacturing 3 What does this mean for supply chains? 10 Supply chain strategy and planning 11 Supply chain – Upstream – Product design, sourcing and procurement 12 Supply chain – Midstream – The manufacturing process 13 Supply chain – Downstream – Distribution and reverse logistics 4 Implementation 14 Making the business case and starting the journey

Maritime Logistics A Guide to Contemporary Shipping and Port Management

This book

a comprehensive overview of maritime logistics covering changes in analytics and real « Provides time data to improve operational efficiencies the latest risks and threats within the port and shipping industry such as the propagation « Examines effects on port disruption, and how recent technological developments such as improved analysis of real time data information seek to prevent these risks New to this edition: updates on real time data to improve operational efficiencies, capacity optimization, scheduling and agility, asset utilization within port management, route planning, integration and KPIs in intermodal shipping

Description Maritime logistics has been traditionally regarded as the primary means of transporting parts and finished goods on a global scale. Globalization and the rapid increase in world trade in the past decade have contributed to greater demand for international transport and logistics and, consequently, the expansion of the maritime industry. The dramatic changes in the mode of world trade and cargo transportation make it more important than ever to have a clear understanding of the way in which freight is transported by sea and the role of ports in this exchange. Maritime Logistics examines the latest developments within the port and shipping industry including the associated risks and threats.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789661699 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789661705 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789661712 £160 Previous edition: 9780749472689 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Maritime

Author Information Dong-Wook Song is Professor of Transport and Logistics at the Transport Research Institute, Edinburgh Napier University. His work is well-recognized in the field and he has received a number of The Best Paper Awards from academic associations and communities. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in transport and logistics. Dong has worked as a consultant for a number of private and public organizations including the UN, OECD, ADB and World Bank. He has served as an elected council member at IAME since 2012. Photis M Panayides is Professor in Shipping Economics, Department of Commerce, Finance and Shipping at Cyprus University of Technology. He reviews for several major journals in the field and has pioneered the development of academic and professional programmes in shipping and logistics. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in the field.

157

Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations

This new edition of Maritime Logistics features chapters on maintenance optimization, supply chain integration and economies of scale within liner shipping and customer service and port performance within port management. The updated content provides a formative approach to learning for both practitioners and students alike. Written by a team of international experts with over fifty years’ experience in the field, this book provides a truly global perspective. This book covers everything that students of logistics, as well as those working within the industry, need to know about maritime logistics.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Bahasa-Indonesian 2nd Edition: Korean

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Introduction to maritime logistics [Dong-Wook Song and Photis M Panayides] 2 Maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator [Albert W Veenstra] 3 International maritime trade and logistics [Funda Yercan and Turkay Yildiz] 4 Defining maritime logistics and its value [Eon-Seong Lee, Hyung-Sik Nam and DongWook Song] 5 Hinterland logistics and global supply chains [Rickard Bergqvist] 6 Human elements in maritime logistics [Cecelia Osterman and Anna-Lisa Oswalder] 2 Shipping logistics 7 Intermodal freight transport and logistics [Katsuhiko Hayashi and Toshinori Nemoto] 8 Developing liner service networks in container shipping [Cesar Ducruet and Theo Notteboom]

9 Supply chain integration of shipping companies [Photis M Panayides, Robert Wiedmer, Panayiotis C Andrea and Christodoulos Louca] 10 Logistics strategy in container shipping [Alfred J Baird] 11 Tanker shipping logistics [Robert Desrosiers] 12 Dry bulk shipping logistics [Claude Comtois and Romuald Lacoste] 3 Port logistics 13 Dry ports in concept and practice [Violeta Ruso and Andrea Rosa] 14 Port-centric logistics in concept and practice [Nikolaos Valantasis-Kanellos and DongWook Song] 15 Container hub ports in concept and practice [HyungSik Nam and Dong-Wook Song] 16 Multinationalizing container ports – Business models and strategies [Francesco Parola] 17 Public-private partnerships and port logistics performance [ Jasmine Siu Lee Lam, Francesco parola and Photis M Panayides]

18 Port and logistics chains – Changes in organizational effectiveness [Cimen Karatos Cetin] 19 Logistics performance of supply chain-oriented ports [Su Han Woo, Stephen Pettit and Anthony Beresford] 4 Conclusion 20 Looking ahead [Photis M Panayides and Dong-Wook Song]

Accounting, Finance & Banking Innovation and Best Practice in Accounting & Finance Banking & Insurance Personal Finance & Investment

www.koganpage.com

158

Featured Titles

Financial Technology

The Cryptocurrency Revolution

Niels Pedersen December 2020 9781789665437

Rhian Lewis October 2020 9781789665680

Reinventing Banking and Finance

Green and Sustainable Finance

Helene Panzarino & Alessandro Hatami November 2020 9781789664096

Simon Thompson March 2021 9781789664546

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

159

Reinventing Banking and Finance Frameworks to Navigate Global Fintech Innovation

This book

advice for banking and finance professionals on the drivers and challenges of innovation, « Provides and the possibilities of collaboration and partnerships the emergence of global fintech hubs, including London, New York, Tel Aviv, the Gulf and « Explores Shenzhen, and how their specialisms distinguish them examples of companies leading in innovation and interviews with innovators and experts « Contains to capture multiple perspectives current technology trends in banking and finance such as AI, machine learning, blockchain « Covers and digital identity the background and building blocks of innovation in financial services and the key factors « Outlines which have shaped the industry such as mobile, cybersecurity and big data

Description The finance industry is currently going through a digital revolution, with new and developing technology transforming the world of banking and financial services beyond recognition. Banks and financial institutions worldwide recognize the pressing need to innovate to avoid disruption or displacement by highly agile and often smaller fintech companies. Reinventing Banking and Finance is an essential guide for finance professionals to current trends in fintech, innovation frameworks, the challenges of outsourcing or embedding innovation, and how to effectively collaborate with other organizations.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/11/2020 Paperback: 9781789664096 £29.99 Ebook: 9781789664102 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789664126 £90 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Helene Panzarino is a highly experienced fintech Programme Director, exited entrepreneur, educator and author. Her most recent role was MD of the global Rainmaking Colab fintech Programme, a world-first, postaccelerator programme for Series A+ fintechs and Tier 1 financial institutions. She is also an Associate Director of the LIBF Digital Banking Centre, the Lead Fellow and creator on a world-first fintech Pathway in a Masters in Tech Entrepreneurship Degree for UCL. She is a co-creator and lead delivery partner on the Imperial College Fintech Executive Education. Alessandro Hatami is the founder of advisory firm Pacemakers.io, specialising in digital transformation in financial services. He has been a practitioner of digital innovation in banking for over 15 years, holding senior executive roles at businesses such as PayPal, Lloyds Banking Group, PayPoint and GE Capital.

160

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Beginning with the history and background of how banking got to the era of fintech, the book provides a thorough overview of the global fintech ecosystem and the drivers behind innovation in technologies, business models and distribution channels. Examples of key institutions and interviews with innovators and experts shine a light on key financial innovation hubs in UK, US, China, Israel and more, and offer advice for institutions looking to choose the right market for their needs. Covering genuine innovations in AI, machine learning, blockchain and digital identity, Reinventing Banking and Finance offers expert insight into navigating the complex and multi-layered finance industry.

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents Preface 1 The evolution of fintech 1 The foundations of innovation in finance 2 The digital threat 3 The shape of the perfect neobank 4 The journey from bricks and mortar to digital 5 The fintech hubs 6 The fintech tribes 2 Profiles of global fintech hubs 7 London 8 Gulf Cooperation Council 9 Paris 10 New York 11 Tel Aviv 12 Shenzhen 13 Conclusions

Accounting for NonAccountants

This book

« Presents the basics of both financial and management accounting in an easy to follow format review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, to « Contains embed learning to this edition: fully updated with new content including reworked chapters on the current « New issues in accounting and economic issues that have an effect on accounting the reader up to date on UK GAAP accounting standards, International Financial Reporting « Brings Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS) resources: Over 200 additional review questions to support the book and a glossary of key « Online terms Description Accounting has a reputation as a technical and jargon-heavy subject, but there is no reason why those without formal training cannot master the basics of interpreting accounts and making good decisions. Accounting for Non-Accountants assumes no prior knowledge of the subject area and is designed to serve as an introductory text for managers and non-specialists who wish to gain an oversight of the accounting discipline. The book covers both financial and management accounting in sufficient detail to allow data to be interpreted but in a clear and accessible manner so the reader can quickly gain an understanding of the basic principles of the subject area.

Edition: 12 Date: 03/05/2020 Paperback: 9781789664300 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789664317 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789664331 £60 Previous edition: 9780749480769 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 240x160 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information David Horner has taught Accounting and related courses for over 25 years in the UK. He currently teaches at Birkdale school, Sheffield. He has written numerous textbooks aimed at students both for schools and university level. He has worked with AQA, a major examination board in the UK, for over 20 years.

161

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Now in its 12th edition, Accounting for Non-Accountants has been fully updated to the latest regulatory requirements including the UK GAAP framework, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS). The final chapter focuses on the impact of changes in the economic environment on businesses and there are introductions to areas including tax, transfer pricing and creative accounting. This practical guide includes review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, and is supported online by over 200 questions and a glossary to develop a firm understanding of all topics.

Rights Sold 10th Edition: Arabic

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Financial Record Keeping Income Statements The Balance Sheet Further Adjustments to the Income Statement 5 Checking the Double-entry System 6 Accounting Concepts 7 Accounting for Other Business Organisations 8 An Introduction to Business Costing 9 Marginal Costing and Decision Making 10 Standard Costing 11 Budgeting 12 Working Capital Management 13 Capital Investment Appraisal 14 An Introduction to Limited Companies 15 Published Accounts of the Limited Company 16 Current Issues in Accounting 17 Statement of Cash Flows 18 Accounting Ratios 19 The Economic Environment

Financial Technology Case Studies in Fintech Innovation

This book

analytical frameworks with a commercial perspective informed by the author’s « Combines professional experience and academic research explains key technologies and emerging business models in a clear and accessible « Thoroughly manner for those with no technological background a mix of international case studies from large financial services organizations and smaller « Includes start-ups, including HSBC, ING, Amex, AIG, IBM, Tandem and Monzo the topics required for postgraduate and undergraduate Financial Technology courses and « Covers includes learning objectives, exercises, coursework questions and curated further reading lists resources: lecture slides, video lectures, a literature review and updated case studies to « Online cover industry developments

Description With the continued success of fintech (financial technology) businesses around the world, financial services are becoming increasingly de-centralized, personalized, and automated. This new textbook strikes a balance between academic depth and commercial relevance in examining the advantages and challenges of these changes through the lens of various analytical frameworks. Financial Technology demystifies key technologies, such as blockchains, Internet of Things, AI, machine learning, and algorithmic data analysis, in a clear and accessible style suitable for readers with no technological background. New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/12/2020 Paperback: 9781789665437 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789665444 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789665451 £120 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Real-world case studies from a variety of international organizations including HSBC, ING, Amex, AIG, IBM, Tandem and Monzo, bridge the gap between theory and practice and contextualize learning in terms of real businesses, from large incumbents to smaller start-ups. With coverage of robo-advisors, mobile-only banks, open banking and risk and regulation, this book also explores a range of analytical frameworks to critically examine new technologies and emerging business models.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Niels Pedersen is a Senior Lecturer on the MSc Financial Technology programme at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, and a regular conference speaker on fintech. As a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW), he worked at PwC and the Financial Services Authority before coming to academia.

162

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Financial Technology enables readers to understand the fintech movement in the context of recent financial history, examine the key drivers of change and form insights about the financial system in a forward-looking and global manner. Online resources include PowerPoint slides for lecturers, video lectures, a literature review and blog posts to cover industry developments.

1 Prices and information 2 Networks and platform banking 3 Disruption and disintermediation 4 Engaging customers with behavioural science 5 De-centralisation and blockchain 6 Automation and machine learning 7 Internet of things and new user interfaces 8 Security and hacking 9 Regulation and ethics 10 Summary - how to understand a fintech business

Green and Sustainable Finance Principles and Practice

This book

how green and sustainable finance principles can be applied in banking, investment and « Explains insurance risk and regulation in green finance, international market frameworks and standards, and « Covers the role of a range of financial institutions and markets the range of green finance products and services, including those offered by fintech « Explores organizations « Considers ethics and professionalism, and how the finance sector can mainstream green finance « Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s Green Finance Certificate

Description As the finance sector aims to meet the challenges of climate change and the transition to a lowcarbon world, green finance has grown increasingly mainstream. This book is a comprehensive guide to the application of common green and sustainable practices in banking, investment and insurance.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/03/2021 Paperback: 9781789664546 £49.99 Ebook: 9781789664553 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789664577 £160 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Simon Thompson is the Chief Executive of the Chartered Banker Institute and leads their work to shape and implement professional standards and professional development for bankers. He previously worked for the Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA), the International Accounting Education Standards Board (IAESB) and is a former Vice President of the European Bank Training Network. He holds an MBA from the University of Edinburgh and chairs the Global Education Standards Committee recently established by a group of leading international banking institutes.

163

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Focusing on the necessity and development of the global green finance sector, it also includes clear explanations of the science underpinning climate change. Green and Sustainable Finance covers the range of green finance products and services, including green bonds and asset-backed securities, in retail, commercial and corporate banking, insurance and the fintech industry. It explains the importance of risk, regulation, international market frameworks and standards, and the role of different financial institutions and markets. Consideration is also given to the ethical dimensions of green finance and how professionals can promote market integrity. Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as the core text for their Green Finance Certificate, Green and Sustainable Finance is essential reading for finance professionals, students and those working in climate science.

Table of Contents

Introduction [Sir Roger Gifford, UK Green Finance Taskforce Chair] 1 An introduction to green finance 2 Finance in our changing world 3 Greening our financial system – International, national, industry and institutional responses 4 Monitoring, evaluation and reporting 5 Risk in green finance 6 Retail, commercial and corporate banking 7 Green bonds and asset-backed securities 8 Central and development banks 9 Equity markets and investment funds 10 Insurance 11 Fintech in green finance 12 Mainstreaming green finance

The Daily Telegraph Tax Guide 2020 Your Complete Guide to the Tax Return for 2019/20

This book

« The only tax guide on the market to advice readers on how to complete tax returns for 2019/20 « Simplifies the complicated world of tax returns with practical, step-by-step guidance « Teaches you how to be as tax efficient as possible so that you can save money « Updated annually to include tax and legislative changes Description The Daily Telegraph Tax Guide is the UK’s bestselling tax handbook, containing everything you need to know about completing a self-assessment tax return for 2019/20. With advice on how to complete self-assessment tax returns and a number of tax saving tips, this book includes: ·Key changes from the Budget and Spring Statements ·Dealing effectively with HM Revenue & Customs ·Worked illustrations showing you how to complete your tax submission ·How living or working abroad affects the tax that you pay ·Tax saving tips which will help you save money ·Inheritance Tax and potentially exempt transfers

Edition: 44 Date: 03/05/2020 Paperback: 9781789665536 £16.99 Ebook: 9781789665550 £16.99 Hardback: 9781789665543 £50 Previous edition: 9780749486297 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x157 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Personal Finance & Investment

Author Information Phil Thornton is an experienced awardwinning financial report writer and journalist and runs Clarity Economics. He worked at the Independent where he was the business news editor and Chief Economics Correspondent. He won the title of Feature Writer of the Year in the Work World Media Awards run by the Work Foundation. He is the author of two books and writes for a range of publications including The Wall Street Journal, the Guardian, The Times, the Daily Telegraph, Financial Director, Emerging Markets, Procurement Leaders City AM and PM-Select.

164

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Whether you are self-employed, work part time or full time, are unemployed or retired, if you pay tax, The Daily Telegraph Tax Guide is invaluable. It helps ensure that you are as tax efficient as possible, offering practical advice, timetables and examples that make the complex and challenging world of tax returns easier to understand.

Rights Sold 44th Edition: Polish

Table of Contents Introduction 1 You and HMRC 2 Tax rates and allowances 3 Tax credits 4 Interest payments and other outgoings 5 Working in employment 6 Value added tax 7 Working for yourself 8 National insurance and state benefits 9 State and private pensions 10 Savings and investment income 11 The family unit 12 Residence and domicile 13 Capital gains 14 How to complete your tax return and work out your tax 15 Paying your tax, interest and penalties 16 Elections and claims – Time limits 17 Inheritance tax 18 Budget measures

Good Retirement Guide 2021 Everything You Need to Know About Health, Property, Investment, Leisure, Work, Pensions and Tax

This book

crucial guidance on planning for retirement, part-retirement solutions, later-life learning, « Contains continuing or changing careers, relevant UK legislation and social and personal health and fulfilment

clear and concise advice on finance, housing, health, holidays, supporting elderly parents, « Offers post-retirement careers and starting a business impartial and reliable information and advice, allowing the reader to make informed « Presents choices about their retirement plans

Description Not sure what retirement actually includes or how to prepare for it? Whether it is a relaxing, action-packed or financially rewarding retirement you want, this is the book for you. In retirement, personal ambitions can be realized and new experiences enjoyed, yet with so much to consider, people are often unsure how best to plan for their future. The Good Retirement Guide 2021 is an indispensable book that you will refer to again and again, offering clear and concise suggestions on a broad range of subjects for pre-retirement planning in the UK. Updated for the new financial year, The Good Retirement Guide 2021 is packed with hundreds of useful hints, tips and insights into your retirement preparation. Including information on: finance (investments, pensions, annuities and drawdown, benefits and tax), housing, health, holidays, starting a business and looking after elderly parents, this book will help you to save more, live better and be happier. Edition: 35 Date: 03/01/2021 Paperback: 9781789667592 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789667608 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789667615 £60 Previous edition: 9780749483975 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: General Product Category: General Subject: Personal Finance & Investment

Author Information Jonquil Lowe is an economist and author specializing in personal finance. With a background in stockbroking and then as head of money research at Which?, her career spans 40 years and over 30 books, the latest being The Good Retirement Guide, published by Kogan Page. She is Senior Lecturer in Economics and Personal Finance at the Open University, a Senior Fellow of the Higher Education Academy, and an Associate Member of the Chartered Institute for Securities and Investments.

165

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Table of Contents 1

Are you looking forward to retirement? 2 Money in general 3 Pensions 4 Tax 5 Investment 6 Financial advisers 7 Budget planner 8 Your home 9 Leisure activities 10 Entrepreneurship and retirement 11 Looking for paid work 12 Voluntary work 13 Health 14 Holidays 15 No one is immortal

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech Driving Banking Innovation Through Effective Partnerships

This book

how banks can collaborate with fintech firms to drive innovation in areas such as cash « Explores management, compliance and tax key fintech segments such as regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance « Explains management case studies and business models of banks who have had successful partnerships including « Includes Barclays and Citibank « Covers key fintech hubs in Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America and the US

Description Fintech has emerged as one of the fastest growing sectors in the financial services industry and has radically disrupted traditional banking. However, it has become clear that for both to thrive, the culture between fintech and incumbent firms must change from one of competition to collaboration. The Financial Services Guide to Fintech looks at this trend in detail, using case studies of successful partnerships to show how banks and fintech organizations can work together to innovate faster and increase profitability. Written by an experienced fintech advisor and influencer, this book explains the fundamental concepts of this exciting space and the key segments to have emerged, including regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance management. It looks at the successes and failures of bank-fintech collaboration, focusing on technologies and start-ups that are highly relevant to banks’ product and business areas such as cash management, compliance and tax. With international coverage of key markets, The Financial Services Guide to Fintech offers practical guidance, use cases and business models for banks and financial services firms to use when working with fintech companies. Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2020 Paperback: 9780749486372 £29.99 Ebook: 9780749486389 £29.99 Hardback: 9781789661064 £90 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Banking & Insurance

Author Information Devie Mohan is a fintech industry advisor and analyst based in London, UK. She is co-founder and CEO of Burnmark, a fintech research company, a contributor to the ING group Think Forward Initiative, and sits on the Editorial Board for the Journal of Digital Banking. She has been listed in the top 10 of various fintech influencer lists. In 2019 she was included in the Financial Times’ list of the 100 most influential BAME leaders in technology.

166

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Rights Sold 1st Edition: Chinese (Simplified)

Table of Contents 1

Banks versus fintechs during the economic crisis 2 Fintech for customer experience 3 Early collaboration models 4 Widening of the fintech ecosystem 5 Emerging markets driving innovation 6 Governments and fintech hubs 7 Fintech segments at play 8 B2B fintech 9 Collaboration models within fintech 10 Challenger banking 11 Data and analytics 12 Conclusion

The Cryptocurrency Revolution Finance in the Age of Bitcoin, Blockchains and Tokens

This book

together the most important takeaways from the growth of cryptocurrencies and blockchains, « Pulls looking at their potential impact on traditional business and finance the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how the landscape has « Explains evolved how blockchains can enable new financial products and efficiencies for incumbent banks « Explores and financial institutions the implications of Big Tech companies such as Facebook entering the digital currency « Examines market the attitudes of governments and regulators around the world to genuinely borderless « Compares technologies

Description For a long time, the world of cryptocurrencies and blockchains was viewed as a niche space of little interest to mainstream business and finance sectors. With J.P. Morgan, Facebook, Walmart, and even some central banks investing in these new technologies, this has undoubtedly changed. The Cryptocurrency Revolution explains the most important takeaways from the continued growth of digital currencies and blockchains and explores the transformative possibilities of borderless payments and machine-to-machine transactions.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/10/2020 Paperback: 9781789665680 £19.99 Ebook: 9781789665697 £19.99 Hardback: 9781789665703 £60 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Banking & Insurance

Author Information Rhian Lewis is a consultant software engineer, instructor and former digital journalist at The Times. She is the co-founder of the London Women in Bitcoin meetup and launched the altcoin portfolio tracker countmycrypto.com. She is an international conference speaker and blogger on blockchain and cryptocurrency.

167

Accounting, Finance & Banking

Written in jargon-free and accessible language, this book examines the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how blockchains could enable banks to become more efficient. It looks at the potential impact of company-backed digital currencies (such as Facebook’s Libra) and how governments and regulators around the world are reacting to new innovations. With discussion of the principles of tokenomics and the difference between public and private blockchains, The Cryptocurrency Revolution is the essential guide for professionals wishing to understand the threats and opportunities of the changing world of money.

Table of Contents 1 What is money? 2 Ten years of Bitcoin 3 Dogecoin and novelty cryptocurrencies 4 Libra and how Big Tech is moving in on cryptocurrencies 5 Tokenomics 6 Driving change with token incentives – A tokenomics case study 7 Public blockchains vs private blockchains 8 ICO mania 9 Non-fungible tokens 10 Making banks more efficient with blockchains 11 New financial instruments and processes 12 Regulation and government 13 State-issued programmable money

Risk & Compliance Innovation and Best Practice in Compliance & Regulation Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR Information, Knowledge & Data Management Risk Management

www.koganpage.com

168

Featured Titles

Fundamentals of Risk Management

The Organizational Resilience Handbook

Paul Hopkin July 2018 9780749483074

Graham Bell August 2020 9781789661842

Operational Risk Management in Financial Services

Business Continuity Management

Elena Pykhova July 2021 9781789667080

James Crask April 2021 9781789668131

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

169

Operational Risk Management in Financial Services A Practical Guide to Establishing Effective Solutions

This book

operational risk management from a practical perspective; guiding the reader on how to « Examines establish effective solutions and avoid common pitfalls with frameworks and case studies results from polls taken by risk practitioners which provide a snapshot of current practices « Includes and allow the reader to benchmark against other firms clear advice on conducting risk assessments, designing Key Risk Indicators and drafting « Offers operational risk reports the latest thinking in operational risk management, including top risks such as technology « Reflects failures, data loss, issues with providers of outsourced services, misconduct and mis-selling from the author’s 25 years of experience as an operational risk executive and international « Benefits trainer

Description Technology failures, data loss, issues with providers of outsourced services, misconduct and mis-selling are just some of the top risks that keep financial firms up at night. In this context effective operational risk management is, simply, a commercial necessity. The management of operational risk, defined by the Basel Accord as arising from failures of processes, people, systems or external events, has developed considerably since its early years. Continued regulatory focus and catastrophic industry events have led to operational risk becoming a crucial topic on senior management’s agenda. This book is a practical guide for practitioners which focuses on how to establish effective solutions and avoid common pitfalls.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/07/2021 Paperback: 9781789667080 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789667110 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789667097 £120 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Elena Pykhova is an operational risk executive specializing in strategy, design and implementation of firm-wide operational risk frameworks. She is an experienced operational risk trainer, running public and in-house training courses in the UK and internationally for institutions such as the London Stock Exchange Academy. She is the Chair of the Operational Risk Committee for the Association of Foreign Banks and the former Director for Education at the Institute of Operational Risk.

Filled with frameworks, case studies and diagrams, this book offers clear advice on key practices including conducting risk assessments, assessing change initiatives, designing Key Risk Indicators, scenario analysis, drafting appetite statements and risk reporting. Operational Risk Management in Financial Services also features results from polls taken by risk practitioners which provide a snapshot of current practices and allow the reader to benchmark themselves against other firms. This is the essential guide for professionals looking to derive value out of operational risk management, rather than applying a compliance ‘tick box’ approach.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

170

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Operational risk not operations risk Practitioner’s toolbox – key framework tools Losses and near misses Risk and control selfassessments Change management Key Risk Indicators Scenario analysis Operational risk appetite Operational risk reporting Three lines of defence Risk culture and risk messages Operational resilience Operational risk training and education In conclusion – have we mastered operational risk?

Fundamentals of Risk Management Understanding, Evaluating and Implementing Effective Risk Management

This book

regulatory developments affecting risks to reputation, the business model and strategy, « Includes along with improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting for assurance and reporting purposes

successful risk management with examples including Colgate Palmolive, Tesco and United « Explains Utilities to this edition: now completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 standard and « New COSO ERM Framework « Online resources: lecture slides with figures, tables and key points from the book developments in enterprise risk management (ERM), loss control and the value of insurance « Covers as a risk management method

Description This fifth edition of Fundamentals of Risk Management is a comprehensive introduction to commercial and business risk for students and risk professionals. Providing extensive coverage of the core frameworks of business continuity planning, enterprise risk management and project risk management, this is the definitive guide to dealing with the different types of risk an organization faces. With relevant international case examples including Ericsson, Network Rail and Unilever, the book provides a full analysis of changes in contemporary risk areas including supply chain, cyber risk, risk culture and appetite, improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting.

Edition: 5 Date: 03/07/2018 Paperback: 9780749483074 £39.99 Ebook: 9780749483081 £39.99 Previous edition: 9780749479619 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 240x170 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Paul Hopkin is an internationally recognized risk management professional and was previously Technical Director at the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) and held the same role at Airmic for nine years previously. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is a Certified Fellow of the IRM. The IRM is the world’s leading professional body for risk management, driving excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for opportunities and threats of the future.

Now revised to be completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 and COSO ERM Framework, this comprehensive text reflects developments in regulations, reputation risk, loss control and the value of insurance as a risk management method. Also including a thorough overview of international risk management standards and frameworks, strategy and policy, Fundamentals of Risk Management is the definitive text for those beginning or considering a career in risk. Online supporting resources include lecture slides with figures, tables and key points from the book.

Rights Sold 4th Edition: Vietnamese 5th Edition: Arabic, Chinese (Simplified), Greek

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 3 10 11 12 13 14 4 15 16 17 18 5 19 20 21

171

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Introduction to Risk Management Approaches to Defining Risk Impact of Risk on Organizations Types of Risks Scope of Risk Management Principles and Aims of Risk Management Approaches to Risk Management Risk Management Standards Establishing the Context Enterprise Risk Management Alternative Approaches Risk Assessment Risk Assessment Considerations Risk Classification Systems Risk Analysis and Evaluation Loss Control Defining the Upside of Risk Risk Response Tolerate, Treat, Transfer and terminate Risk Control Techniques Insurance and Risk Transfer Business Continuity Risk Strategy Core Business Processes Reputation and the Business Model Risk Management Context

22 Risk Management Responsibilities 23 Control of Selected Hazard Risks 6 Risk Culture 24 Risk-Aware Culture 25 Importance of Risk Appetite 26 Risk Training and Communication 27 Risk Practitioner Competencies 7 Risk Governance 28 Corporate Governance Model 29 Stakeholder Expectations 30 Operational Risk Management 31 Project Risk Management 32 Supply Chain Management 8 Risk Assurance 33 The Control Environment 34 Risk Assurance Techniques 35 Internal Audit Activities 36 Reporting on Risk Management

Cyber Risk Management Prioritize Threats, Identify Vulnerabilities and Apply Controls

This book

guidance on managing common threats to confidentiality, integrity and availability « Provides including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, along with « Includes implementation review checklists at the end of each chapter « Explores how to prioritize relevant risks rather than those sensationalized by the media human factors around cyber risk and how they impact employee training and cyber « Covers awareness « Contains interviews with leading security and risk professionals from a variety of industries

Description Most organizations are undergoing a digital transformation of some sort and are looking to embrace innovative technology, but new ways of doing business inevitably lead to new threats which can cause irreparable financial, operational and reputational damage. In an increasingly punitive regulatory climate, organizations are also under pressure to be more accountable and compliant. Cyber Risk Management clearly explains the importance of implementing a cyber security strategy and provides practical guidance for those responsible for managing threat events, vulnerabilities and controls, including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2019 Paperback: 9780749484125 £39.99 Ebook: 9780749484132 £39.99 Hardback: 9780749498788 £120 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 232x157 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Christopher J Hodson is Chief Information Security Officer (CISO), EMEA at Tanium. He has 18 years’ experience across the financial, retail, energy and media industry sectors and was previously CISO, EMEA and Data Protection Officer at Zscaler. He holds an MSc in Cyber Security from Royal Holloway and retains an active role in the Infosec industry through directorship of the Institute of Information Security Professionals (IISP) and membership of CompTIA’s Cyber Security Committee.

172

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, add context throughout and emphasize the importance of communicating security and risk effectively, while implementation review checklists bring together key points at the end of each chapter. Cyber Risk Management analyzes the innate human factors around risk and how they affect cyber awareness and employee training, along with the need to assess the risks posed by third parties. Including an introduction to threat modelling, this book presents a data-centric approach to cyber risk management based on business impact assessments, data classification, data flow modelling and assessing return on investment. It covers pressing developments in artificial intelligence, machine learning, big data and cloud mobility, and includes advice on responding to risks which are applicable for the environment and not just based on media sensationalism.

Table of Contents 1 Contextualizing cybersecurity risk 1 Why now? The only constant is change 2 Technologies and security challenges 3 Data breaches 2 Cybersecurity programme management 4 What are cybersecurity and cybercrime? 5 Establishing a cybersecurity programme 3 Actors, events and vulnerabilities 6 Threat actors 7 Threat events 8 Vulnerabilities 9 Controls 4 Conclusion – The cybersecurity risk equation explained 10 Cyber risk management – A conclusion

The Organizational Resilience Handbook A Practical Guide to Achieving Greater Resilience

This book

a tool for organizational resilience capability which can be scaled and adapted to any « Introduces business regardless of size or complexity how to conduct detailed assessments, report on resilience capability, benchmark « Explains performance, and develop strategies for achieving greater resilience case studies analyzing House of Fraser, Mercedes, Alibaba, BP, Transport for London and « Features the WannaCry ransomware attack related topics such as knowledge management, security, organizational learning, compliance « Covers and business transformation « Avoids the common pitfalls of focusing solely on unexpected events and crisis management

Description For businesses to grow and be successful their approach to resilience must be defined by a holistic and risk-focused outlook, rather than one which is narrow and dominated by event-oriented continuity practices. The Organizational Resilience Handbook shows that success is as much to do with innovation and the speed with which new products are brought to market as it is with organizations having to deal with unexpected crisis situations. It comprehensively covers the full breadth and depth of the field and introduces related topics such as security, safety, e-commerce, emerging technologies and customer experience.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 13/08/2020 Paperback: 9781789661842 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789661859 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789661866 £120 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Graham Bell is a consultant and trainer specialising in organizational resilience and the assessment and mitigation of business risks. He delivers a qualification course on organizational resilience regulated by Ofqual and has 30 years’ international experience in roles across manufacturing, telecoms, transport and energy sectors. He is a Fellow of the Institute for Strategy, Resilience & Security (ISRS), at University College London (UCL), and of the Institute of Strategic Risk Management (ISRM). He is also a member of the BSI Committee (CAR/001/01) tasked with the revision of BS 65000 Organization Resilience.

173

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Through adopting a strategic and progressive approach, practitioners can apply the book’s methodology to develop an in-depth understanding of resilience within their own organization and use it to effectively engage with the board and senior management in developing strategies for achieving greater resilience capability. A range of high-profile case studies, such as Mercedes, the UK’s National Health Service, Alibaba and BP, help to illustrate the concept of resilience by detailing characteristics and behaviours which confirm its meaning. The Organizational Resilience Handbook is a practical guide to self-assessment, benchmarking performance and implementing resilience frameworks in any organization.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The organizational resilience context Definitions and models of organizational resilience The reasoning behind and benefits of resilience Organizational resilience case studies An organizational resilience capability model Assessment and reporting of resilience Key issues and ideas related to organizational resilience Application and implementation of a resilience framework

Business Continuity Management A Practical Guide to Organizational Resilience and ISO 22301

This book

« Explains how to implement the best practice contained in ISO 22301:2019 a maturity model to help plan and measure progress and Key Performance Indicators to « Includes help understand when resilience capabilities are working case studies of significant organizational crises and disruptions and explores the lessons « Features learned templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance, including « Contains a Business Impact Analysis key issues including getting the Board engaged, obtaining real investment for resilience « Tackles building and making sure departments keep plans up to date Description Implement practical solutions in business continuity management and organizational resilience guided by international best practice from ISO 22301:2019. Business continuity management and organizational resilience are critical to maintaining a healthy business, but the process can easily become overly process-driven, too detailed and disengaging. As a consequence, many organizations either do nothing (leaving themselves exposed to disruption), take short cuts (leaving major gaps) or lose the interest of senior stakeholders. This book is a straightforward guide to implementing business continuity, including practical solutions built from the author’s personal experience delivering hundreds of projects in a variety of business settings.

New

Edition: 1 Title Date: 03/04/2021 Paperback: 9781789668131 £39.99 Ebook: 9781789668148 £39.99 Hardback: 9781789668155 £120 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Risk Management

Author Information James Crask is Global Lead for Resilience Advisory Services at Marsh, based in UK, working with clients to deliver resilience and business continuity solutions. He also chairs the International Standards Committee (ISO) responsible for all global Business Continuity and Organisational Resilience ISO Standards, including ISO 22301:2019. He previously worked for PwC where he was responsible for building the UK firm’s business resilience advisory services and has held roles for the Nuclear Decommissioning Authority in the UK and for the British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC).

Business Continuity Management explains how business continuity should sit within a wider risk and organizational resilience framework and how to explain its importance to senior decision makers to ensure appropriate investment. Readers will benefit from case studies of organizational crises and disruptions, a maturity model to plan and measure progress, Key Performance Indicators and templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance. This book is the essential reference for business continuity and resilience, with frameworks and examples which can be tailored to any organization.

Table of Contents 1 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

174

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Business continuity management and resilience An introduction to the basic concepts Quick start guide – What does good look like? A recent history of BCM and the emergence of resilience What can we learn from International Standards? How business continuity and resilience differs between industries Comparing incident management, crisis management and business recovery A guide to the core components of the BCM lifecycle Gaining the attention of the Board Setting the requirements for resilience Developing the governance Implementing resources Delivering the Business Impact Analysis Writing plans Incident response, crisis management and recovery Training and exercising Supply chain resilience

16 Testing and auditing 3 Templates and checklists 17 Planning 18 Response 19 Reporting and assurance

IT Governance An International Guide to Data Security and ISO 27001/ISO 27002

This book

on the development and implementation of an information security management system « Advises that will meet the ISO 27001 specification « Outlines IT governance best practice for international organizations of all sizes and across sectors to this edition: changes in global regulation (including GDPR) and updates to standards in « New the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) and the latest standards on auditing

topics such as risk assessment, asset management, controls, security, supplier relationships « Covers and compliance

Description Faced with the compliance requirements of increasingly punitive information and privacy-related regulation, as well as the proliferation of complex threats to information security, there is an urgent need for organizations to adopt IT governance best practice. IT Governance is a key international resource for managers in organizations of all sizes and across industries, and deals with the strategic and operational aspects of information security.

Edition: 7 Date: 03/10/2019 Paperback: 9780749496951 £49.99 Ebook: 9780749496968 £49.99 Hardback: 9781789660302 £160 Previous edition: 9780749474058 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 233x157 Band: Professional/Academic Product Category: Professional/Academic Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Author Information Alan Calder is Group CEO of GRC International Group plc, the AIM-listed company that owns IT Governance Ltd.. He led the world’s first successful implementation of BS 7799 (now ISO 27001) and was involved in developing a wide range of information security management training courses, accredited by the International Board for IT Governance Qualifications (IBITGQ). Steve Watkins is Executive Director at GRC International Group plc, chair of the UK ISO/IEC 27001 User Group and contracted technical assessor for UKAS. He is a member of the international technical committee responsible for the ISO 27000 family of standards, and chairs the UK National Standards Body’s technical committee IST/33 (information security, cyber security and privacy protection) that mirrors it.

175

Risk, Compliance & CSR

Now in its seventh edition, the bestselling IT Governance provides guidance for companies looking to protect and enhance their information security management systems (ISMS) and protect themselves against cyber threats. The new edition covers changes in global regulation, particularly GDPR, and updates to standards in the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) plus the latest standards on auditing. It also includes advice on the development and implementation of an ISMS that will meet the ISO 27001 specification and how sector-specific standards can and should be factored in. With information on risk assessments, compliance, equipment and operations security, controls against malware and asset management, IT Governance is the definitive guide to implementing an effective information security management and governance system.

Table of Contents 1

Why is information security necessary? 2 The UK combined code, the FRC risk guidance and Sarbanes-Oxley 3 ISO27001 4 Organizing information security 5 Information security policy and scope 6 The risk assessment and Statement of Applicability 7 Mobile devices 8 Human resources security 9 Asset management 10 Media handling 11 Access control 12 User access management 13 System and application access control 14 Cryptography 15 Physical and environmental security 16 Equipment security 17 Operations security 18 Controls against malicious software (malware) 19 Communications management 20 Exchanges of information 21 System acquisition, development and maintenance

22 Development and support processes 23 Supplier relationships 24 Monitoring and information security incident management 25 Business and information security continuity management 26 Compliance 27 The ISO27001 audit

Confident Series Enhance your professional life and master the fundamentals of key digital skills, whatever your career path.

9781789663082 Rob Percival & Darren Woods August 2020

9781789664386 Kirill Eremenko August 2020

9781789663365 Adam Waters August 2020

NEtW he

to es seri

9781789663457 Kenny Wood August 2020

9781789663402 Jessica Barker August 2020

www.koganpage.com/Confident

Helping readers take control of their careers Coming Soon!

9781789667004 Rita Clifton September 2020

9781789668360 Kathryn Bishop February 2021

9781789665642 Amina Aitsi-Selmi December 2020

9781789666847 Angelica Malin January 2021

9781789666915 Martin John Yate December 2020

9781789666410 Carl Reader October 2020

9781789665727 Shannon Houde February 2021

9781789666960 James Ashton March 2021

www.koganpage.com/careers

HR Fundamentals Practical introductions to all key areas of HR, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) Books in the series include tools, case studies, online resources and templates to help suppport students and anyone starting out in Human Resources careers.

9780749483517 Emma Bridger August 2018

9780749483210 Elizabeth Aylott September 2018

9780749483494 Rebecca Page-Tickell August 2018

9780749483234 Elizabeth Aylott September 2018

9780749483371 Linda Ashdown September 2018

9780749483517 Gillian Jones & Ro Gorell September 2018

9780749483418 Michael Rose August 2018

www.koganpage.com/HRfundamentals

United States & Canada Kogan Page Inc. 122 W 27th St, 10th Floor, New York, NY 10001

India 4737/23 Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi 110002

T: +1 (929) 362 7262 E: info@koganpage.com

T: +91 11 4224 2200 E: viva@vivagroupindia.in

Amy Joyner Head of Rights and Licensing

Matt De Bono Sales Manager (ex-N America)

T: +44 (0) 20 7843 1929 E: ajoyner@koganpage.com

T: +44 (0) 20 7843 1922 E: mdebono@koganpage.com

Our Distributors United Kingdom: The Book Service T: +44 (0) 1206 25 5678 | E: sales@tbs-ltd.co.uk United States & Canada: Ingram Publisher Services T: +1 (866) 400 5351 | E: ips@ingramcontent.com India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka & Bangladesh: Viva Books T: +91 (0) 11 4224 2200 | E: viva@vivagroupindia.in

UK & Ireland Field Representatives: Retail and Wholesale Lee Morgan, Sales Director T: +44 (0) 7901 916158 | E: lee.morgan@compassips.london Central and South London: Maddy Gwyer T: +44 (0) 7896 428429 | E: maddy.gwyer@compassips.london Other London and South East England: Sophie O'Reirdan T: +44 (0) 7387 022619 | E: sophie.oreirdan@compassips.london Southern England: Sarah Hodgen T: +44 (0) 7824 513720 | E: sarah.hodgen@compassips.london Central & Eastern England: Richard Lyle T: +44 (0) 7901 916170 | E: richard.lyle@compassips.london Scotland & Ireland: Michael Darcy T: +353 (0)86225 2380 | E: michael.darcy@brookside.ie Northern & Western England and Wales: David Smith T: 07901 916164 E: david.smith@compassips.london

Overseas Representatives Europe: Durnell Marketing Ltd T: +44 (0) 1892 544 272 | E: orders@durnell.co.uk Australia & New Zealand: Booktopia Publisher Services T: +61 2 9045 4336 | E: bps@booktopia.com.au Middle East & North Africa: International Publishing Services T: +971 4 2384001 | E: ipsgroup@eim.ae South Africa: Jonathan Ball Publishers T: +27(0) 11 601 8000 | E: services@jonathanball.co.za Sub-Saharan Africa: Africa Connection T: +44 (0) 1491 837 028 | M: +44 (0) 7808 522886 | E: guy.simpson@africaconnection.co.uk Singapore, Malaysia & Brunei: Pansing T: +65 6499 1730 | E: infobooks@pansing.com Japan, Taiwan, Korea, Cambodia, Philippines, Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam & Myanmar: The White Partnership T: +44 (0) 7973 176046 | E: andrew@thewhitepartnership.org.uk China & Hong Kong: China Publishers Marketing T: +86 21 5425 9557 | E: benjamin.pan@cpmarketing.com.cn Israel: Avicenna T: +44 (0) 7771 887 843 | E: avicenna-cdeg@outlook.com